JP7225140B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a game machine capable of performing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state for a player.

In a conventional gaming machine, when a predetermined condition (entering the starting area of the game ball) is satisfied, a specific display (suspension display or active display) based on the establishment of the predetermined condition is displayed on the display means. For variable display based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, there are those capable of executing a look-ahead notice suggesting that the variable display will be controlled to an advantageous state before the start of the variable display.

Furthermore, some conventional game machines are capable of executing a pre-reading notice (specific light emission effect) by causing light emitting means provided in the game machine to emit light (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2016-105941 A

However, in Patent Document 1, depending on the timing at which the specific display is started and the timing at which the specific light emission effect is started, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. can be considered.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that allows a player to easily recognize a specific display that is the target of a specific light emitting effect.

The game machine of means A is
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and being controllable to an advantageous state when a specific display result is derived and displayed,
a light emitting means capable of emitting light;
display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
an effect execution means capable of executing a specific display effect of displaying the specific display and a specific light emission effect of causing the light emitting means to emit light based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
sound output means capable of outputting a variable display corresponding sound corresponding to the variable display and a specific light emitting effect corresponding sound corresponding to the specific light emitting effect;
State control means capable of controlling a specific state;
updating means capable of updating the numerical information based on the execution of the variable display;
The effect execution means executes the specific light emission effect so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect,
A rate of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed,
The display mode of the specific display includes a normal mode, a special mode and a special mode,
The special aspect includes a first special aspect and a second special aspect different from the first special aspect,
When the specific display is displayed in the first special mode, the ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the second special mode,
The specific display of the special mode can be changed to either the first special mode or the second special mode,
When the specific display is displayed in the special mode, the ratio of execution of the specific light emission effect is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the special mode,
The sound output means outputs the sound corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect with priority over the sound corresponding to the variable display being output when the specific light-emitting effect is executed while the sound corresponding to the variable display is being output. is possible and
The state control means is capable of controlling to the specific state when a specific condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times,
The updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is performed and when the variable display of the second identification information is performed.
It is characterized by
Furthermore, the game machine of means 1 is
Performing variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and controllable to an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot game state) when a specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed. is a game machine,
Light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying specific displays (for example, pending display and active display) corresponding to variable display;
A specific display effect for displaying the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a portion in which a pending display or an active display is displayed in any one of the display patterns α to γ) ) and a specific light emitting effect (for example, flash effect at the time of winning) that causes the light emitting means to emit light, effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120)
with
The effect execution means executes the specific light emission effect so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, FIG. 10). -28, Figures 10-29(A) to 10-32(H), Figures 10-49(A) to 10-50(D), before the display of the pending indication is complete The part that lights the flash lamp 135SG009F when winning),
The ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-24, when the winning flash effect is executed) In the case of winning, the proportion of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning),
The light emitting means includes first light emitting means (for example, winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) and
The first light emitting means has a first period from the start of the specific light emission effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous winning flash effect). A second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, from the start of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize to the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. period) in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has the brightness C1 and A part that flashes at cycle T1 and flashes at brightness C2 and cycle T2 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the late winning),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect in the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed in the second period (for example, FIG. 10-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d blink at the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term, and the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term is executed. During the period, the part blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T0),
The specific display effect is performed by an appearance effect unit (for example, FIGS. ~As shown in FIG. 10-50(D), the effect control CPU 120 executes the specific display start effect execution process, and the part where the appearance animation in which the pending display and the active display gradually appear from the bottom to the top is displayed ), and a periodic effect section (for example, FIG. 10-15, FIG. 10-30 (D) to FIG. 10-32 (H), as shown in FIGS. 10-49 (B) to 10-50 (D), the effect control CPU 120 executes the specific display rotation display effect execution processing, so that the pending display and active display is displayed as a rotation animation) and
moreover,
Controllable state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17, step 100IWS166, step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 Part to be executed, as shown in FIG. 12-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and updating means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display (for example, As shown in FIG. 12-13, a portion for executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state control means, the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times It is possible to control to a special state when a special condition is established by this (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, FIG. 12-17 As shown, the part that executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means executes the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. It is characterized by updating the numerical information in each case (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100).
According to this feature, since the light emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, the player can easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the first period of the specific light emission effect. , not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means can emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, so that the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous. This makes it even easier for the player to recognize the specified display. Furthermore, even if the game state changes and any of the identification information is displayed variably, the updating of the numerical information continues, so that the player can be easily rescued and the motivation for playing the game can be enhanced.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include the invention related to the following means A. Conventionally, there has been known a game machine capable of being controlled to a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449. For example, in Patent Document 1, even if the number of times of the special game executed in the normal game state (the number of times of execution of the variable display) reaches 1000 times (special number), when the big win (advantageous state) does not occur (special When the condition is met), the game state is controlled to a probability variable state, the probability of determining a big hit as a result of the special game is increased to about 1/100, and the big win is likely to occur in the subsequent special game. is stated. In addition, in Patent Document 1, when the number of special game games (the number of executions of variable display) reaches 1000 times in a normal game state and no big hit occurs, a time saving state is generated instead of the variable probability state. It is described that it is acceptable.

However, in conventional game machines, when the number of executions of the variable display reaches the special number of times, and during the period before and after that, the consideration of interest has been insufficient.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine that is full of interest.

(Means A) The gaming machine according to the present invention performs variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and is in an advantageous state when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed. (For example, a jackpot game state) is a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be performed than in a normal state. As shown, a part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and variable display are executed Update means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state control means, Numerical information updated by the updating means can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established by setting a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times variable display is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13). As shown in FIG. 12-17, steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100 are executed, steps 100IWS170 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 are executed), the update means is , updating the numerical information in the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 100IWS71), predetermined suggestive effect execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-49, effect A part that executes step 108 IWS811 in the control CPU 120) and a special notification effect that notifies that the control of the special state is started based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, FIG. 12-52 (C1), ( C2), the background image changes, as shown in FIG. Executable special notification effect execution means (for example, in FIGS. 12-23 As shown, the effect control CPU 120 further includes a portion where step 100IWS 638 is executed), and the predetermined suggestive effect executing means has a common ratio of executing the predetermined suggestive effect in the period before the special condition is established ( For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-44, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A. 12-50).
According to such a configuration, the sudden execution of the special notification effect can provide the player with a sense of surprise, thereby enhancing the interest of the player.

The present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of this invention, or may have a configuration other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of this invention. It can be anything.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. 1 is a front view of an image display device; FIG. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns; It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a performance control data holding area, (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reception command buffer at the time of start winning, and (C) is a configuration of an active display buffer. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example; It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. 10 is a flow chart showing an example of winning random number determination processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of command analysis processing; It is a part of the flowchart which shows an example of production|presentation control process processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing whether or not to execute a pending display forewarning effect as a foreseeing forewarning and a determination ratio of a display pattern; It is a part of the flowchart which shows an example of specific display start production|presentation execution processing. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation aspect of the specific display start production|presentation A. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a rendering mode of a specific display start rendering B; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a winning flash effect execution process; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a winning flash effect execution process; FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production|presentation aspect of the flash production|presentation at the time of an early winning a prize, and the flash production|presentation at the time of a late winning a prize. It is a figure which shows the execution ratio of flash production|presentation at the time of winning. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of effect processing during variable display; (A) is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine with the game effect lamp lit at high brightness (C1), and (B) is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine with the game effect lamp off. be. A front view of a pachinko game machine in which the game effect lamp is lit with low luminance (C2), and a pachinko machine showing the transition of the light emission mode of the game effect lamp in the state in which the game effect lamp is lit with low luminance. It is a front view of. The timing of the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the lighting of the flash lamp at the time of winning, the game effect lamp, and the starter lamp, and the display of the effect image and the silhouette image. It is a timing chart showing. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an effect mode when a start winning, which is the object of the winning flash effect during the variable display, occurs. In the modified example, when a prize-winning flash effect occurs, output of a sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, lighting of the flash lamp at the time of winning, the game effect lamp, and the starter lamp, and the display of the effect image and the silhouette image is a timing chart showing the timing of FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing timings of lighting of a win-time flash lamp, a game effect lamp, and a starter lamp, display of an effect image and a silhouette image, and operation of a movable body in a modified example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing timings of display of a winning flash lamp and a silhouette image in a modified example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a variable display effect mode for a win-time flash effect in a modified example; FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing operation timings of a win-time flash lamp and a movable body in a modified example, and a diagram showing determination ratios of timings at which light-emitting modes of the win-time flash lamp change. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing display modes of pending display/active display, suggestive content of each display mode, and selection ratio when execution of winning slash effect is determined in a modified example. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a mode of effect in the pending display and the active display when the winning flash effect is executed in the modified example. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a mode of effect in the pending display and the active display when the winning flash effect is executed in the modified example. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a mode of effect in the pending display and the active display when the winning flash effect is executed in the modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a mode of effect when a start winning, which is a target of flash effect at winning, occurs during variable display in a modified example. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in the characteristic portion 108IW. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot probability and time-saving loss probability for each set value. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot probability and time-saving loss probability for each set value. It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a time saving classification determination table. It is an explanatory view for explaining time saving classification. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the characteristic portion 108IW; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the characteristic portion 108IW; It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the production|presentation control command. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in the characteristic part 108IW. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows a variation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process. It is a flow chart which shows special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design stop processing. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal; It is a flow chart which shows big hit end processing. FIG. 10 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transitions in the characteristic part 108IW; It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of the production|presentation control main process in the characteristic part 108IW. 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; It is a flow chart which shows customer waiting demonstration effect control processing. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a telop display execution lottery table and a telop mode determination lottery table; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a presentation mode of telop display during customer waiting; It is a flow chart which shows pre-reading notice setting processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of a pre-reading advance notice effect execution determination table, a pre-reading notice effect type determination table, and a pre-reading notice effect mode determination table; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of each effect type of the pre-reading advance notice effect; It is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period and the execution period of the look-ahead notice effect in the time saving state via the big hit and the time saving state via the relief. 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an advance notice effect execution determination table and an advance notice effect mode determination table; It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flow chart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows per special figure waiting processing. It is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display to reduce the relief time. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation form until it transfers to relief time reduction. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation form until it transfers to relief time reduction. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation form until it transfers to relief time reduction. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation form until it transfers to relief time reduction. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation aspect of time-saving rush imitation production|presentation. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a production mode of a false countdown production and an effect production; It is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process processing in the modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the special design stop processing in the modification 1. FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing next change postponement processing in Modification 1. FIG. FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining execution timing of an effect when executing a variable display that saves time in Modification 1; FIG. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining modifications 2 to 4 of the selection method of the variation pattern during the time saving state based on the relief time saving. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of variation pattern setting processing in Example 2. FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of variable display start setting processing according to the second embodiment; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a forewarning effect execution determination table and a forecast effect mode determination table in Example 2; FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining execution timing of an effect when executing a variable display that shortens the relief time in the second embodiment; FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation aspect until it transfers to relief time reduction in Example 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the production|presentation aspect until it transfers to relief time reduction in the modified example 1 of Example 2. FIG. It is an explanatory view for explaining a specific example of the production mode until it shifts to relief time reduction in Modification 2 of Example 2. FIG.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(form)
The game machine of form 1 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) capable of executing variable display and controllable to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to a player,
Light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying specific displays (for example, pending display and active display) corresponding to variable display;
A specific display effect for displaying the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a portion in which a pending display or an active display is displayed in any one of the display patterns α to γ) , a specific display start effect) and a specific light emission effect (for example, a winning flash effect) that causes the light emitting means to emit light (for example, effect control CPU 120);
with
The effect execution means executes the specific light emission effect so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, FIG. 10). -28, Figures 10-29(A) to 10-32(H), Figures 10-49(A) to 10-50(D), before the display of the pending indication is complete The part that lights the flash lamp 135SG009F when winning),
The ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-24, when the winning flash effect is executed) In the case of winning, the proportion of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning),
The light emitting means includes first light emitting means (for example, winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) and
The first light emitting means has a first period from the start of the specific light emission effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous winning flash effect). A second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, from the start of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize to the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. period) in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has the brightness C1 and A part that flashes at cycle T1 and flashes at brightness C2 and cycle T2 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the late winning),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect in the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed in the second period (for example, FIG. 10-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d blink at the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term, and the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term is executed. During the period, it is characterized by a portion that blinks at a brightness of C2 and a period of T0), @.
According to this feature, since the light emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, the player can easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the first period of the specific light emission effect. , not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means can emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, so that the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous. This makes it even easier for the player to recognize the specified display.

The gaming machine of form 2 is the gaming machine according to form 1,
The specific display effect is performed by an appearance effect unit (for example, FIGS. ~As shown in FIG. 10-50(D), the effect control CPU 120 executes the specific display start effect execution processing, and the part where the appearance animation in which the pending display and the active display gradually appear from the bottom to the top is displayed ), and a periodic effect unit (for example, FIG. 10-15, FIG. 10-30 (D) to FIG. 10-32 (H), as shown in FIGS. 10-49 (B) to 10-50 (D), the effect control CPU 120 executes the specific display rotation display effect execution processing, so that the pending display and active display is displayed as a rotation animation) and
The timing at which the display of the specific display is completed is the timing at which the periodic effect is started (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 and The part where the rotation animation of these pending display and active display starts)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the specific display.

The gaming machine of form 3 is the gaming machine according to form 1 or form 2,
The effect execution means can start the specific light emission effect before starting the specific display effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 (A) to 10-32 (H), the specific display When the start effect B is executed, the lamp 135SG009F for winning flash as a winning flash effect, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body from the timing before the start of display of the pending display and the active display. The part where the lamp 9d emits light)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the specific light emission effect is started before the start of the specific display effect, the specific light emission effect can be made more conspicuous.

The gaming machine of form 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 3,
The specific display effect includes an appearance effect in which the specific display appears (for example, a specific display start effect),
The display means may display the specific display in a plurality of different display modes (for example, a specific display start effect A in which a reserved display or an active display gradually appears from the bottom to the upper part, and a character A is displayed in the first reserved state). It can be displayed in a specific display start effect B) that executes an appearance animation in which the suspended display and the active display appear gradually from the bottom to the top after acting on the storage display area 135SG005D and the active display area 135SG005A,
The period of the appearance effect varies depending on the display mode of the specific display (for example, the specific display start effect A is 0.2 seconds and the specific display start effect B is 1.2 seconds),
The specific light emission effect is started before the end timing of the shortest appearance effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-49 (A) to 10-50 (D) , The part where the flash effect at the time of winning starts before the end timing of the specific display start effect A)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of the display mode of the specific display, the specific light emission effect can be started before the appearance effect ends, so that the player can reliably see the specific display targeted for the specific light emission effect. recognizable.

The gaming machine of form 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 4,
The effect executing means once controls the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means to a low luminance state, and then starts the specific light emitting effect (for example, FIG. 10-28, FIG. 10-29 (A), FIG. 10-29(B), FIG. 10-49(A), and FIG. 10-49(B), when it is determined to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, once the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on. , main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the start of the specific light emission effect.
It should be noted that the "low luminance state" in the present invention includes not only a state in which light is emitted at low luminance, but also a state in which light is not emitted.

The gaming machine of form 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 5,
The effect execution means once controls the display means to a low visibility state, and then starts the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in modification 135SG-11, when executing the flash effect at the time of winning, the image Part where the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is lowered by lowering the brightness of the backlight built into the display device 5, and then the flash effect at the time of winning is started)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the start of the specific light emission effect.
In addition, the "low visibility state" in the present invention is a state in which the visibility of the display means is lower than the previous state, and the visibility of the display is improved by a method other than lowering the brightness of the display means. Including degraded state.

The gaming machine of form 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 6,
The effect executing means is capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, an advance notice effect) suggesting that the variable display is controlled to be in an advantageous state, and when the suggestive effect is being executed and when the suggestive effect is executed. is not executed (for example, FIGS. 10-29 (A) to 10-48 (n), FIGS. 10-49 (A) to 10-68 ( As shown in n), the part where the flash effect at the time of winning can be executed depending on whether the advance notice effect is being executed or not),
A variable display corresponding sound corresponding to the variable display (variable display corresponding sound shown in FIG. 10-28), a suggestive effect corresponding sound corresponding to the suggestive effect (notice effect corresponding sound shown in FIG. 10-29 (A)), A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) capable of outputting a specific light emission effect corresponding sound (a winning flash effect corresponding sound shown in FIG. 10-29 (B)) corresponding to the specific light emission effect,
The sound output means is
When the specific light emission effect is executed while the sound corresponding to the variable display is being output, the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect can be output with priority over the sound corresponding to the variable display being output (for example, As shown in FIG. 10-29(B), when the winning flash effect is executed during the execution of the variable display, the variable display corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, while the winning flash effect is supported. The part that outputs sound at volume V1 (V1>V2)),
When the specific light-emitting effect is executed while the sound corresponding to the suggestive effect is being output, the sound corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect can be output with priority over the sound corresponding to the suggestive effect being output (for example, As shown in FIG. 10-29(B), when the winning flash effect is executed during the execution of the previous notice effect, the sound corresponding to the previous notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, while the winning flash effect is supported. Part that outputs sound at volume V1 (V1>V2))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the sound corresponding to the variable display or the sound corresponding to the suggestion effect is output, the sound corresponding to the specific light effect can be easily heard, and the output of the sound corresponding to the specific light effect enables the player to execute the specific light effect. easier to recognize.

The gaming machine of form 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 7,
Equipped with sound output means capable of outputting sound (for example, speakers 8L and 8R),
In the specific light emission effect, the effect execution means outputs a sound corresponding to the specific light effect from the sound output means before the completion of display of the specific display and the light emission of the light emitting means (for example, FIG. 10-28 , Figures 10-29 (A) ~ Figure 10-32 (H), Figures 10-49 (A) ~ Figure 10-50 (D), execution of the winning flash effect is determined according to the start winning. If this is done, after the sound output corresponding to the winning flash effect is started from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is started, and the appearance animation of the pending display and the active display is completed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by outputting the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect, it is possible to make the player quickly recognize that the predetermined condition has been established, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 7,
Equipped with sound output means capable of outputting sound (for example, speakers 8L and 8R),
The effect execution means, in the specific light emission effect,
A sound corresponding to a specific light emission effect can be output from the sound output means (for example, a portion capable of outputting a sound corresponding to a winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R),
The light emitting means is caused to emit light before the completion of the display of the specific display and the output of the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in modification 135SG-12, execution of flash effect at the time of winning in response to start winning) is determined, after the win flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the speaker 8L, 8R will output the sound corresponding to the win flash effect, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display will be completed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player quickly recognize the establishment of the predetermined condition by the light emission of the light emitting means, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 9,
In the specific light emitting effect, the first light emitting means emits light in a predetermined mode corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the first period, and the first light emitting means emits light more than the predetermined mode during the second period. This is an effect that emits light in a specific manner with a low degree (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first prize, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C1, During the execution period of the hour flash effect, the part that blinks the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 (C1>C2))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by causing at least the first light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined manner, the player can recognize the start of the specific light emitting effect, and the first light emitting means continues in the predetermined manner even during the second period. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game due to the hindrance to other performances caused by the light emission.
In addition, the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" in the present invention includes a low-speed blinking mode with a low degree of emphasis due to a slow blinking speed.

The gaming machine of form 11 is the gaming machine according to form 10,
The second period includes a period before the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is executed, and a period during the execution of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, FIG. 10-28 , the execution period of the late winning flash effect is the period during which the variable display before the variable display targeted for the winning flash effect is executed, and the execution period of the variable display targeted for the winning flash effect. the part containing the period and
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first light emitting means emits light in a specific manner before and after the start of the variable display which is the target of the specific light emission effect, the player can easily recognize that the target is the variable display. Therefore, the game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 12 is the gaming machine according to form 10 or 11,
The first light emitting means emits light in the predetermined manner when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-13, the target of the winning flash effect is A portion that blinks the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F with a brightness of C1 and a period of T1 when a certain variable display is started)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the object of the specific light emission effect, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 12,
The display means displays a specific light emission effect corresponding image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first display mode during the first period, and displays the specific light emission effect corresponding image in the first display mode during the second period. is also displayed in a second display mode with a low degree of emphasis (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the early winning, the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, and the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, During the execution period of the time flash effect, the part where the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by displaying the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first display mode on the display means in the first period, the player can be made to recognize the start of the specific light effect effect, and the image is displayed in the second period. By displaying the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the second display mode by the means, the display means continues to display the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first display mode, thereby obstructing other displays and increasing the interest in the game. You can prevent it from dropping.

The gaming machine of form 14 is the gaming machine according to form 13,
The display means displays the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in a first display mode when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-13, A portion for displaying the effect image 135SG005E in the image display device 5 when the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the object of the specific light emission effect, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form 15 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 14,
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) capable of outputting a specific light emission effect corresponding sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect,
The sound output means outputs the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in a first output mode during the first period, and does not output the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect or has a higher intensity than the first output mode during the second period. Output in a second output mode with a low degree (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first period, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1 During the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period, the part that outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 81 and 8R at a volume V2 (V1>V2)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by outputting the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first output mode, it becomes possible for the player to easily recognize that the specific light emission effect has started, and at the same time, the specific light effect effect is started. During the execution of , the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect is not output or is output in the second output mode, thereby suppressing the deterioration of the game interest due to the other effects being hindered by the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect. .

The gaming machine of form 16 is the gaming machine according to form 15,
The sound output means outputs the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first output mode when the variable display that is the target of the specific light effect is started (for example, as shown in Modification 135SG-13 (2) a portion for outputting a sound corresponding to the winning flash effect at volume V1 from the speakers 8L and 8R when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect starts;
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the object of the specific light emission effect, thereby enhancing the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of form 17 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 16,
The first light emission means stops emitting light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period before the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-69 as a modification 135SG-1, the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation command during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the late winning, from the speakers 8L, 8R stop the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, turn off the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, hide the silhouette image 135SG005S in the image display device 5, clear the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning, etc. During the period, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning as the flash effect at the time of winning, the light emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S are not executed, and the first variable display start command is received. Based on this, the late winning flash effect process table is selected again, and the process timer for the late winning flash effect process timer is reset and started. Output of sound corresponding to production, light emission of flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, display of silhouette image 135SG005S)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by temporarily stopping the light emission of the light emitting means, it is possible to prevent the player from mistakenly thinking that the variable display is continuing.

The gaming machine of form 18 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 17,
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) in which a variable display is temporarily stopped after a variable display is started and a display result is derived, and then the variable display is performed again,
The first light emitting means responds to the specific light emission effect during a temporary stop when the re-variable display effect is executed during the second period before the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-69, FIG. During the temporary stop period of the decoration pattern in the variable display executed before the variable display, the part where the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F continues to blink with the brightness C2 and the period T2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the variable display has ended despite the temporary stop.

The gaming machine of form 19 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 18,
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) in which a variable display is temporarily stopped after a variable display is started and a display result is derived, and then the variable display is performed again,
The first light emitting means is
Even during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect as the second period (for example, as modification 135SG-1, FIGS. 10-69 and 10-70 (A ) ~ as shown in Fig. 10-89(n), even during the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, the win flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at the brightness C1 and the cycle T2),
Even in the temporary stop when the re-variable display effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, light emission is continued in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as a modification 135SG-1 As shown in FIGS. 10-69 and 10-70(A) to 10-89(n), during the temporary stop period of the variable display of the decorative pattern that is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash The part where the lamp 135SG009F continues blinking with a brightness of C2 and a period of T2),
The gaming machine according to any one of modes 1 to 18, characterized by:
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the variable display has ended despite the temporary stop.

The gaming machine of form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 16,
The first light emitting means continues light emission in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period before the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 (A) to 10-48 (n), during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning, the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is started. In the previous variable display pattern fixing period, the part where the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to blink),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the light emission is continued during the display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period, so that the player's expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state is the object of the specific light emission effect. The variable display can be accurately maintained until the start of the variable display, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 21 is the gaming machine according to form 20,
The display means can variably display the first effect identification information (for example, decoration pattern) and variably display the second effect identification information (for example, small pattern) having lower visibility than the first effect identification information. is a game machine,
During the result display period, the second effect identification information in a stopped state is displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. is displayed when stopped),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if light emission continues during the result display period, the second effect identification information in the stopped state is displayed, so that the player can be made to recognize that it is the result display period.

The gaming machine of form 22 is the gaming machine according to form 21,
The display means is capable of displaying the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the second period so as not to overlap the display of the second effect identification information (for example, FIG. 10-33 (J)). , etc., during execution of the winning flash effect, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, while the small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the image display device 5. 1 The part displayed at the left end of the display area 135SG005F),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in recognizing the end of the variable display due to the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect overlapping the display of the second effect identification information.

The gaming machine of form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 22,
The effect execution means can execute a specific effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach) that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state,
When the specific effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect, the first light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect until the specific effect is started. When the production starts, light emission is started in a manner corresponding to the specific production (for example, as shown in FIG. In the display, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and the period T2 before the start of the ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at the brightness C2 from the start timing of the ready-to-win performance of the super ready-to-win. part to light up),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the specific performance is started, the light emitting means emits light in a mode corresponding to the specific performance instead of the mode corresponding to the specific lighting performance, so that the game amusement of the specific performance can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 24 is the gaming machine according to form 23,
The display means can display a specific effect start image corresponding to the start of the specific effect when the specific effect is started (for example, FIGS. 10-96 (K) to 10-98 (O) , as shown in FIGS. 10-104(K) to 10-106(O), a portion where the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white (white out)),
The first light emitting means enters a low luminance state when the display of the display means switches to the specific effect start image, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific effect after entering the low luminance state (for example, FIG. As shown in 10-90, during the white-out period, the prize-winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and from the subsequent start timing of the reach effect of super reach, the prize-winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit at luminance C2) ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emission mode of the first light emission means changes across a low-luminance state that accompanies the switching to the specific effect start image, the change in the light emission mode does not make the player feel uncomfortable. Since it can be prevented, the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 25 is the gaming machine according to form 23 or 24,
A movable body (for example, movable body 32) is provided,
The effect executing means suggests, as the specific effect, an action effect to move the movable body at the start of the specific effect (for example, a movable body action effect shown in FIGS. 10-90) and execution of the action effect. A motion suggesting effect (for example, a movable body motion suggesting effect shown in FIG. 10-90) can be executed,
The first light emitting means enters a low-luminance state when executing the action-suggestion effect, and after entering the low-luminance state, emits light in a mode corresponding to the action effect, which is a mode corresponding to the specific effect (for example, , as shown in FIG. 10-90, during the execution period of the movable body motion suggesting effect during the whiteout period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is extinguished, and the winning flash is performed from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win after that. A portion for lighting the lamp 135SG009F at a luminance of C2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emission mode of the first light emission means changes across the low-luminance state associated with the execution of the suggestive effect, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the change in the light emission mode. Since it can be done, a game interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 26 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 25,
The first light emitting means is
When a special effect different from the specific light emission effect is executed by the effect execution means, it is possible to emit light in a manner corresponding to the special effect (for example, modification 135SG-3 shown in FIG. 10-108 (A) , when the step-up effect is executed during the variable display in which the flash effect at the time of winning is not executed, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F can be lit in a manner corresponding to the step-up effect),
When the specific light emission effect is started during execution of the special effect, light is emitted in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect in preference to a mode corresponding to the special effect (for example, modification 135SG-3 As shown in FIG. 10-108(B), when the step-up effect is executed during the variable display in which the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the lamp for the flash at the time of winning in a manner corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning The part that continues lighting (blinking) of 135SG009F),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect from being started at an inappropriate timing such as the end timing of the special effect.

The gaming machine of form 27 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 26,
The light emission of the first light emitting means in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends at a first timing during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect and at a second timing after the first timing. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-119 (A) and 10-119 (B) as modification 135SG-4, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F corresponds to the winning flash effect The timing to end the lighting mode includes the timing to start the movable object action effect during variable display, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, and the timing to start the ready-to-win effect of super reach).
When the light emission of the first light emitting means in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends at the first timing, and when the light emission of the first light emitting means in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends at the second timing The ratio of control to an advantageous state differs depending on when the winning flash effect is finished (for example, as shown in FIG. The degree of expectation for a big hit in a case where the light emission mode is changed from the start timing of the movable body action production to the light emission mode according to the movable body action production and the case where the light emission mode is changed according to the ready-to-win production from the start timing of the ready-to-win production. are different),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing at which the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 28 is the gaming machine according to form 27,
The effect executed by the effect execution means at the end of the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect is different between when the light emission ends at the first timing and when the light emission ends at the second timing. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-119 as a modification 135SG-4, according to the timing of ending the lighting mode according to the winning flash effect of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, during the execution period of the movable body operation effect There are cases where it is during the execution period of the reach production of super reach),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize whether the end timing is the first timing or the second timing.

The gaming machine of form 29 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 28,
The effect execution means provides a first effect (for example, a movable body motion effect shown in FIGS. 10-119 as modification 135SG-4) during variable display and a second effect (for example, modification 135SG) different from the first effect. -4 as a super reach performance shown in Figure 10-119) can be executed,
The first light emitting means is
It is possible to change from light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to light emission in a mode according to the first effect in accordance with the execution of the first effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, As shown in FIG. 10-119(A) as a modified example 135SG-4, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the lighting mode according to the winning flash effect to the start timing of the movable body motion effect. The part that changes the light emission mode according to the action production),
With the execution of the second effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, it is possible to change from light emission in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect to light emission in a manner according to the second effect (for example, As shown in FIG. 10-119(B) as a modified example 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect to the light-emitting mode according to the ready-to-win effect),
When changing from light emission in a mode according to the specific light emission effect to light emission in a mode according to the first effect, and when light emission in a mode according to the specific light emission effect changes to light emission in a mode according to the second effect The ratio of control to an advantageous state differs depending on the time (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-119 (C) as modification 135SG-4, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed according to the winning flash effect. The degree of expectation for a big hit is different between a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body motion performance from the start timing of the movable body motion performance and a light emission mode corresponding to the ready-to-win performance from the start timing of the ready-to-win performance. part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect that is being executed when the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 30 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 28,
A movable body (for example, movable body 32) is provided,
The effect executing means controls an action effect to move the movable body (for example, a movable body action effect), an action suggestion effect to suggest execution of the action effect (for example, a movable body action suggestion effect), and an advantageous state. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, reach effect of super reach) that suggests that
The first light emitting means is
It is possible to change from a mode of light emission corresponding to the specific light emission effect to a mode corresponding to the action suggestion effect as the action suggestion effect is executed during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, a modification As shown in 135SG-4, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the lighting mode according to the winning flash effect to the lighting mode according to the movable body motion suggesting effect from the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect. part to change),
It is possible to change from light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to light emission in a mode according to the specific effect along with the execution of the specific effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, a modification As shown in 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emitting mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the ready-to-win effect from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win. ),
A rate of controlling to an advantageous state differs between when light emission changes from a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to a mode corresponding to the action suggesting effect and when light emission changes to a mode corresponding to the specific light effect (e.g. , as shown in modification 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning is changed from the light emission mode according to the flash performance at the time of winning, from the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion performance to the movable body motion suggestion performance. A part where the expectation of a big hit is different between when the lighting mode is used and when the lighting mode is set according to the ready-to-win effect from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect that is being executed when the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 31 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 30,
The display mode of the specific display is a normal mode (eg, display pattern α), a special mode (eg, display pattern δ and display pattern ε shown in FIGS. 10-120 as modification 135SG-5) and a special mode (eg, display pattern β and display pattern γ),
The special mode includes a first special mode (e.g., display pattern γ) and a second special mode (e.g., display pattern β) different from the first special mode,
When the specific display is displayed in the first special mode, the ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the second special mode (for example, FIGS. 10-17 As shown in , when the pending display or active display is displayed in the display pattern γ, the portion that is controlled to the jackpot game state at a higher rate than when displayed in the display pattern β),
The specific display of the special mode can be changed to either the first special mode or the second special mode (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-120 as modification 135SG-5, the display pattern δ and A portion where the suspended display or active display displayed in the display pattern ε can be changed to the suspended display or active display in the display pattern β or γ),
When the specific display is displayed in the special mode, the ratio of execution of the specific light emission effect is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the special mode (for example, as a modification 135SG-5, FIG. 10- As shown in 120, when the pending display and the active display are displayed in the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε, both the winning display and the active display are displayed in the display pattern β and the display pattern γ. The part where the flash effect is executed at a high rate),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the specific display is displayed in the special mode, the special mode is changed to the first special mode or the second special mode by executing the specific light emission effect at a high rate. It is possible to attract the player's attention to the game and improve the game interest.

The gaming machine of form 32 is the gaming machine according to form 31,
The special mode is a mode of a specific color (for example, blinking white as shown in FIGS. 10-120 as modification 135SG-5),
The special mode is a mode of a special color different from the specific color (for example, blue or red as shown in FIGS. 10-17),
The normal aspect is an aspect of a color (for example, white) other than the specific color and the special color,
The specific display of the specific color has a higher rate of changing to the special color when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, modification 135SG-5 As shown in , when the pending display or the active display is displayed in the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, the display pattern of the specific display is displayed depending on whether or not the winning flash effect is being executed. The part where the ratio of change to pattern β and display pattern γ is different),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the difference in the mode of the specific display can be easily grasped by the difference in color, and when the specific display of the specific color is displayed, the player's attention is focused on whether or not the specific light emission effect is being executed. It is possible to make it possible to improve the game interest.

The gaming machine of form 33 is the gaming machine according to form 31 or 32,
The effect executing means can execute a change suggesting effect suggesting that the specific display displayed in the special mode changes to the special mode in a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode. (for example, a part that can execute the first effect effect and the second effect effect shown in the modification 135SG-5),
The special mode changes to the special mode at a higher rate when the change suggesting effect is executed in the second mode than when it is executed in the first mode (for example, modification 135SG-5 , the second effect effect can change the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ at a higher rate than the first effect effect by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ. The part that is the production),
When the change suggestive effect is executed in the second mode, the ratio of execution of the specific light emission effect is higher than when the change suggestive effect is executed in the first mode (for example, in the modification 135SG-5 As shown, when the second action effect is executed, the winning flash effect is executed at a higher rate than when the first effect effect is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the change suggesting effect is executed in the first mode or the second mode, and the execution of the specific light emission effect causes the change suggesting effect to be executed in the second mode. It is possible to increase the expectation of being executed in two modes.

The gaming machine of form 34 is the gaming machine according to form 33,
The special mode is a first special mode in which the change suggesting effect is executed in the second mode and the rate of change to the special mode is low (for example, the display pattern δ ), and a second special mode in which the change suggesting effect is executed in the second mode and the rate of change to the special mode is higher than that in the first special mode (for example, as modification 135SG-5, FIGS. 10-120 including the display pattern ε) shown in
When the specific display is displayed in the second special mode, the ratio of execution of the specific light emission effect is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the first special mode (for example, when the specific display is displayed When the display pattern is displayed with the display pattern ε, the portion where the winning flash effect is executed is higher than when the specific display is displayed with the display pattern δ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether the specific display is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode, and in the case of the second special mode in which the rate of change to the special mode is high. Since the specific light emission effect is executed at a high rate, the execution of the specific light emission effect can increase expectations for the specific display to be displayed in the second special mode.

The gaming machine of form 35 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 34,
The display means is capable of displaying, during the specific light emission effect, a specific light emission effect corresponding display corresponding to the specific light emission effect so as to overlap a specific display corresponding to the variable display of the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, As shown in modification 135SG-7, a silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning can be displayed so as to overlap the active display in the active display area 135SG005A),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize the specific display corresponding to the specific light emission effect, and the specific display is hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect. can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 36 is the gaming machine according to form 35,
The display means is capable of displaying a plurality of the specific light-emitting effect corresponding displays of different types (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-7, the image display device 5 has different sizes as a winning flash effect). The part where the silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed),
The mode of overlapping with the specific display differs depending on the type of display corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-129 (L) and FIG. 10-130 (N) etc. , a portion where the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A overlap differently depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S to be displayed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a plurality of displays corresponding to the specific light emission effect are displayed, and the manner of overlap with the specific display changes depending on the displayed display corresponding to the specific light emission effect, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 37 is the gaming machine according to form 35 or 36,
The specific display includes a first specific display (e.g., pending display) corresponding to a variable display that has not yet been executed, and a second variable display (e.g., active display) that corresponds to a variable display that is being executed,
The display means is capable of displaying the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect so as to overlap the first specific display corresponding to the specific light effect before the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started. In addition, during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, it can be displayed so as to overlap the second specific display corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in modification 135SG-7, A silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed so as to overlap the pending display, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D before the variable display as the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is started. , During the execution of the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed so as to overlap the active display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning displayed in the active display area 135SG005A),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize the first specific display and the second specific display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, and not only the first specific display but also the second specific display are hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with more unexpectedness and improve the game amusement.

The gaming machine of form 38 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 37,
A gaming machine capable of executing a re-variable display effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) in which a variable display is temporarily stopped after a variable display is started and a display result is derived, and then the variable display is performed again,
The display means is capable of displaying a re-variable related display related to the re-variable display effect, and overlapping the re-variable related display with the specific light emission effect corresponding display corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the specific light emission effect. (For example, in the case where the pseudo continuous effect is executed in the variable display during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning, when the decorative symbol temporarily stops, it stops in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C A part where the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning can be displayed overlapping with the special pattern (see FIGS. 10-40 etc.),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the re-variable related display is hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect, it is possible to add surprise to the player and improve the game interest.

The gaming machine of form 39 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 35 to 38,
The display means can display the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect even during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, FIGS. 10-28, 10-42(a) to 10-47 ( As shown in l), the part where the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even in the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can easily recognize that the variable display is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the interest of the variable display, which is the target of the specific light emission effect, can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 40 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 39,
The production executing means is
Even during the variable display corresponding to the specific light emission effect, the first light emission means is continuously caused to emit light in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect, and the predetermined end before the end of the variable display corresponding to the specific light emission effect. It is possible to control the effect to end the light emission at the timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is displayed before the ready-to-win effect starts. flashes at a brightness of C2 and a period of T2, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off at the start timing of the ready-to-win effect),
When light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect of the first light emitting means is not finished at the predetermined end timing due to the occurrence of a predetermined event, the first light emitting means is emitted at a specific end timing after the predetermined end timing. Perform special end control to end the light emission of the light emitting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-22, the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display of the effect target due to the generation of static electricity etc. If it is not possible, at the end timing of the variable display (the reception timing of the pattern confirmation command), which is the timing after the start timing of the ready-to-win effect, the flash effect at the time of winning including the flashing of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning again. the part that ends the
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce discomfort when light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect does not end normally.

The gaming machine of form 41 is the gaming machine according to form 40,
Equipped with game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game,
The game control means can transmit variable display end information for notifying the end of variable display to the effect execution means when the variable display ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4 (A) , a part where the CPU 103 can transmit a design determination command that designates the stop of the variable display of the decoration design),
The effect execution means performs the specific end control based on the reception of the variable display end information as the specific end timing (for example, as shown in FIG. The part that terminates the flash effect at the time of winning the late prize based on the receipt of the command),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to further reduce the sense of incongruity when terminating the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect.

The gaming machine of form 42 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 39 to 41,
The predetermined end timing includes a first predetermined end timing and a second predetermined end timing (for example, as shown in the modified example 135SG-4, when winning a prize at the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the start timing of the ready-to-win effect) The part that can end the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F),
The specific end timing is a timing later than the predetermined end timing and the second predetermined end timing (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-4, the effect control CPU 120 may not flash when winning due to the generation of static electricity, etc.). If the blinking of the lamp 135SG009F cannot be stopped, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is included again at the end timing of the variable display, which is the timing after the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the start timing of the ready-to-win effect. The part that ends the flash effect at the time of the late winning),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even when the light emission cannot be ended at the second predetermined end timing, light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect can be ended at the specific end timing.

The gaming machine of form 43 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 42,
The production executing means is
It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, reach effect of super reach) that suggests being controlled in an advantageous state,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied while the specific effect is being executed, the specific light emitting effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. Part that does not determine the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning when the start winning to the mouth occurs),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to a decrease in attention to the specific effect.

The gaming machine of form 44 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 43,
The effect executing means does not execute the specific light emission effect when the predetermined condition is satisfied when the remaining period of the variable display is equal to or shorter than the predetermined period, and the remaining period of the variable display is the above-mentioned. When the predetermined condition is established when the predetermined period is longer than the predetermined period, it is possible to execute the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-8, the first starting port is operated during execution of the variable display. When a start winning occurs, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and if the specified period is equal to or less than the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is not determined),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the specific display of the target of the specific light emission effect from becoming difficult to understand due to the execution of the specific light emission effect when the remaining period of the variable display is short.

The gaming machine of form 45 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 44,
The production executing means is
A specific effect suggesting control to be in an advantageous state can be executed even in a variable display that is not controlled in an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, even in a variable display in which the variable display result is The part that can execute reach production of super reach),
When the predetermined condition is established during execution of the specific effect in a variable display that is not controlled to an advantageous state, the specific light emission effect can be executed in response to the start of the next variable display after the variable display (for example, deformation As shown in example 135SG-8, when a start winning to the first start opening occurs during execution of the variable display, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and the specified period is the first winning flash effect. If it is less than the execution period, on the condition that the variable display result of the variable display is lost, the part where the winning flash effect can be executed from the start timing of the next variable display),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the interest of the specific effect and the specific light emitting effect from deteriorating due to the overlapping execution of the specific effect and the specific light emitting effect.

The gaming machine of form 46 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 45,
a specific area (for example, a winning ball device 6A forming a first starting winning hole) in which the predetermined condition is established by passing the game medium;
a specific light emitting means (for example, a starter lamp 135SG009S) provided around the specific region and capable of emitting light in different light emission modes;
with
The display means can display in any one of a plurality of display modes in which the ratio of controlling the specific display to an advantageous state is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part where the display can be displayed in any of the display patterns α to display patterns γ with different jackpot expectations),
The specific light emission means can emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the display mode of the specific display regardless of whether or not the specific light emission effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, When the display in the display pattern β or the display pattern γ is determined, the starter lamp 135SG009S is started regardless of the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect or the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 or the like. A part that emits light in a color corresponding to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ from the occurrence of the winning to the end of the variable display based on the starting winning),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display mode of the specific display can also be recognized by the light emission mode of the specific light emitting means provided around the specific area, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 47 is the gaming machine according to form 46,
The number of light emitting modes in which the specific light emitting means can emit light is greater than the number of light emitting modes in which the first light emitting means can emit light in the specific light emitting effect (for example, as shown in Modification 135SG-9, A portion where the number of light emission modes of the starter lamp 135SG009S in the light emission effect of the starter lamp is greater than the number of light emission modes of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning in the flash effect at the time of winning),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since there are many light emission variations of the specific light emission means, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

The gaming machine of form 48 is the gaming machine according to form 46 or 47,
The light emission area of the first light emission means is larger than the light emission area of the specific light emission means (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-10, the light emission area in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light as the winning flash effect is , A portion provided larger than the light emitting area where the starting port lamp 135SG009S emits light as a starting port lamp light emission effect),
In the period in which the specific light emitting means emits light according to the display mode of the specific display based on the establishment of the predetermined condition in 1, the first light emitting means emits light according to the specific light emission effect based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. (In the case where execution of both the winning flash effect and the hold display notice effect is determined based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off after the starting winning. While emitting light until the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display that is the target of the starting winning flash effect, the starting port lamp 135SG009S is the target of the holding display notice effect after the starting winning is generated. The part that emits light until the end of the variable display)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to excessively long execution of the light emission according to the specific light emission effect by the first light emission means, and to achieve an advantageous state by the light emission mode of the specific light emission means. A player's sense of expectation can be maintained for a long time.

The gaming machine of form 49 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 46 to 48,
Both the first light emitting means and the specific light emitting means are capable of blinking light emission (for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in the part where the starter lamp 135SG009S can blink),
The blinking period of the first light emitting means is different from the blinking period of the specific light emitting means (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-10, the blinking period of the starting lamp 135SG009S is used as a winning flash effect as a winning flash effect. The part that is different from the flashing cycle of the lamp 135SG009F),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the blinking periods are different, the player can be attracted to both the first light emitting means and the specific light emitting means, thereby improving the game interest.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3). Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left lower part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the frame 3 for a game machine. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9 in some cases. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d include LEDs.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main board 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 , such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 .

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11 , and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29 . The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls awarded to the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls awarded to the large prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 50Aa and long pieces 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the power supply board 17 can supply power from an AC 100V external power supply such as a commercial power supply to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch provided on the power supply substrate 17 is pressed.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 31 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not established. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), after executing the restoration process (step S4), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the initialization process (step S6) is performed, and then the setting change process (step S7) is performed. The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is established, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being in the OFF state is satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of game balls by operating the batted ball operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop-display a lost symbol or the like, or to perform a display corresponding to a game stop state different from the lost symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state is set in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a game hall staff member or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the step The setting change process of S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is off when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is off, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery processing of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest probability of winning the big win, and the probability of winning the big win decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 as the value decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table. Figure 7 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variation special figure is the first special figure, and Figure 7 (B) shows that the variation special figure is the second special figure It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when it is a figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), "big hit" special figure display assigned to the result. Thereby, when it is a high probability state such as a probability variable state in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability that it is determined to control to a big hit game state is higher than when it is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. get higher

In the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is "small win" and controlled to the small win game state is determined to be the same value. has been assigned a value. In the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure display result Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the determination table. In addition, depending on the set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as the "small hit" may be changed. The probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variation special figure may be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment value is set regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to set value 6 are set. In this case, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to the "jackpot", only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 in the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small-hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big-hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player. The playability may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁For example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball during the jackpot game is a predetermined value provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. While controlling the game state after the end of the jackpot game to a probability variable state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time reduction control). A game property (a so-called one-type two-type mixed type) that controls a big hit game state based on the passage of a ball through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 may be employed. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6). A common switch may be used for different purposes when game characteristics are changed according to a set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the assignment of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 8 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to emit a prohibit command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 9, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving the command specifying the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during a small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Further, in the jackpot middle effect process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big win game state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is set to "7" which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 135SG)
Next, the characteristic portion 135SG (hereinafter abbreviated as the characteristic portion 135SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 10-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 135SG. As shown in FIG. 10-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic portion 135SG, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F imitating the character A is provided on the right side of the image display device 5, and a winning ball device 6A is provided. A starting port lamp 135SG009S for lighting the winning ball device 6A (first starting port) is provided in the vicinity of .

Further, a stick lamp 135SG009X for lighting the stick controller 31A is provided in the stick controller 31A, and a button lamp 135SG009Y for lighting the push button 31B is provided in the push button 31B. These stick lamps 135SG009X and button lamps 135Sg009Y constitute the game effect lamps 9 in the characteristic part 135SG together with the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d.

As shown in FIG. 10-2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the starting lamp 135SG009S, the stick lamp 135SG09X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y are connected to the lamp control board 14, and are used for effect control via the lamp control board 14. Lighting (blinking) is possible under the control of the CPU 120 .

FIG. 10-3 is an explanatory diagram showing the image display device 5 in the characteristic portion 135SG. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 in the characteristic portion 135SG constitutes a first display area 135SG005F for displaying effects such as variable display of decorative patterns and ready-to-win effects. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 is a first reserved memory display area 135SG005D that can display the number of the first special figure reserved memory by the number of circular reserved displays, and the number of the second special figure reserved memory is displayed by the circular reserved display. A second display area 135SG005Sa including a second reserved memory display area 135SG005U that can be displayed according to the number of , and a telop display area 135SG005T that can display a telop indicating a game state, an effect during execution, and the like.

And the upper right end of the image display device 5 includes the display of the fourth symbol 135SG005J indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed, the number of the first special figure pending storage, and the number of the second special figure pending storage. 3 display area 135SG005Sb.

In the center of the first display area 135SG005F, "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R are arranged, and the decoration patterns can be displayed in a variable manner. It's becoming Also, a small pattern 135SG005M smaller in size than each decorative pattern is displayed at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F. The small designs are the decorative designs displayed in the "left" decorative design display area 5L, the decorative designs displayed in the "middle" decorative design display areas 5C, and the "right" decorative design display areas. Designs corresponding to each of the decorative designs displayed on 5R are vertically arranged. The small pattern 135SG005M is also a pattern that is always displayed within the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5 without being hidden during variable display.

10-3, in the characteristic portion 135SG, a decorative pattern is arranged in the central portion of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 135SG005M is the first display region 135SG005M of the image display device 5. 1 display area 135SG005F is arranged in a size smaller than the decorative pattern at the left end. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 135SG005M is lower than the visibility of the decoration pattern.

Furthermore, an active display area 135SG005A for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display is provided at the lower center of the first display area 135SG005F in the characteristic portion 135SG.

Henceforth, in this characteristic part 135SG, a hold display and an active display may be generically called a specific display.

FIG. 10-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in this feature section 135SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 10-4(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a design (also referred to as a production design). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "loss" or "big hit" or "minor hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (predetermined result) or the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of a plurality of types of jackpot types when the variable display result is "big hit".

Among the variable display result specifying commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specifying command indicating the predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". . The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "unprobable variable big hit". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor hit".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is the time saving control. It is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, short working time state) in which probability variation control is not performed while being performed. In addition, the command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) where the time saving control is not performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is time saving control and probability change It is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high-probability-high base state, time-saving probability-variable state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of a big winning game or a small winning game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the big winning opening to notify that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of a big win game or a small win.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the jackpot state described later (for example, "1" to "10"). .

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure pending storage number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result specification commands) indicating the content of the winning determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a pattern designation command indicating whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit" as a result of determination at the time of winning, the determination result of the big hit type (probability variation or non-probability variation), and whether it will be a small hit. . In addition, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating whether the random number for variation pattern determination is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", and "other" as a result of determination at the time of winning. is.

Note that the commands shown in FIG. 10-4(A) are only examples, and some of these commands may be omitted, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You can add commands that are different from the commands in For example, a prize ball number notification command for specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each prize hole, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. You may make it provide the notification command etc. which notify the remaining frequency|count of a passage notification command, probability variation control, and time saving control to be performed.

FIG. 10-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 10-5, in this characteristic portion 135SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination. , and the random number MR4 for judging the result of normal/universal figure display are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big win" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is any one of "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", "variable jackpot C", and "variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". is a random value used to determine , and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. 997”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of normal pattern display is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is "win" or "lose". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 10-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM101. In this characteristic part 135SG, as a special figure display result determination table, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this , Separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state is determined based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. It is a referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 135SG, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "loss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment is whether or not to control the special figure display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state. It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this characteristic portion 135SG, when the gaming state is a variable probability state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/300 in this characteristic portion 135SG), the probability of being determined when the special figure display result is set to "jackpot" and controlled to the big hit game state becomes higher (approximately 1 in this characteristic portion 135SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability variable state (high probability state), it is determined to control to a big hit game state compared to when it is a normal state or a time saving state. Judgment data is assigned to the decision result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that the probability of winning is increased.

In addition, FIG. 10-6 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for special symbol display result determination whether or not to control the variable display result to a small winning game state as a "small win". is a table referenced for

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this characteristic portion 135SG, regardless of whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data showing the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination is whether or not to control the special figure display result to the small hit game state as "small hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the characteristic part 135SG, the number of determination values assigned to the "small hit" differs between the first special figure game and the second special figure. there is Specifically, in the case of the special game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value is assigned. Therefore, as described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control In the high base state where the winning to the mouth occurs and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, the "small hit" almost does not occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the prize winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of small hits in which a large number of game balls cannot be acquired, thereby preventing the game interest from deteriorating.

FIG. 10-7(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The jackpot type determination table in the present characteristic portion 135SG selects one of a plurality of types of jackpot types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined to control the special figure display result as "jackpot" to the jackpot game state. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second 2 special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot A", " It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "probability variable jackpot B" and "probability variable jackpot C".

Here, when explaining the jackpot type in this characterizing portion 135SG with reference to FIG. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot B" which are executed and shift to a high probability high base state, and high probability low base state in which high probability control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state but time saving control is not executed. There are set a "probability variable big hit C" to shift and a "non-probability variable big hit" to shift to a low probability high base state by executing only time saving control after the end of the big win game state.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. On the other hand, the big-hit game state by the "probability variable big-hit B" is a normal open big-hit game in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. . Then, the big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" is a normal open big win in which the land that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeated twice (so-called two rounds). . In addition, the big win game state by the "probability variable big win C" and "non-probability variable big win" is repeated twice (so-called two rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player. It is usually an open jackpot. Therefore, "variable big hit A" is called 10 rounds (10R) big hit, "variable big hit B" is called 5 rounds (5R) big hit, and "variable big hit C" is called 2 rounds (2R) big hit. may be called.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the small winning game state in the characteristic portion 135SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous for the player, and the opening time is set to 0.1 second. It's becoming In addition, after the end of the small winning game, the game state immediately before the small winning game is taken over.

The high-probability control and the time-saving control executed after the jackpot game state of the variable probability big win is finished are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the jackpot game state is finished. Therefore, when the reoccurring big win is a variable probability big win, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed again after the big-win game state ends, so that the big-win game state is continuously generated without going through the normal state. , a so-called continuous state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature part 135SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times The game ends when a big win game state is entered before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), depending on whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure, "variable probability big hit A", " Allocation of determination values to the jackpot types of "probability variable jackpot B", "probability variable jackpot C", and "non-probability variable jackpot" is different. That is, if the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") has a small number of rounds "variable hit B" or "variable probability While assigned to the jackpot type of "jackpot C", when the special figure displayed variably is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable big hit B" or "probability variable big hit C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is controlled to the normal opening jackpot state or the high-speed opening jackpot state with a small number of rounds by setting the jackpot type to ``probable variable jackpot B'' or ``probable variable jackpot C''. Therefore, for example, by high opening control accompanying time saving control, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which there are few prize balls to be obtained is avoided. It is possible to prevent the game interest from deteriorating.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-variable" jackpot type is the first special figure special figure game or the second special figure Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a non-variable jackpot or a definite variable jackpot, the probability is the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as described above, depending on whether the allocation of the determination value for "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C" is different depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or a second special figure Then, the allocation of the judgment value for the "probable variable jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is set to be easier to determine in the case of the special game of the special figure than in the case of the first special figure of the special game.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure is the "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C". You may make it assign to a classification. For example, in the case of the special game of the second special, the judgment value less than that of the special game of the first special is the big hit type of "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C". may be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 10-8 shows the variation pattern in this characteristic portion 135SG. In this characteristic portion 135SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance so as to correspond to cases where the display result is a "big win" or a "minor win". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lost" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In addition, in this characteristic portion 135SG, as the normal reach variation pattern, a normal reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous performance described later is not executed and a normal reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous performance described later is performed once, are common normal reach reach performance. is set to run. Furthermore, as the super reach variation pattern, a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect described later is performed twice and a super reach variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect described later is performed three times. A production is to be executed. In other words, in the characteristic portion 135SG, only one type of reach effect is provided as the reach effect of normal reach and the reach effect of super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a plurality of reach effects may be provided as the reach effects of normal reach and the reach effects of super reach.

In addition, the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 135SG includes a special winning variation pattern ( PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 10-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach in this characteristic portion 135SG is executed is set shorter than the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, the normal reach variation pattern in the present characteristic portion 135SG includes a variation pattern in which the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and re-variably displayed during variable display, and a pseudo-continuous effect is not executed, and a pseudo-continuous effect is executed once during variable display. There is a variation pattern. In addition, in the normal reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed during the variable display is set to have a shorter special figure variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed once during the variable display.

Further, the super reach variation pattern in the characteristic portion 135SG includes a variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is performed twice during variable display, and a variation pattern in which the pseudo-continuous effect is performed three times during variable display. In addition, in the super reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is performed twice during the variable display is set to have a special figure variation time shorter than the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is performed three times during the variable display. .

In addition, in this characteristic portion 135SG, since it is set so that the variable display result is "big hit" in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, the degree of expectation of big hit becomes higher, so in the normal reach fluctuation pattern and the super reach fluctuation pattern The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

That is, with respect to the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern in the present characteristic portion 135SG, the greater the number of times of simulated continuous effects executed during variable display, the higher the degree of expectation for a big hit.

In addition, in the present characteristic unit 135SG, as will be described later, the type of variation pattern is first determined, such as the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number value for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and from the random value for determining the type of variation pattern After determining the type of the variation pattern first, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 10-9 is an explanatory diagram of the determination method of the variation pattern in the characteristic portion 135SG. In this characterizing section 135SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is changed according to the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-9, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of one-time jackpot of normal reach pseudo-continuous production), PB1-3 (variation pattern of two-time jackpot of super reach pseudo-continuous production), PB1-4 (super Reach pseudo continuous performance 3 times big hit variation pattern). In addition, when the variable display result is a probability variable big hit, the big hit variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is PB1-1 (normal reach big hit variation pattern), PB1 using the big hit variation pattern determination table B. -2 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance 1 time big hit), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance 2 times big hit), PB1-4 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance 3 times big hit) are determined. .

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the big-hit variation pattern determination table A and the big-hit variation pattern determination table B have different decision ratios for PB1-1 to PB1-4. Specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 45%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 20%, PB1-4 are determined at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern determination table B, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 30%, and PB1- 4 is determined at a rate of 45%. In other words, in the characteristic portion 135SG, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable jackpot. Furthermore, focusing on the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effects, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot, more pseudo-continuous effects are more likely to be executed during the variable display than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable jackpot. there is Therefore, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display and the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous effect.

Also, if the variable display result is a small hit, select the special hit variation pattern determination table, and use the special hit variation pattern determination table to determine the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special hit variation pattern). do.

Also, when the variable display result is "missing" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, the fluctuation pattern is PA1-1 (variation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous effect 1 time loss fluctuation pattern ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of missing two super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing three times of super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performance).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous effect 1 time fluctuation pattern of loss ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of missing two super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing three times of super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performance).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous effect 1 time fluctuation pattern of loss ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of missing two super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing three times of super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performance).

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 4, the variation pattern determination table C for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous effect 1 time fluctuation pattern of loss ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of missing two super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing three times of super ready-to-win pseudo-continuous performance).

Also, if the variable display result is "loss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for deviation, and use the variation pattern determination table D for deviation to determine the variation pattern PA1-4 (Shortening fluctuation pattern for non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous production 1 time), PA2-3 (super reach pseudo-continuous production 2 times It is determined from PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of losing 3 times of super reach pseudo-continuous effect).

In other words, if the variable display result in the present characteristic portion 135SG is "missing", the number of pending storage of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, etc., or based on the time saving state, the special figure Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1), the shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) increase the rate of variable display execution. , it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being slowed down.

In the RAM 102 of the characteristic portion 135SG, there is a game control data holding area 135SG150 as shown in FIG. is provided. The game control data holding area 135SG150 shown in FIG. 10-10 includes a first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A, a second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B, a normal figure reservation storage unit 135SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 135SG152. , A game control timer setting unit 135SG153, a game control counter setting unit 135SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 135SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A is a special feature that has not yet started although the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and the start winning (first starting winning) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Retained data such as random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment. , until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit 135SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display (result), it becomes the reservation information that makes it possible to determine whether it will be a big hit or not.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B has not started yet although the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the start winning (second starting winning) occurs It stores the pending data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Retained data such as random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on establishment. , the number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit 135SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result in this special figure game (special figure display (result), it becomes the reservation information that makes it possible to determine whether it will be a big hit or not.

In addition, reservation information (first reservation information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning opening The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern reservation storage unit 135SG151C stores the reservation information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 . For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit 135SG151C associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it passed through the passage gate 41, and determines the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for use is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 135SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 135SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting unit 135SG153. For example, the game control timer setting unit 135SG153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 135SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 135SG154, a random number value that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random number values MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 is provided with a performance control data holding area 135SG190 as shown in FIG. It is The production control data holding area 135SG190 shown in FIG. 10-11(A) includes a production control flag setting unit 135SG191, a production control timer setting unit 135SG192, a production control counter setting unit 135SG193, and a production control buffer setting unit 135SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 135SG191 stores a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. is flagged. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 135SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 135SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 135SG192 stores data indicating the timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting unit 135SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 135SG193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 135SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 135SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this characterizing portion 135SG, the data constituting the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A as shown in FIG. In the start winning command buffer 135SG194A, the storage area corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special figure reserved memory (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding areas) are provided. In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A, the storage area (buffer number "2-1" to "2-4 ) is provided. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), pattern designation command, variation category designation Four commands, a command and a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure reservation storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A are the area for storing these start winning prize designation commands and the symbol designation command. A storage area, an area for storing a variable category designation command, an area for storing a pending storage number notification command, an area for storing a pending display flag, and whether or not it is a target of a winning flash effect to be described later. A storage area (entry) is secured for storing an area for storing a flash effect target flag at the time of winning, and a storage area (entry) for separately storing the first special figure reserved memory and the second special figure reserved memory in association with the number of reserved memories. ing.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are changed when the start condition is satisfied and variable display of the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The content (data) of the pending memory for which the start condition is satisfied is copied to the active display buffer 135SG194B in FIG. Deleted. Then, the storage contents of the storage areas lower than the deleted reserved storage are shifted to upper storage areas one by one.

In the active display buffer 135SG194B, as described above, when the variable display of the pending memory (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") is started, the content of the pending memory satisfying the start condition ( Data) is copied, so as shown in FIG. 10-11(C), a storage area similar to the receive command buffer 135SG194A at the time of start winning is provided. That is, an area for storing the start opening winning designation command, an area for storing the pattern designation command, an area for storing the variable category command, an area for storing the pending memory number notification command, and an area for storing the pending display flag , and an area for storing a win-time flash effect target flag indicating whether or not a win-time flash effect is to be performed, which will be described later.

In this characteristic part 135SG, when a start winning is generated when variable display is not executed and no pending memory exists, a start winning designation command, a pattern designation command, a variable category command, a hold The stored number notification command is stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B without going through the reception command buffer 135SG194A at the time of start winning. It should be noted that the pending display flag is set by executing a pre-reading notice setting process (S161) described later by the effect control CPU 120. FIG.

Then, the storage contents of the active display buffer 135SG194B are cleared (deleted) in the special figure per waiting process executed when ending the variable display.

The suspended display flag is a flag indicating the display mode of the active display corresponding to the suspended display and the variable display being executed. Although the details will be described later, in this characterizing portion 135SG, it is possible to suggest the ratio of control to the big hit game state by the display mode of these pending display and active display (the value of the pending display flag).

Next, the starting winning judgment processing of the characterizing portion 135SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 6 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in the state (step 135SGS101a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 135SGS101a; Y), the first special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 135SGS102). CPU103, for example by reading the 1st reservation memory number count value which is the storage value of the 1st reservation memory number counter provided in game control counter setting section 135SG154, it should be able to identify the number of the 1st special figure reservation memory. At step 135SGS102, when the number of first special figure pending storage is not the upper limit value (step 135SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is set to "1" ( step 135 SGS 103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off at step 135SGS101a (step 135SGS101; N), when the number of first special figure pending storage has reached the upper limit at step 135SGS102 (step 135SGS102; Y), variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( Step 135 SGS 101b). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 135SGS101b; Y), the second special figure pending memory number, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it has a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 135SGS105). CPU103, for example by reading the second reservation memory number count value is the stored value of the second reservation memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154, it is sufficient if it can identify the number of second special figure reservation memory. At step 135SGS105, when the second special figure pending memory number is not the upper limit value (step 135SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 is set to "2" ( step 135 SGS 106).

After executing either of the processes of step 135SGS103 and step 135SGS106, the number of special figure pending storage corresponding to the start buffer value, which is the stored value of the start buffer, is updated so as to add 1 (step 135SGS107). For example, when the starting buffer value is "1", 1 is added to the first reserved storage number count value, and when the starting buffer value is "2", 1 is added to the second reserved storage number count value. In this way, the first reserved memory number count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total reserved storage number is also updated by adding 1 (step 135SGS108). For example, the total pending memory number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 135SG154, may be updated so as to add 1.

After executing the process of step 135SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 135SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for use and the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern are extracted (step 135 SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number extracted in this manner is stored by being set as suspension information at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure suspension storage unit corresponding to the start buffer value (step 135SGS110). For example, when the start buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A, while the start buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for judging the result of the special figure display and the random number MR2 for judging the type of the big hit determine whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit", and whether or not the variable display result is determined. It is used to determine the jackpot type in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols. The CPU 103 executes the process of step 135 SGS109 to extract numerical data representing all of the random numbers used for determining the variable display mode including the result of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols and the variable display time.

Following the processing of step 135SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting opening winning designation command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step 135SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", by storing the storage address of the first starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the effect control board 12 for sending the first starting entry winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. Make settings for sending the second start winning designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this manner is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

Following the process of step 135SGS111, the winning random number value determination process is executed (step 135SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, the pending storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (Step 135SGS113). The reserved memory number notification command set in this way is, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. transmitted.

After executing the processing of step 135SGS113, it is determined whether or not the starting buffer value is "1" (step 135SGS114). At this time, if the start buffer value is "1" (step 135SGS114; Y), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 135SGS115). move on. On the other hand, when the start buffer value is "2" (step 135SGS114; N), the start buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 135SGS116). End the process. Thus, even when both the first starter switch 22A and the second starter switch 22B simultaneously detect valid starting winnings of game balls, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be reliably completed.

FIG. 10-13(A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 135SGS112 of FIG. 10-12 as the winning random number determination process. In this characterizing portion 135SG, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 6) is performed to set the special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbol) as "big hit". It is determined whether or not to control to the jackpot gaming state. Also, in the variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 6), determination of a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is performed.

On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected in the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening), the CPU 103 executes the random value determination process at step 135 SGS 112 when winning a prize. As a result, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot pattern is to be displayed as a special figure display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach. As a result, before the start of the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning hole, that is, before the start of the variable display, it is decided whether or not to make a big hit. Before, it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit" and which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the variable display mode, and based on the determination result, the effect control CPU 120 , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-reading preview effect is executed.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 10-13 (A), the CPU 103 is first, for example, by checking the state of the time saving flag and probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 135SG152 etc., Pachinko game Identify the current gaming state of machine 1 (step 135SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that the variable probability flag is on when the variable probability flag is on, specifies that the time saving state is when the variable probability flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the variable probability flag and the time saving flag are specified. When it is off, it should be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the processing of step 135SGS121, the special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 10-6 is selected and set (step 135SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 135SGS109 in FIG. 10-12 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 135SGS123). In the big hit determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display results of "big hit" in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected by the processing of step 135SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and each determination value. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) of the determination values included in the jackpot determination range are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot determination range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "big hit".

When it is determined that it is not within the jackpot determination range at step 135SGS123, that is, when it is determined that the variable display does not hit the jackpot (step 135SGS123; N), the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 10-6 2 is selected and set (step 135 SGS124). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination extracted at step 135SGS109 in FIG. 10-12 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step 135SGS125).

When the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined that the variable display will result in a small hit (step 135 SGS125; Y), the variable display result is "small hit". Execute the transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is the symbol designation command according to the event (step 135SGS126), select and set the special winning variation pattern determination table (step 135SGS127), and proceed to step 135SGS138. .

When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when the variable display result is "loss" in the variable display, a pattern corresponding to the variable display result being "loss" Execute the transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the designation command (step 135 SGS128), and determine whether the time saving flag is on, that is, whether the current game state is the time saving state (step 135SGS129). If the time saving flag is off (step 135SGS129; N), select and set the change pattern determination table A for loss, and if the time saving flag is on (step 135SGS129; Y), change pattern determination for loss Table D is selected and set (step 135SGS131). Note that the deviation variation pattern determination table A is a deviation variation pattern determination table that is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. In addition, the variation pattern determination table for loss D is a variation pattern determination table for loss that is used when the game state is the high base state in which the time reduction control is executed.

In addition to the deviation variation pattern determination table A and the deviation variation pattern determination table D, the characteristic part 135SG includes a deviation variation pattern determination table B that is used when the number of pending memories is 3. , and a deviation variation pattern determination table C that is used when the number of pending memories is four is prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. , In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, 600 determination values from 0 to 599 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern in the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. In the variation pattern determination table B, 700 determination values from 0 to 699 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern in the range that the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination can take, and the variation pattern determination table for loss In C, 800 determination values from 0 to 799 are assigned to non-reach variation patterns within the range that the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination can take. On the other hand, in the variation pattern determination tables A to C for loss, 97 determination values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach out of the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. .

Therefore, in step 135SGS126, by determining the variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always non-reach or super reach even if the number of pending memories changes after the determination Therefore, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used for determination at the time of starting winning.

In addition, when it is determined in step 135SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that a jackpot will be hit during variable display (step 135SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 10-13(A) , the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step 135 SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103, according to the variable special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the start buffer value , select table data for big hit type determination from the table data constituting the big hit type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

In addition, the symbol designation command corresponding to the determined jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designation command in the case of the probability variation jackpot A, the third symbol designation command in the probability variation jackpot B, and the probability variation jackpot C in the case of the probability variation jackpot C Executes the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, executes the transmission setting of the 5th symbol designation command (step 135 SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 135 SGS 134). If the determined jackpot type is non-probable variable jackpot (step 135SGS134; Y), select and set a jackpot variation pattern determination table A as a table for determining jackpot variation patterns (step 135SGS135), step Go to 135SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is the variable probability jackpot (step 135SGS134; N), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table B (step 135SGS136), and proceed to step 135SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of step 135SGS127, step 135SGS130, step 135SGS131, step 135SGS135, and step 135SGS136, a numerical value indicating each variation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination data, a variation category is determined according to the range of determination values that include the random number MR3 (step 135SGS138). In this characteristic part 135SG, as shown in FIG. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable display mode (for example, normal reach) other than "non-reach" and "super reach" A variable category of "other" is provided, It suffices if it can be determined whether or not it is determined to be in such a fluctuation category based on the random value MR3.

After that, after performing the setting for transmitting the variation category designation command according to the determination result by the process of step 135SGS138 to the effect control board 12 (step 135SGS139), the random value determination process at the time of winning is ended.

10-14 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 8 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 10-14, the effect control CPU 120 first receives data from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by checking the storage contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is a command (step 135SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 135 SGS221; N), the command analysis process is terminated.

If there is a received command in step 135SGS221 (step 135SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first start winning prize designation command. (Step 135 SGS222).

In step 135SGS222, when the received command is not the first starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS222; N), it is determined whether or not the receiving command is the second starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS224).

At step 135SGS224, when the received command is not the second starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS224; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the design designation command (step 135SGS226). If the received command is not a design designation command at step 135SGS226 (step 135SGS226; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a variation category command (step 135SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command at step 135SGS227 (step 135SGS227; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first pending storage number notification command (step 135SGS228).

If the received command is not the first reserved storage number notification command at step 135SGS228 (step 135SGS228; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the second reserved storage number notification command (step 135SGS230).

If the received command in step 135SGS222 is the first starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS222; Y), or if the receiving command in step 135SGS224 is the second starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS224; Y), in step 135SGS226 If the received command is a design designation command (step 135SGS226; Y), if the received command is a variable category command in step 135SGS227 (step 135SGS227; Y), in step 135SGS228 the received command is the first pending storage number notification command If (135SGS228; Y), if the received command in step 135SGS230 is the second pending storage number notification command (step 135SGS230; Y), the received command is stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 135SG194A shown in FIG. Store at the beginning of the free area in the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS233), and return to the processing of step 135SGS221.

Specifically, in step 135SGS233, if there is no pending memory and variable display is not being executed, the received command is stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B. , the received command may be stored at the beginning of the empty area in the start winning received command buffer 135SG194A.

In addition, when the variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command) and the reservation storage number notification command (first reservation storage number notification command or second reservation storage number notification command) are received, , The pending storage number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A. That is, the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of starting winning can be stored sequentially from the top of the empty area in the receiving command buffer 135SG194A when starting winning.

At step 135SGS230, if the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command (step 135SGS230; N), settings are made according to other received commands (step 135SGS234), and the process returns to step 135SGS221.

In addition, in the command analysis processing of this characteristic part 135SG, if the received command is any of the starting entrance winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, and the pending storage number notification command, the received command is Although the form of sequentially storing from the beginning of the empty area of the received command buffer 135SG194A was exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the received command is the first start winning prize designation command, the pending storage number notification command If a pending memory number notification command is not received before the timer times out, the entry pending memory that has not received the pending memory number notification command It may be set outside the target of the reading notice effect.

Next, the effect control process processing in this characterizing portion 135SG will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-15, in the effect control process processing, the effect control CPU 120 executes the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161), and then the active display area 135SG005A, the first reservation storage display area 135SG005D and the second reservation. A specific display start effect execution process (step 135SGS162) is executed for executing a specific display start effect as a display start animation of the suspended display in the storage display area 135SG005U and a display start animation of the active display in the active display area 135SG005A. Further, after the specific display start effect execution processing, the effect control CPU 120 performs a winning flash effect execution process (step 135 SGS163) for executing a winning flash effect, and a hold display after the specific display start effect ends. and a specific display as a rotation animation according to the value of the display mode flag of the active display A specific display for executing a rotation display effect (see FIGS. 10-19 (B-1) to 10-19 (B-4)) Rotating display effect execution processing (step 135SGS164), when it is determined to execute a pending display notice effect as a pre-reading notice in the feature part 135SG, the variable display based on the pending memory that is the target of the pending display notice effect ends. Until then, a start lamp light emission effect execution process (step 135SG165) is executed for executing the start lamp light emission effect of causing the start lamp 135SG009S to emit light in a color corresponding to the display mode of the hold display/active display based on the hold memory. Then, one of steps S170 to S177 is executed.

Note that the specific display rotation display effect execution processing in the present characteristic portion 135SG includes processing for shifting each hold display to the next display position based on the start of the variable display and displaying it as a rotation animation, and setting the hold display as an active display. It also includes a process of shifting to the display area 135SG005A and displaying it as a rotation animation.

FIG. 10-16 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 161 of FIG. 10-15 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the pre-reading notice setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A or the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS240) to determine whether there is an entry whose display mode flag is not set. Determine (step 135 SGS241). If there is no entry whose display mode flag is not set (step 135SGS241; N), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. If there is an entry whose display mode flag is not set (step 135SGS241; Y), the It is determined whether or not there is an entry whose mode flag is set to "1" or "2", that is, whether or not the pending display notice effect as the pre-reading notice effect is already being executed (step 135 SGS242). .

If there is no entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2" (step 135 SGS242; N), it is further determined whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a small hit (step 135SGS243). If the design designation command of the entry does not indicate a small hit (step 135SGS243; N), the variable display result is specified from the design designation command of the entry (step 135SGS244a), and the variation category is determined from the variation category command of the entry. (step 135SGS244b). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pending display announcement effect and the display pattern based on the specified variable display result and variation category (step 135SGS245).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-17, when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is non-reach, 95% of the time, the suspension display notice effect is not executed (suspension display or active display is determined to be a white display pattern α), and at a rate of 5%, the suspension display notice effect is executed in the display pattern β (the display mode of suspension display or active display is blue), and 0% is decided to execute the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern γ (the display mode of the pending display or the active display is red).

In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is other (normal reach), 80% of the display pattern α ), and decided to execute the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β (the display mode of the pending display or the active display is blue) at a rate of 20%, and execute the pending display notice effect at a rate of 0%. It is decided to execute with γ (display mode of pending display or active display is red).

In addition, when the variable display result is lost and the variable category is super reach, the suspension display notice effect is not executed (display pattern α in which the display mode of suspension display or active display is white) at a rate of 65%. 25% of the time, it is decided to execute the pending display forewarning effect in the display pattern β (the display mode of the pending display or the active display is blue), and 10% of the time, the pending display forewarning effect is executed in the display pattern γ ( It is decided to execute the display mode of the pending display or the active display in red).

In addition, when the variable display result is a big hit, it is determined at a rate of 15% to not execute the pending display notice effect (display pattern α in which the display mode of the pending display or active display is white), and at a rate of 30% It is decided to execute the pending display notice effect in the display pattern β (the display mode of the pending display or the active display is blue), and the pending display notice effect is executed in the display pattern γ (the display mode of the pending display or the active display) at a rate of 55%. red).

In other words, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, when the pending display or the active display is displayed in red, the target variable display result has a high probability of winning a big hit (jackpot expectation), and the pending display or the active display is displayed in white. It is set so that the ratio of the target variable display result to be missed is the highest when the target is set (expectation for big hit according to display color of pending display and active display: red > blue > white).

Returning to FIG. 10-16, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the pending display announcement effect has been determined in step 135SGS245 (step 135SGS246). If it is determined in step 135SGS245 to execute the pending display notice effect (step 135SGS246; Y), the display mode flag of the entry is set to a value ("1" or "2") corresponding to the determined display pattern ( Step 135 (SGS247), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated.

If there is an entry whose display mode flag is already set to "1" or "2" (step 135SGS242; Y), if the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a small win (step 135SGS243; Y) , when it is decided not to execute the pending display notice effect (step 135SGS246; N), the display mode flag of the entry is set to "0" corresponding to non-execution of the display notice effect (step 135SGS248), End the pre-reading notice setting process.

It should be noted that this characteristic portion 135SG exemplifies a form in which the pre-reading forewarning effect for determining the display mode of the pending display and the effect for determining the display mode for the active display can be collectively executed as a pending display forewarning effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. good.

FIG. 10-18 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 135SGS162 of FIG. 10-15 as the specific display start effect execution process. In the specific display start effect execution processing, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not either the specific display start effect A or the specific display start effect B is being executed (step 135 SGS251). Whether or not either the specific display start effect A or the specific display start effect B is being executed depends on whether the process timer for the specific display start effect A or the process timer for the specific display start effect B, which will be described later, is in operation. It should be judged by whether.

When the specific display start effect A or the specific display start effect B is not being executed (step 135 SGS251; N), whether or not the start winning designation command is received (whether or not the start winning designation command reception flag is set) (step 135SGS252). When there is no reception of the start winning designation command (step 135 SGS252; N), the specific display start effect execution processing is terminated. In addition, if there is a reception of the start winning designation command (step 135SGS252; Y), the newly generated pending memory entry is identified by referring to the start winning win command buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B ( 263SGS273), it is determined whether or not it is the first special figure pending storage (step 135SGS253a). It should be noted that whether or not the first special figure reservation storage may be determined by the start opening winning designation command stored in the entry.

If the entry (specified entry) is not the first special figure pending storage (step 135SGS253a; N), proceed to step 135SGS255, and if the entry is the first special figure pending storage (step 135SGS253a; Y), specify It is determined whether or not the display mode flag of the entered entry is 0, that is, whether or not the entry is subject to the pending display notice effect (step 135SGS254). If the display mode flag of the specified entry is 0, that is, if the entry is not subject to the pending display notice effect (step 135SGS254; Y), the process proceeds to step 135SGS255.

In the processing of step 135 SGS255, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table for the specific display start effect A according to the display position of the specific display (suspended display or active display). Then, the process timer for specific display start effect A is started (step 135SGS256).

Further, if the display mode flag of the identified entry is not 0, that is, if the entry is subject to the suspension display notice effect (step 135 SGS254; N), the display position of the specific display (suspension display or active display) is displayed. The corresponding process table for specific display start effect B is selected (step 135SGS257). Then, the process timer for specific display start effect B is started (step 135SGS258).

After executing step 135SGS256 or step 135SGS258, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 of the set specific display start effect process table (step 135SGS259), and ends the specific display start effect execution processing. .

Further, when the specific display start effect A or the specific display start effect B is being executed (step 135 SGS251; Y), the effect control CPU 120 controls the process timer for the specific display start effect being executed (the process for the specific display start effect A). The value of the timer or the process timer for specific display start effect B) is decremented by 1 (step 135SGS260), and the process timer for specific display start effect (the process timer for specific display start effect being executed) that is decremented by 1 times out. (Step 135SGS261). If the process timer for specific display start effect being executed has not timed out (step 135 SGS261; N), the effect device is controlled according to the content corresponding to the process data of the process timer for specific display start effect being executed (step 135SGS262), the specific display start effect execution process is terminated.

Further, when the process timer for specific display start effect being executed times out (step 135 SGS261; Y), it is determined whether or not the process timer for specific display start effect is the final process timer for specific display start effect. (step 135 SGS263). When the final specific display start effect process timer times out (step 135SGS263; Y), the specific display start effect is ended (step 135SGS267), and the specific display start effect execution process is ended. If the last process timer for specific display start effect has not timed out (step 135 SGS263; N), the process data is switched, the next specific display start effect process timer is started, and the next specific display start effect is executed. The effect device is controlled (steps 135SGS264, step 135SGS265, and step 135SGS266) in accordance with the contents corresponding to the process data of the process timer, and the specific display start effect execution process ends.

As described above, in the present characterizing portion 135SG, when a starting prize is generated and it is determined based on the starting prize not to execute the pre-reading notice effect (holding display notice effect), or when the starting prize is the second If it is a starting prize to the starting port, as shown in FIGS. , in the active display area 135SG005A or the reserved memory display areas 135SG005D and 135SG005U, an appearance animation in which the reserved display (active display) gradually appears from the bottom to the top is displayed as the specific display start effect A. .

It should be noted that, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the starting winning to the end of the appearance animation of the reserved display (active display) as the specific display start effect A is approximately 0.2 seconds. Then, the suspended display (active display) after the end of the specific display start effect A is, as the specific display rotation display effect described above, similar to the other suspended displays and active displays, in the active display area 135SG005A or the suspended storage display areas 135SG005D and 135SG005U. Transition to rotation animation display.

In addition, when a starting prize is generated, execution of a pre-reading notice effect (holding display notice effect) is determined based on the starting prize, and the starting prize is a starting prize to the first starting port, As shown in FIGS. 10-20(A) to 10-20(C) and FIGS. 10-20(C-1) to 10-20(C-4), as the specific display start effect B, first, an image An animation in which the character A appears from the flash lamp 135SG009F at winning is displayed on the display device 5 . After the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, if the variable display is executed at the timing of the start winning, or if the first special figure pending memory already exists, the character A is the first An animation is displayed that moves to the 1 reserved storage display area 135SG005D. At this time, the character A is displayed overlapping part of the active display area 135SG005A in the process of moving to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D.

Then, when the character A moves to the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D, as shown in FIGS. An animation is displayed that attacks (acts) on the position where the hold display is displayed. When the display of the animation ends, an appearance animation is displayed in which the hold display gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the position where the character A attacked.

In the characteristic portion 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the starting prize to the end of the animation in which the character A attacks the position where the suspension display is displayed in the first suspension storage display area 135SG005D as the specific display start effect B is about 1 second, and the period from the end of the animation to the end of the pending display appearance animation is approximately 0.2 seconds. That is, when the specific display start effect B is executed for the reserved display of the first special figure, it takes 1.2 seconds from the occurrence of the start winning to the completion of the display of the holding display based on the starting winning. . After the end of the specific display start effect B, the reserved display shifts to a rotating animation display in the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D as the above-described specific display rotating display effect, like the other reserved displays and active displays.

Incidentally, when the character A appears from the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning as the specific display start effect B, if the variable display is not executed at the timing of the start winning and the first special figure reservation memory does not exist. , an animation is displayed in which the character A moves to the active display area 135SG005A. Then, when the character A moves to the active display area 135SG005A, the active display of the character A is displayed on the basis of the starting prize, as in FIGS. 10-20(C-1) to 10-20(C-4). An animation that attacks (acts) is displayed on the position where the target is, that is, the active display area 135SG005A. When the display of the animation ends, an appearance animation is displayed in which the active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the position where the character A attacked.

In the characteristic portion 135SG, the period from the occurrence of the starting prize to the end of the animation in which the character A attacks the active display area 135SG005A as the specific display start effect B is about 0.5 seconds, and the animation ends. to the end of the appearance animation of the active display is about 0.2 seconds. That is, when the specific display start effect B is executed for the active display, it takes 0.7 seconds from the start winning to the completion of the display of the active display based on the starting winning. Then, the active display after the end of the specific display start effect B shifts to the rotation animation display in the active display area 135SG005A as the above-described specific display rotating display effect.

FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22 are flow charts showing an example of the processing executed in step 135SGS163 of FIG. 10-21 as the winning flash effect execution processing. In the winning flash effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning receive command buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS272), and displays these in the start winning receive command buffer 135SG194A and active display buffer 135SG194B. It is determined whether or not there is an entry whose mode flag is set to "1" or "2", that is, whether or not the pending display announcement effect is being executed (step 135 SGS273).

If there is an entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2" (step 135 SGS273; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the entry is based on the start winning to the first start port. It is determined whether or not (step 135SGS274). Incidentally, whether or not the entry is based on the start winning to the first starting opening may be specified from the starting opening winning designation command stored in the entry.

If the entry is based on the start winning to the first start opening (step 135SGS274; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the game state is the normal state (step 135SGS275). If the game state is a normal state (step 135SGS275; Y), whether the value of the effect control process flag is any one of 0 to 3, that is, the game state is a big hit game state or a small hit game state. (Step 135SGS276). If the value of the effect control process flag is any one of 0 to 3 (step 135SGS276; Y), the variation category of the entry (the entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2") is super. It is determined whether or not it is a reach (step 135SGS277).

If the variable category of the entry is super reach (step 135 SGS277; Y), it is determined whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is 2, that is, whether variable display is being executed (step 135 SGS278). When the value of the effect control process flag is 2 (step 135SGS278; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the ready-to-win effect is being executed (step 135SGS279). It should be noted that whether or not the ready-to-win effect is being executed may be determined from the contents of the process data displayed in the variable display.

If the value of the effect control process flag is not 2 (step 135SGS278; N) or if the ready-to-win effect is not being executed (step 135SGS279; N), the effect control CPU 120 executes the win-time flash effect based on the variable display result.・Determine non-execution. It should be noted that the variable display result may be specified from the symbol designation command of the entry for which the win-time flash effect target flag is not set.

As shown in FIG. 10-24, when the variable display result is a failure, execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined at a rate of 10%, and non-execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined at a rate of 90%. When the result of the variable display is a big hit, execution of the flash performance at the time of winning is determined at a rate of 20%, and non-execution of the flash performance at the time of winning is determined at a rate of 80%.

That is, in this characteristic part 135SG, when the winning flush performance is executed from the start winning, the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is set higher than when the winning flash performance is not executed.

Returning to FIG. 10-21, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the winning flash effect is determined (step 135SG279b). If it is decided to execute the flash effect at the time of winning (step 135SG279b; Y), the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is set to the target of the flash effect at the time of winning of the relevant entry (the entry for which the flag for the flash effect at the time of winning is not set). (Step 135SG280), and the flash effect execution flag at the time of winning is turned on (Step 135SG280a). The process table for the flash effect at the time of the first prize winning is selected, the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the first prize winning is started, the effect device is controlled according to the content of the process data 1 (steps 135SGS281 to step 135SGS283), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS292.

As shown in FIG. 10-23, the flash effect at the time of winning the first term means that the flash effect at the time of winning 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are set to the flash effect at the time of winning for 1.5 seconds after the occurrence of the start winning. Flashing in a corresponding manner (as shown in FIGS. 10-26 (A) and 10-26 (B), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are lit at high luminance C1 and extinguishing are repeatedly executed), the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1, and the effect image 135SG005E of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in this feature part 135SG is the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term, which is output during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the previous term winning, and the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term, which is output during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the latter term winning. It is divided into the sound corresponding to the flash effect and the sound corresponding to the flash effect. Among these, as the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term, a sound having a relatively short output period (for example, one second) such as an electronic sound or a voice sound of a specific character may be output once. Also, as the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of the late winning, a sound such as dedicated BGM or SE (sound effect) having a longer output period than the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of the early winning may be repeatedly output. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 135SG, in addition to the above-described sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, a plurality of effect sounds such as a sound corresponding to the notice effect and a sound corresponding to the variable display, which will be described later, are different using different channels. Simultaneous output from the speakers 8L and 8R is possible depending on the volume.

In addition, if the entry is based on winning a prize to the second start port (step 135SG274; N), if the gaming state is not normal (step 135SG275; N), the effect control process flag is any of 0-3 If neither (step 135SG276; N), if the variation category of the entry is not super reach (step 135SG277; N), if the ready-to-win effect is being executed (step 135SG279; Y), no winning flash effect is determined (step 135SG279b), the winning flash effect target flag of the entry is set to "0" indicating that the winning flash effect is not the target (step 135SG279c), and the winning flash effect execution process is executed. finish.

In addition, when the prize winning flash effect execution flag is ON at step 135SGS271 (step 135SGS271; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the process timer for the first winning flash effect is in operation (step 135SGS271). 135SGS284). When the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous winning is in operation (step 135SGS284; Y), the value of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous winning is decremented by 1 (step 135SGS285), and the previous term after decrementing the value by 1. It is determined whether or not the process timer for winning flash effect has timed out (step 135SGS286). When the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the first winning has not timed out (step 135 SGS286; N), the effect control CPU 120 operates the effect device in accordance with the process data of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous winning being executed. control (step 135SGS287) and proceed to step 135SGS292.

Also, when the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous winning has timed out (step 135SGS286; Y), it is determined whether or not the last process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous winning has timed out (step 135SGS288). When the final process timer for flash effect at the time of winning the last period has not timed out (step 135 SGS288; N), the effect control CPU 120 executes switching of the process data, and starts the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the next early stage winning. , the effect device is controlled in accordance with the process data of the process timer for flash effect at the time of the next winning (step 135SGS289, step 135SGS290, step 135SGS291), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS292.

At step 135SGS292, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the button lamp 135SG009X and the stick lamp 135SG009Y, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. is controlled to blink in a manner corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning the first term. Also, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1 (step 135SGS293), and the winning flash effect execution processing is terminated. As a form corresponding to the first winning flash effect, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be repeatedly illuminated in white or red. In addition, as a mode corresponding to the winning flash effect, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the button lamp 135SG009X and the stick lamp 135SG009Y and the winning flash effect. The lamp 135SG009F may emit light in the same color.

Also, in step 135SGS288, when the final process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning the last term has timed out (step 135SGS288; Y), the effect control CPU 120 ends the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term (step 135SGS294). Then, the process table for flash effect at the time of late winning is selected, the process timer for flash effect at the time of late winning is started, the effect device is controlled according to the content of process data 1 (step 135SGS294 to step 135SGS297), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS307.

As shown in FIG. 10-23, the flash effect at the time of winning means that the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning is turned on from the end of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term to the start timing of the reach effect of the target variable display super reach. A silhouette image of the character A imitated by a lamp 135SG009F for winning a flash in an image display device 5 is flashed in a manner corresponding to the flash performance at winning, a sound corresponding to the flash performance at winning is output from speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V1. This is an effect for displaying 135SG005S. As a mode corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter term, the lamp for flashing at the time of winning 135SG009F may be caused to repeatedly emit light in white or red as in the flash effect at the time of winning in the first term. Incidentally, since the late winning flash effect is performed at a lower brightness than the early winning flash effect (see FIG. 10-28), the actual lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the late winning flash effect is It will emit light in a darker color than the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term.

As shown in FIG. 10-27(A), the game effect lamp 9 (especially the frame lamp 9b) has a luminance C2 which is lower than the luminance C1 described above during a period other than during execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term. It is designed to repeat lighting and (blinking) extinguishing with . In particular, the blinking cycle at the brightness C2 is longer than the blinking cycle during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term, and during the blinking, it is shown in FIGS. Thus, the frame lamp 9b blinks while changing the emission color step by step in a manner corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5 . For this reason, the game effect lamp 9 during the period other than the execution of the flash performance at the time of the previous winning has a lower impression given to the player than the game effect lamp 9 during the execution of the flash performance at the time of the previous winning.

In step 135SGS284, if the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the early winning is not in operation, that is, if the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning is in operation (step 135SGS284; N), the effect control CPU 120 Decrease the value of the process timer for flash effect at the time of winning by 1 (step 135SGS298), and judge whether or not the process timer for flash effect at the time of winning which has decreased the value by 1 has timed out (step 135SGS299). When the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning has not timed out (step 135 SGS299; N), the effect device is controlled according to the contents corresponding to the process data of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning being executed (step 135 SGS300). ), go to step 135 SGS307.

Then, when the process timer for flash effect at the time of late winning has timed out (step 135SGS299; Y), it is determined whether or not the last process timer for flash effect at the time of late winning has timed out (step 135SGS301). When the final process timer for flash effects at the time of the latter period has not timed out (step 135 SGS301; N), the process data is switched, the next process timer for the flash effects at the time of the latter period of the prize is started, and the process timer of the process data 1 is started. Control the rendering device according to the content (steps 135SGS302 to step 135SGS304), and proceed to step 135SGS307.

Further, when the final process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning has timed out (step 135 SGS301; Y), the first process timer for the flash effect at the time of the late winning is started, and the effect device is controlled according to the contents of the process data 1 ( Step 135SGS305, step 135SGS306) and step 135SGS307.

At step 135SGS307, the effect control CPU 120 blinks and controls the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in a manner corresponding to the late winning flash effect. Also, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1 (step 135SGS308).

Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 checks the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS309), and determines whether or not the flash effect object flag at the time of winning of the active display buffer 135SG194B is set to "1", that is, the variable display during execution. It is determined whether or not is the variable display for flash effect at the time of winning (step 135SGS310). When "0" is set in the winning flash effect target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS310; N), the winning flash effect execution processing is terminated. When "1" is set in the winning flash effect target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS310; Y), it is determined whether or not it is time to start the ready-to-win effect (step 135SGS311).

If it is time to start the ready-to-win effect (step 135SGS311; Y), the effect control CPU 120 ends the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period, turns off the flash effect executing flag at the time of winning (step 135SGS312, step 135SGS313), and Terminate the flash effect execution process.

Moreover, when it is not the ready-to-win effect start timing (step 135SGS311; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a pattern confirmation command has been received (step 135SGS311a). When there is a reception of the symbol confirmation command (step 135SGS311a; Y), the flash effect at the time of winning is ended, the flash effect execution flag at the time of winning is turned off (step 135SGS312, step 135SGS313), and the flash effect execution processing at the time of winning is executed. finish. If the symbol confirmation command is not received (step 135SGS311a; N), the flash effect execution process at the time of winning is terminated without executing the processes of steps 135SGS312 and 135SGS313.

As described above, the flash effect at the time of early winning in the present characteristic section 135SG is a effect that ends when a predetermined effect period (for example, 1.5 seconds) elapses, while the flash effect at the time of late winning is the effect It is an effect that is repeatedly executed without ending every time a certain period passes until the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the target variable display.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 cannot determine that it is the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display of the object of effect due to the generation of static electricity or the like during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the start timing of the ready-to-win effect. At the end timing of the variable display (the reception timing of the pattern confirmation command), which is the later timing, it is possible to end the late winning flash effect including the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F.

Incidentally, as shown in step 135SGS281 in FIG. 10-21 and step 135SGS295 in FIG. is selected, and one process table for effect is selected as the process table for flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period. In other words, regardless of the number of reserved memories, etc., the effect pattern (effect period) of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term and the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term of this characteristic part 135SG is always the same effect mode and the same effect period at the time of winning the first term regardless of the number of reserved memories. A flash effect and a flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period are executed.

FIG. 10-25 is a flow chart showing the effect process during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from each value of the process timer, the variable time timer, and the variable control timer (step 135SGS351, step 135SGS352, step 135SGS353). The process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are timers set in the variable display start setting process.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 135SGS356). If the process timer has timed out (step 135SGS356; Y), the process data is switched (step 135SGS357). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next process timer set value in the process table set in the variable display start setting process to the process timer (step 135 SGS358). In addition, the control state for the production device (parts for production) is changed based on the next set display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc. (step 135SGS359). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out (step 135 SGS356; N), the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.) Control of the production device (parts for production) is executed according to (step 135SGS360).

In particular, as the control contents of step 135SGS359 and step 135SGS360, the effect control CPU 120 outputs a variable display corresponding sound corresponding to the variable display being executed from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V2 smaller than the volume V1 (step 135SGS361). Note that the variable display corresponding sound in the characteristic portion 135SG refers to BGM corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5, BGM corresponding to the number of simulated continuous effects performed during variable display, and the like. Further, when the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is not executed (step 135SGS362; N), blinking control is performed in a mode corresponding to the variable display during execution of the game effect lamp 9 (step 135SGS363). While the effect is being executed (step 135SGS362; Y), blinking control in a mode corresponding to the variable display during execution of the game effect lamp 9 is not executed (as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, the game effect The lamp 9 is controlled to blink in a manner corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning the first term).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes a notice effect execution process (step 135SG364). In the advance notice effect execution processing, for example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display start setting processing, it is determined whether or not the notice effect is to be executed during execution of the variable display, and in which effect pattern the notice effect is executed. It suffices that it is possible to execute the advance notice effect according to the determination result. Further, when the effect pattern of the notice effect is determined in the variable display start setting process described above, one effect pattern is determined from a plurality of effect patterns at different ratios according to the result of the variable display. The ratio of control to the jackpot game state may be made different depending on whether the performance pattern is executed.

The effect executed as the advance notice effect in the characteristic portion 135SG is a dialogue effect in which the character's lines are displayed on the image display device 5, and the degree of expectation for the big win varies according to the displayed lines.

Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display control timer has timed out (step 135SGS365). When the variable display control timer has timed out (step 135SGS365; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen for the left, middle, and right decorative patterns (displayed after 30 ms have elapsed since the display of the previous decorative pattern was switched). The image data of the screen to be displayed) is created and written in a predetermined area of the VRAM (step 135SGS366). Thus, in the image display device 5, the variable display control of the decoration pattern is realized. The display control unit 123 transmits to the image display device 5 a signal based on data obtained by superimposing the image data of a predetermined area such as the set background image and the image data based on the display control execution data set in the process table. Output. In this manner, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the decorative design in the variable display of the decorative design. Also, a predetermined value is reset to the variable display control timer (step 135SGS367).

Also, when the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 135SGS365; N) or after execution of step 135SGS366, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 135SGS368). . If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 135 SGS370). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the determination command reception flag indicating that the symbol determination command has been received is set (step 135 SGS369; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is waited for a special symbol. (Step S173) is updated to a value according to (Step 135SGS370). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, when the pattern confirmation command is received, the control is shifted to stop the variable display. is received, the variable display of the decorative design can be terminated when the regular variable display time elapses (at the end of the variable display of the special design).

Process data during variable display of decorative patterns is set in the process table used for variable display control of the decorative patterns. That is, the sum of the process timer set values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decoration pattern. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n has timed out in the process of step 135 SGS356, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and the decoration design effect control based on the process table is finish.

Next, the operation mode of each effect device when executing the winning flash effect in the present characterizing section 135SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-28 to 10-68. First, FIG. 10-28 is a timing chart in the case where a starting winning occurs during execution of variable display, and it is determined to execute a winning flash effect based on the starting winning. FIG. 10-28 shows both the case where execution of the holding display notice effect is decided when the execution of the winning flash effect is decided based on the start winning, and the case where it is decided not to execute the holding display notice effect. It is a corresponding timing chart. Figures 10-29 to 10-48 show the image display device 5 when a start winning occurs during the execution of the variable display, and execution of the pending display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning is determined based on the start winning. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an effect mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. Figures 10-49 to 10-68 show that a start winning occurs during the execution of the variable display, and based on the starting winning, execution of the winning flash effect is determined, while non-execution of the pending display notice effect is determined. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a presentation mode in the image display device 5 and the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F in the case of winning.

10-29 to 10-48 "When execution of pending display notice effect and winning flash effect is determined", the display mode of the pending display, which is the target of the winning flash effect, is the display pattern β or This is the case where it is displayed in the display pattern γ (displayed in a blue or red round shape), and the "while the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning has been decided, the pending display notice" shown in FIGS. "When it is decided not to execute the effect" refers to the case where the display mode of the pending display, which is the target of the winning flash effect, is displayed in the display pattern α (displayed in a white round shape).

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-29 (A), during the execution of the variable display, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern, and the variable display is performed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The corresponding sound is output at volume V2. Further, during the execution of the variable display, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes at the cycle T0 corresponding to the variable display (FIGS. 10-27(A) to 10-27 Blinking in the mode shown in (D)) is controlled.

Further, during execution of the variable display, during the execution period of the notice effect, an image corresponding to the effect pattern of the notice effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and the notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound corresponding to the production pattern (for example, a sound corresponding to the advance notice production, such as the sound of a character speaking characters displayed on the image display device 5) is output at volume V2. In addition, as reserved memory, there are three first special figure reserved memories (three reserved indications are displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D).

During such a variable display, if a prize is awarded to the first start port (start prize), and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning based on the start prize, FIG. As shown in 10-28 and FIG. 10-29(B), the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is started.

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-29 (B), the flash effect corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to volume V1 (V1>V2). At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are once turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-28, 10-30(C), and 10-30(D), the effect image 135SG005E starts to be displayed around the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5. At the same time, blinking control of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG009X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the period T1. In addition, in the flashing control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

Further, when the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term is started, as shown in FIGS. An animation is displayed in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F which is controlled to blink, and an animation is displayed in which the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. After the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D, the character A moves to the position where the reserved display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D (in the case of this feature part 135SG, the fourth reserved An animation that attacks (acts) against the position where the display is displayed is displayed.

After the character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the pending display, which is the target of the winning flash effect (previous winning flash effect) being executed, gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the acting position. Appearance animation is displayed (see FIGS. 10-20 (D-1) to 10-20 (D-5)). It should be noted that the suspended display for which the appearance animation in the first suspended storage display area 135SG005D is completed shifts to the rotating display as the specific display rotating display effect like the other suspended displays.

That is, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, when a start winning occurs during the variable display, and execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined based on the start winning, display of the pending display based on the starting win is completed. At the same time, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started. It should be noted that the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display start effect B in the characteristic portion 135SG is completed during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period (Fig. 10-32 (G) and Fig. 10- 32(H)).

When the flash effect at the time of winning the first term ends, the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term starts from the end timing. As the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the later stage, as shown in FIGS. 10-28, 10-32 (G) and 10-32 (H), the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2. At the same time, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking with brightness C2 and period T2 (period T2>period T1). In addition, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals.

It should be noted that at the end timing of the flash effect for the first-term winning and the start timing of the flash effect for the second-term winning, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, The light emission mode (blinking at the brightness C1 and the period T1) according to the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term of the attacker lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d) ends. The light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is similar to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. 10-27(A) to 10-27(D). That is, the light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is based on the end of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term. At the time of winning the first term, the light emission mode is returned to before the start of the flash performance. Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are kept turned off after the start timing of the flash effect at the time of the late winning.

The game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y blink at the brightness C2 and the period T0 as described above. As the same mode as the mode before execution of the flash effect at the time of winning (light emission mode shown in FIG. 10-29 (A)), a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image) If the background image is an evening image, the gradation is performed using a red color, etc.).

The cycle T2, which is the flashing cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-described cycle T1 and shorter than the above-described cycle T0 (length of lamp flashing cycle: T0>T2 >T1). It should be noted that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term.

10-32(H), 10-33(I), and 10-33(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state in which the transparent black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the entire first display area 135SG005F except for the active display area 135SG005A. The silhouette image 135SG005S in the characteristic portion 135SG is displayed in blue so as to be easily recognized by the player when displayed overlapping the black image 135SG005B.

In this characterizing portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in blue so that the player can easily see it when displayed overlapping the black image 135SG005B, but the present invention is limited to this. Alternatively, the silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed in a color other than blue, such as green or red. In particular, when the silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed in a plurality of colors such as blue, green, and red as described above, even if the degree of expectation for a big hit is changed according to the color in which the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed. good. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the color of the silhouette image 135SG005S, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 10-32(H) and 10-33(J), in this characteristic portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, while the image display device 5, a small pattern 135SG005M is displayed at the left end. Therefore, in the winning flash effect of the characteristic portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the small pattern 135SG005M are not displayed in an overlapping manner, and the player can display the silhouette image 135SG005S during the winning flash effect. Whether or not the variable display is being executed can be confirmed by visually recognizing the small pattern 135SG005M regardless of whether or not the variable display is being executed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-33 (J), 10-34 (K) and 10-34 (L), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the design confirmation command, the image display device 5 displays the decorative design and The small symbols 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the variable display corresponding sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing section 135SG is executed regardless of whether it is during the symbol fixing period or not. That is, as shown in FIG. 10-33(J), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state in which the black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the image display device 5 even during the design confirmation period, and the speakers 8L and 8R display the silhouette image 135SG005S. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at the volume V2.

When the symbol fixing period ends, a new variable display is started. At this time, in the image display device 5, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display and is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted rightward by one. Also, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 10-34(K) to 10-41(Z), in the variable display before the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, the speaker 8L as the late winning flash effect, Output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from 8R at the volume V2, blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning with brightness C2 and period T2, and display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 10-38 (S) to 10-40 (X), in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (FIG. 10-40 (W ).In this characterizing portion 135SG, decorative patterns indicating normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and special patterns indicating temporary stop are temporarily stopped in the inner decorative pattern display area 5C. ), as a flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter stage, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V2, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning flashes with a brightness of C2 and a period of T2, and the image display device 5 is executed to display the silhouette image 135SG005S.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-41 (Y) and 10-41 (Z), when the variable display in which the normal reach is lost in response to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect ends, the image display device 5 displays the decoration pattern and the small display. The symbols 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the outputs of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R are stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing portion 135SG is also executed during the pattern fixing period of the variable display that is out of normal reach. That is, as shown in FIGS. 10-41 (Y) and 10-41 (Z), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 in a state where the black image 135SG005B is overlapped and displayed even during the design determination period. At the same time, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2.

As shown in FIGS. 10-40(W) and 10-40(X), during the temporary stop period of the decoration pattern, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are applicable. It emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, if the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped for the first time in the variable display, it emits light in blue with luminance C2), and the background image is based on the execution of the re-variable display. It returns to the light emission mode according to . Furthermore, during the period in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small symbols 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary suspension. It is possible to recognize that the variable display has not ended yet.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-42(a) and 10-42(b), when the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started, it is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. A suspended display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display.

As shown in FIGS. 10-43(c) to 10-47(l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period is continuously executed. Also, during the variable display, the advance notice effect may be executed (see FIGS. 10-43(d) and 10-44(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (FIGS. 10-45(g) to 10-46(j). reference).

In particular, even in the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, during the period when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 10-46 (j)), the flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R is displayed as the late winning flash effect. Winning flash effect corresponding sound is output at volume V2, winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes with brightness C2 and period T2, and silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on image display device 5. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 10-45(g) and 10-46(j), during the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are displayed in the decorative pattern. (for example, blue with luminance C2 for the first temporary stop, green with luminance C2 for the second temporary stop) according to the temporary stop, and to execute the re-variable display Based on this, the lighting mode returns to the light emission mode corresponding to the background image. Incidentally, although not shown in the characteristic portion 135SG, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker The lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode (for example, red with luminance C2) corresponding to the third temporary stop of the decoration pattern, and light emission corresponding to the background image based on the execution of the re-variable display. Back to Aspects.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-48 (m) and 10-48 (n), when the ready-to-win effect is started due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 After 135SG005F is once whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white), the ready-to-win effect is started. In addition, in this characterizing portion 135SG, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

In addition, at the white-out timing, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F blinks with the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image display device 5 The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends.

At the white-out timing, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y finish blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T0. . These main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are kept off during the whiteout period.

That is, during the white-out period, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are kept turned off. Then, from the timing when the white-out ends, as a mode corresponding to the above-described ready-to-win effect, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d respond to the ready-to-win effect. The light emission mode (lighting at luminance C1) is started.

Also, during the white-out period, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. In other words, during the whiteout period, neither sound is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and there is no sound. At the same time that the attack lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d start emitting light according to the ready-to-win effect (lighting with the brightness C1), the output of the sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect, which is the sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect, starts from the speakers 8L and 8R. . It should be noted that, as the ready-to-win effect corresponding sound in the characteristic portion 135SG, BGM or the like different from the variable display corresponding sound may be output so that the player can recognize that the ready-to-win effect (the ready-to-win effect of super reach) is being executed. Just do it.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-28, when a start winning occurs during the execution of the variable display, and execution of the holding display notice effect is determined based on the start winning, the start lamp light emitting effect is used. From the start winning timing, the starting port lamp 135SG009S changes color according to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect (for example, if the display pattern of the pending display is the display pattern β, it is blue, and the display pattern of the pending display is the display pattern γ). red) to start emitting light.

The light emission of the starting entrance lamp 135SG009S is an effect that is executed completely independently of the flash effect at the time of winning described above. Light emission in a color corresponding to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is continued until the target variable display of the starting port lamp light emission effect (the target variable display of the flash effect at the time of winning) ends from the time of winning.

Next, a description will be given of a case where execution of the holding display forewarning effect as well as the flash effect at the time of winning is not determined in the starting winning during the execution of the variable display.

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-49 (A), during the execution of the variable display, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern, and the variable display is performed from the speakers 8L and 8R. The corresponding sound is output at volume V2. In addition, during execution of the variable display, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F is lit, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes at the cycle T0 corresponding to the variable display (Fig. 10-27 (A) to Fig. 10-27 Blinking in the mode shown in (D)) is controlled.

Further, during execution of the variable display, during the execution period of the notice effect, an image corresponding to the effect pattern of the notice effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and the notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound corresponding to the production pattern (preliminary production corresponding sound) is output at volume V2. In addition, as reserved memory, there are three first special figure reserved memories (three reserved indications are displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D).

During such a variable display, if a prize is awarded to the first start port (start prize), and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning based on the start prize, As shown in 10-28 and FIG. 10-49(B), the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is started.

First, as shown in FIG. 10-28 and FIG. 10-49 (B), the flash effect corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to volume V1 (V1>V2). At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are once turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-28, 10-50(C), and 10-50(D), the effect image 135SG005E starts to be displayed around the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5. At the same time, blinking control of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the cycle T1. Incidentally, in the flashing control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

Further, when the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term is started, as shown in FIGS. Appearance animation is displayed in which the pending display, which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning (previous flash effect at the time of winning) being executed, gradually appears from the bottom to the top (Fig. 10-19 (B-1) to Fig. 10-19 ( B-4)). It should be noted that the suspended display for which the appearance animation in the first suspended storage display area 135SG005D is completed shifts to the rotating display as the specific display rotating display effect like the other suspended displays.

In particular, when the specific display start effect A is executed together with the win-time flash effect, the pending display appearance animation ends when the effect image 135SG005E is still being displayed on the image display device 5 . On the other hand, when the above-described specific display start effect B is executed together with the winning flash effect, the appearance animation of the pending display ends after the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIGS. 10-29 to 10-29). 10-32). That is, when the specific display start effect A is executed, the display of the pending display (appearance animation) is completed at an earlier timing than when the specific display start effect B is executed, and the rotation animation is started.

That is, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, when a start winning occurs during the variable display, and execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined based on the start winning, display of the pending display based on the starting win is completed. At the same time, the output of sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started. It should be noted that the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display start effect A in the characteristic portion 135SG is completed during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous period.

When the flash effect at the time of winning the first term ends, the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term starts from the end timing. As the flash effect at the time of winning in the late stage, as shown in FIGS. 10-28, 10-52 (G) and 10-52 (H), the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2. At the same time, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking with brightness C2 and period T2 (period T2>period T1). Also, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals.

It should be noted that at the end timing of the flash effect for the first-term winning and the start timing of the flash effect for the second-term winning, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, The light emission mode (blinking at the brightness C1 and the period T1) according to the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term of the attacker lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d) ends. The light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is similar to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. 10-27(A) to 10-27(D). That is, the light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is based on the end of the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term. At the time of winning the first term, the light emission mode is returned to before the start of the flash performance. Note that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are kept turned off after the start timing of the flash effect at the time of the late winning.

The game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y blink at the brightness C2 and the period T0 as described above. As the same mode as the mode before execution of the flash effect at the time of winning (light emission mode shown in FIG. 10-29 (A)), a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image) If the background image is an evening image, the gradation is performed using a red color, etc.).

The cycle T2, which is the flashing cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-described cycle T1, but is shorter than the above-described cycle T0 (length of lamp flashing cycle: T0>T2 >T1). It should be noted that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term.

10-52(H), 10-53(I), and 10-53(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state in which the transparent black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the entire first display area 135SG005F except for the active display area 135SG005A.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 10-52(H) and 10-53(J), in this characteristic portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, while the image display device 5, a small pattern 135SG005M is displayed at the left end. Therefore, in the winning flash effect of the characteristic portion 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the small pattern 135SG005M are not displayed in an overlapping manner, and the player can display the silhouette image 135SG005S during the winning flash effect. It is possible to confirm whether or not the variable display is being executed by visually recognizing the small pattern 135SG005M regardless of whether or not it is being executed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-53 (J), 10-54 (K) and 10-54 (L), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the design confirmation command, the image display device 5 The symbols 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the outputs of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R are stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing portion 135SG is executed regardless of whether it is during the pattern fixing period or not. That is, as shown in FIG. 10-53(J), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state where the black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the image display device 5 even during the pattern confirmation period, and the speakers 8L and 8R At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at the volume V2.

When the symbol fixing period ends, a new variable display is started. At this time, in the image display device 5, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display and is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted rightward by one. Also, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 10-54(K) to 10-61(Z), in the variable display before the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, the speaker 8L as the late winning flash effect, Output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from 8R at volume V2, flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F with brightness C2 and period T2, and display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 10-58 (S) to 10-60 (X), in the variable display in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (FIG. 10-60 (W ).In this characterizing portion 135SG, decorative patterns showing normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, and special patterns indicating temporary stop are temporarily stopped in the inner decorative pattern display area 5C. ) also, as a flash effect at the time of the late winning, output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, flashing of the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning with the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image display device 5 is executed to display the silhouette image 135SG005S.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-61 (Y) and 10-51 (Z), when the variable display in which the normal reach is lost in response to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect ends, the image display device 5 displays the decorative pattern and the small The pattern 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing portion 135SG is also executed during the pattern fixing period of the variable display that is out of normal reach. That is, as shown in FIGS. 10-61 (Y) and 10-61 (Z), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed while the black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the image display device 5 even during the design determination period. At the same time, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2.

As shown in FIGS. 10-60 (W) and 10-60 (X), during the temporary stop period of the decoration pattern, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are applicable. It emits light in a light emission mode corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, if the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped for the first time in the variable display, it emits light in blue with luminance C2), and the background image is based on the execution of the re-variable display. It returns to the light emission mode according to . Furthermore, during the period in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small symbols 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary suspension. It is possible to recognize that the variable display has not ended yet.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-62(a) and 10-62(b), when the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started, it is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. A pending display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display.

As shown in FIGS. 10-63(c) to 10-67(l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period is continuously executed. Further, during the variable display, the advance notice effect may be executed (see FIGS. 10-63(d) and 10-64(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (FIGS. 10-65(g) to 10-66(j). reference).

As shown in FIGS. 10-65(g) and 10-66(j), during the temporary stop period of the decorative design, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are displayed in the decorative design. (for example, blue with luminance C2 for the first temporary stop, green with luminance C2 for the second temporary stop) according to the temporary stop, and to execute the re-variable display Based on this, the light emission mode returns to the light emission mode corresponding to the background image. Incidentally, although not shown in the characteristic portion 135SG, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed three times during the variable display, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker The lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d emit light in a light emission mode (for example, red with luminance C2) corresponding to the third temporary stop of the decoration pattern, and light emission corresponding to the background image based on the execution of the re-variable display. Back to Aspects.

In particular, even in the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, during the period in which the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 10-66 (j)), as the late winning flash effect, the speakers 8L and 8R emit light. Winning flash effect corresponding sound is output at volume V2, winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes with brightness C2 and period T2, and silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on image display device 5. FIG.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-68 (m) and 10-68 (n), when it comes to the start timing of the ready-to-win effect due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 After 135SG005F is once whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white), the ready-to-win effect is started. In addition, in this characterizing portion 135SG, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

In addition, at the white-out timing, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F blinks with the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image display device 5 The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends.

At the white-out timing, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y finish blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T0. . The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are maintained in an extinguished state during the whiteout period, but emit light in a mode corresponding to the ready-to-win effect from the timing when the whiteout ends. .

Also, during the white-out period, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. In other words, during the whiteout period, neither sound is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and there is no sound. At the same time that the attack lamp 9c and the movable body lamp 9d start emitting light according to the ready-to-win effect (lighting with the brightness C1), the output of the sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect, which is the sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect, starts from the speakers 8L and 8R. . It should be noted that, as the ready-to-win effect corresponding sound in the characteristic portion 135SG, BGM or the like different from the variable display corresponding sound may be output so that the player can recognize that the ready-to-win effect (the ready-to-win effect of super reach) is being executed. Just do it.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in this characteristic portion 135SG, FIGS. As shown in D), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light before the display of the pending display is completed, thereby making it easier for the player to recognize the pending display, which is the target of the winning flash effect. . Furthermore, it has a winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the first light emitting means of the present invention, and a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c and a movable body lamp 9d as the second light emitting means of the present invention. As shown in 10-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at a brightness of C1 and a period of T1 during the execution period of the first winning flash effect, and has a brightness of C2 and a cycle during the second winning flash effect execution period. While flashing at T2, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d flash at the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize winning, and at the time of the second prize winning. During the execution period of the flash effect, it flashes at the brightness C2 and the period T0, so during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, not only the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning but also the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c. The movable body lamp 9d also blinks at the brightness C1 and the period T1, so that the winning flash effect can be made more conspicuous. It's becoming

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, when a new starting prize is generated during variable display, whether or not the flash effect at the time of winning is executed and whether or not the pending display notice effect is executed are targeted for the pending memory based on the start winning. is determined, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be possible to determine whether or not to execute the flash effect at the time of winning and whether or not to execute the pending display notice effect for the reserved storage based on. Specifically, when a new start prize is generated during the variable display, the display pattern α to display pattern γ (of the pending display notice effect) is displayed in the active display area 135SG005A as the specific display start effect A or the specific display start effect B. After executing the appearance animation of the active display of either the display pattern in the case of non-execution or the display pattern in the case of execution of the pending display notice effect), the active display is rotated and displayed as a specific display rotating display effect. is executed, and the winning flash effects (previous winning flash effects and late winning flash effects) are executed based on the start of the variable display based on the start winning.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-15, 10-30(D) to 10-32(H), and 10-49(B) to 10-50(D), the specific display start effect is suspended. 10-15, 10-30 (D) to 10-32 (H), 10-49 (B) to 10- As shown in 50 (D), it is displayed as a pending display and a rotation animation, and as shown in FIGS. Since the spinning animation of the hold display is started, the player's attention to the hold display can be increased.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 (A) to 10-32 (H), when the specific display start effect B is executed, from the timing before the start of display of the pending display, flash effect at the time of winning Since the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d emit light, the winning flash performance can be made more conspicuous. 10-49(A) to 10-50(D), even when the specific display start effect A is executed, the flash effect at the time of winning is started from the timing before the start of display of the pending display. Winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d emit light, so that winning flash performance can be made more conspicuous.

Further, the execution period of the specific display start effect A is 0.2 seconds, and the execution period of the specific display start effect B is 1.2 seconds. As shown in -50 (D), the win-time flash effect is started before the end timing of the specific display start effect A, so the display pattern of the pending display is any one of the display patterns α to γ. Also, since the winning flash performance can be started before the specific display start performance ends, the player can surely recognize the pending display targeted for the winning flash performance.

Also, as shown in Figure 10-28, Figure 10-29 (A), Figure 10-29 (B), Figure 10-49 (A), and Figure 10-49 (B), when winning based on the start winning When it is decided to execute the flash effect, the player turns off the winning flash effect lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d once to turn off the winning flash effect. recognizable.

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, when it is decided to execute the flash effect at the time of winning based on the start winning, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attack lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are once turned off. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when it is determined to execute the winning flash effect based on the start winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame The lamp 9b, the attack lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d emit light at a luminance lower than the previous luminance (for example, if the luminance was C2 until then, C3 is lower than the luminance C2). You can change it. In other words, the ``low luminance state'' in the present invention includes a state in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d emit light with low luminance, and in addition to the state in which they are turned off. It also includes a state in which the light is on (a state in which light is not emitted).

Also, as shown in FIGS. 10-29(A) to 10-48(n) and FIGS. 10-49(A) to 10-68(n), the notice effect is being executed during the variable display. Winning flash effects can be executed depending on whether or not they are being executed, and the speakers 8L and 8R execute the winning flash effects during execution of the variable display, as shown in FIG. 10-29(B). When doing so, the sound corresponding to the variable display is output at the volume V2, while the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at the volume V1 (V1>V2), and when the flash effect at the time of winning is executed during the execution of the notice effect, The sound corresponding to the advance notice performance is output at the volume V2, while the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning is output at the volume V1 (V1>V2). Therefore, even if the sound corresponding to the variable display or the sound corresponding to the notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning can be output so that the player can easily hear the flash effect at the time of winning. By outputting the corresponding sound, the player can easily recognize the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning.

In this feature part 135SG, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output with priority over the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display, and the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is set to volume V1 from the speakers 8L and 8R. , and the sound corresponding to the announcement effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display are output at the volume V2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is the sound corresponding to the announcement effect. As a form of outputting with priority over the sound corresponding to the variable display, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at volume V2, and the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display are output at a volume lower than V2. (For example, volume V3) may be output.

Further, in the present characteristic portion 135SG, an example has been exemplified in which the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output with priority over the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display body, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is not necessary to output the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning with priority over the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display body. Specifically, when the advance notice effect is started during execution of the flash effect at the time of winning (while the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning or the sound corresponding to the variable display is being output from the speakers 8L and 8R), the winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is performed. Output of the sound corresponding to the hour flash effect may be temporarily stopped and only the sound corresponding to the variable display and the sound corresponding to the notice effect may be output, or only one of the sound corresponding to the notice effect and the sound corresponding to the change display may be output. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game due to the player's difficulty in hearing the sound corresponding to the announcement effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display due to the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning.

Also, as shown in Figure 10-28, Figure 10-29 (A) to Figure 10-32 (H), Figure 10-49 (A) to Figure 10-50 (D), at the time of winning according to the start winning When execution of the flash effect is determined, after the winning flash effect corresponding sound is started to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is started and the appearance animation of the pending display is completed. Therefore, by outputting the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R, it is possible to make the player quickly recognize that the occurrence of the start winning and the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning is decided, so that the interest in the game is improved. can.

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, after the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning starts to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, blinking of the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F starts and the appearance animation of the pending display is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is started to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the pending display animation are started. You may do so.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F is blinked at the brightness C1, and during the period of the flash effect at the time of winning, the flash at the time of winning is flashed. By blinking the winning lamp 135SG009F at a brightness C2 (C1>C2), at least the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at a brightness C1 so that the player can recognize the start of the winning flash effect. It is possible to prevent the lamp 135SG009F for flashing at the time of winning from flickering at the brightness C1 even during the execution period of the flashing at the time of winning at the later stage, which hinders other performances and lowers the interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 10-28, in this characterizing section 135SG, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C1 and the cycle T2 as the first winning flash effect, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes as the second winning flash effect. is blinked at a luminance C2 that is lower than the luminance C1 and a period T2 that is longer than the period T1 as a "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis". In other words, the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the late winning flash effect of the characteristic portion 135SG is a low-speed flashing mode with a low degree of emphasis due to the slow flashing speed (long flashing cycle). and a low luminance mode in which the degree of emphasis is low due to the low luminance. Only one of the low-speed flashing mode and the low-brightness mode may be used as the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" of the lamp 135SG009F.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning is the period during which the variable display before the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, and the period during which the flash effect at the time of winning is executed. Since the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and the period T2 throughout the start of the variable display, which is the target of the winning flash effect, the target It becomes easy for the player to recognize that the display is variable, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the image display device 5 displays the effect image 135SG005E during the execution period of the flash effect for the first prize, and the image display device 5 displays the effect image 135SG005E during the execution period of the flash effect for the second prize. By displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S, the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, so that the player can recognize the start of the flash effect at the time of winning. During the execution period of the flash performance at the time of the late prize winning, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 so that the image display device 5 continues to display the effect image 135SG005E, thereby hindering other displays and making the game interesting. decrease can be suppressed.

In particular, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the effect image 135SG005E is brighter than the silhouette image 135SG005S, as shown in FIGS. Since the effect image 135SG005E is displayed in color and the display area of the image display device 5 is wide, the player can effectively recognize the start of the winning flash effect by displaying the effect image 135SG005E.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the first prize, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of the prize is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V1, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the second prize. Then, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8l and 8R at a volume V2 (V1>V2). In this way, by outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect at the volume V1 as the winning flash effect, it becomes possible for the player to easily recognize that the winning flash effect has started. At the same time, during the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning in the latter period, the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning is output at the volume V2, thereby preventing the deterioration of the game interest due to the other performance being hindered by the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning. can be suppressed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, during execution of the flash effect at the time of the latter period, by outputting the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2, other effects are hindered by the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning. Although the mode for suppressing the decline in the interest in the game has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and by not outputting the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning during the execution of the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the other effect at the time of the winning. It is also possible to prevent the loss of interest in the game due to the obstruction by the sound corresponding to the flash effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-29(A) to 10-48(n), during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning, before the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning starts. During the symbol determination period of the variable display, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues blinking, that is, the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol determination command (the determination command reception flag is set) or not, or variable Regardless of whether the display time timer has timed out or not, the player can be controlled to the jackpot game state by continuously executing the blinking of the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F even during the pattern fixing period. can be accurately maintained until the start of the variable display, which is the object of the flash performance at the time of winning, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, as the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are set in accordance with the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term (brightness C1 and cycle T1), and after the end of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning is turned on as the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term according to the flash effect at the time of winning (luminance C2 and cycle T2). ), while the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are caused to emit light in a manner (luminance C2 and period T0) corresponding to the background image, but the present invention has been exemplified. is not limited to this, the effect control CPU 120 clears the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the previous term at the timing when the flash effect at the time of the previous term ends, so that during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the latter term It may be possible to prevent the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d from emitting light in accordance with the previous winning flash effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-3, a small pattern 135SG005M is arranged at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. During the period, the small pattern 135SG005M is displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped, so even if the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to emit light during the pattern fixing period, the small pattern 135SG005M is derived in combination indicating a failure. Since it is displayed, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is during the pattern fixing period.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-33(J) and the like, during execution of the winning flash effect, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, while the small Since the symbol 135SG005M is displayed at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, the overlapping display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the small symbol 135SG005M makes it difficult for the player to recognize the end of the variable display. You can prevent it from slipping.

Further, in this characteristic portion 135SG, it is possible to execute pseudo-continuous effect including temporary stop and re-variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 during variable display, and variable display during execution of flash effect at the time of winning. In the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the special pattern (see FIGS. 10-40 etc.) that stops in the “middle” decorative pattern display area 5C is a silhouette as a flash effect at the time of winning Since the image 135SG005S can be displayed in an overlapping manner, the special pattern is hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S, so that the player can be given unexpectedness and enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-42(a) to 10-47(l), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even in the variable display which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the variable display is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning, and the interest of the variable display, which is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning, can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the variable display that is the object of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at the brightness C2 and the period T2 before the start of the ready-to-win effect. At the start timing, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and as shown in FIG. 10-22, the effect control CPU 120 determines that it is time to start the ready-to-win effect of the variable display of the effect target due to the generation of static electricity or the like. If it is not possible, at the end timing of the variable display (the reception timing of the pattern confirmation command), which is the timing after the start timing of the ready-to-win effect, the flash effect at the time of winning including the flashing of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning again. is ended, it is possible to reduce discomfort when blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect does not end at the start timing of the ready-to-win effect.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-22, when the effect control CPU 120 cannot determine that it is time to start the ready-to-win effect of the variable display of the effect target due to the generation of static electricity, etc., the effect control CPU 120 confirms the pattern. Since the flash effect at the time of winning is ended based on the reception of the command, it is possible to further reduce the sense of incompatibility at the time of ending the emission of the flash effect at the time of winning 135SG009F as the flash effect at the time of winning.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-21, when the start winning to the first start opening occurs during the execution of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win, the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is not decided, so the ready-to-win effect of super ready to reach. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to a decrease in attention to the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-17, in this characteristic portion 135SG, the pending display or active display can be displayed in any one of display patterns α to display patterns γ with different degrees of expectation for big hits. As shown, when it is decided to display the pending display or the active display in the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, the starting entrance lamp 135SG009S flashes the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect or the game effect. Regardless of the light emission mode of the lamps 9 and the like, the light is emitted in a color corresponding to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ from the occurrence of the starting winning to the end of the variable display based on the starting winning. can also be recognized by the light emitting mode (light emitting color) of the starting port lamp 135SG009S, so the amusement of the game can be improved.

The features of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these features, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. be

For example, the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the characterizing part 135SG is executed regardless of whether it is during the pattern fixing period (while the variable display is stopped) or not, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as shown in FIGS. 10-69 to 10-89 as a modified example 135SG-1, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning as the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the silhouette The display of the image 135SG005S and the like may not be executed during the design determination period.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-69 and 10-70 (A), during the execution of the variable display, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of the decoration pattern, and the speakers 8L and 8R , the sound corresponding to the variable display is output at volume V2. In addition, during execution of the variable display, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F is lit, and the game effect lamp 9 flashes at the cycle T0 corresponding to the variable display (Fig. 10-27 (A) to Fig. 10-27 Blinking in the mode shown in (D)) is controlled.

Further, during execution of the variable display, during the execution period of the notice effect, an image corresponding to the effect pattern of the notice effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and the notice effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound corresponding to the production pattern (preliminary production corresponding sound) is output at volume V2. In addition, as the reserved memory, there are three first special figure reserved memories (three reserved indications are displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D).

During such a variable display, if a prize is awarded to the first start port (start prize), and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning based on the start prize, FIG. As shown in 10-69 and FIG. 10-70 (B), the flash effect at the time of winning the previous term is started.

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-69 and 10-70 (B), the flash effect corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to volume V1 (V1>V2). At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are once turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-69, 10-71(C), and 10-71(D), the effect image 135SG005E starts to be displayed around the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5. At the same time, blinking control of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the period T1. Incidentally, in the flashing control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

Further, when the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term is started, as shown in FIGS. An animation is displayed in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F which is controlled to blink, and an animation is displayed in which the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. Then, after the character A has moved to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D, the character A moves to the position where the reserved display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D (in the case of this modification 135SG-1, the fourth An animation that attacks (acts) is displayed.

After the character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the pending display, which is the target of the winning flash effect (previous winning flash effect) being executed, gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the acting position. Appearance animation is displayed (see FIGS. 10-20 (D-1) to 10-20 (D-5)). It should be noted that the suspended display for which the appearance animation in the first suspended storage display area 135SG005D is completed shifts to the rotating display as the specific display rotating display effect like the other suspended displays.

That is, in the present modification 135SG-1, when a start winning occurs during the variable display, and execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined based on the start winning, from the completion of display of the pending display based on the starting win. First, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started. It should be noted that the appearance animation of the reserved display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display start effect B in this modification 135SG-1 is completed during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period (FIGS. 10-73 (G) and 10-73(H)).

When the flash effect at the time of winning the first term ends, the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term starts from the end timing. As the flash effect at the time of winning in the late stage, as shown in FIGS. 10-69, 10-73 (G) and 10-73 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is set to volume V2. At the time of winning, the flash lamp 135SG009F blinks with the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 (cycle T2>cycle T1), and the game effect lamp 9 except the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y blinks with the brightness C2 and the cycle T2. Blinking (blinking in the manner shown in FIGS. 10-27(A) to 10-27(D)), the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5 at regular intervals starts to be displayed.

The blinking of the game effect lamps 9 other than the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y with the brightness C2 and the period T2 is determined by the color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image, If the background image is an evening image, the gradation is performed using a red color, etc.).

The cycle T2, which is the flashing cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-described cycle T1 and shorter than the above-described cycle T0 (length of lamp flashing cycle: T0>T2 >T1). It should be noted that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term.

10-74(I) and 10-74(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is excluded. A silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state in which a black image 135SG005B having transparency is displayed in an overlapping manner over the entirety of one display area 135SG005F.

As shown in FIGS. 10-74 (J), 10-75 (K) and 10-75 (L), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the design determination command, the image display device 5 The symbols 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the outputs of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R are stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-69, 10-76 (M) and 10-76 (N), during the symbol fixing period from the end timing of the variable display to the start timing of the next variable display, the second stage The output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as the winning flash effect and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are stopped, and the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b and the attacker lamp 9c are movable. Only the flashing of the body lamp 9d in accordance with the background image displayed on the image display device 5 continues.

When the symbol fixing period ends, a new variable display is started. At this time, in the image display device 5, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display and is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted rightward by one. Also, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 10-75(K) to 10-82(Z), in the variable display before the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, the speaker 8L as the late winning flash effect, While the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from 8R at volume V2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F with brightness C2 and period T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed, During the design fixing period, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is output at the volume V2 as the flash effect at the time of winning, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning flashes with the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image is displayed. The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the device 5 is never executed.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 10-79 (S) to 10-81 (X), in the variable display in which the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (FIG. 10-81 ( Refer to W) In this variation 135SG-1, decorative patterns showing normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative design display areas 5L and 5R, and a special design that notifies the temporary stop in the middle decorative design display area 5C. is temporarily stopped), as the flash effect for the late winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect for winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is output at a volume V2, the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning a prize flashes with a brightness of C2 and a period of T2, and an image is displayed. Display of silhouette image 135SG005S on device 5 is executed.

In FIG. 10-81(W), during execution of the flash effect at the time of winning, the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped in the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. Although the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F with the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 is not executed, depending on the timing of the temporary stop, even during the temporary stop of the decoration pattern, the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning blinking is executed. That is, in the modification 135SG-1, for the variable display preceding the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash effect is continuously executed during the temporary stop period of the decorative symbols.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-82 (Y) and 10-82 (Z), when the variable display in which the normal reach is lost according to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is completed, the image display device 5 displays the decorative pattern and the small display. The symbols 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the outputs of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R are stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period of the characterizing portion 135SG is also executed during the pattern fixing period of the variable display that is out of normal reach. That is, as shown in FIGS. 10-82 (Y) and 10-82 (Z), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed while the black image 135SG005B is overlapped on the image display device 5 even during the design determination period. At the same time, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2.

Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 10-81 (W) and 10-81 (X), while the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small symbols 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary stop. Therefore, the player can recognize that the variable display is not finished yet by visually recognizing the variable display of the small pattern 135SG005M.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-83(a) and 10-83(b), when the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started, it is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. A suspended display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display.

As shown in FIGS. 10-84(c) to 10-88(l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the later period is continuously executed. Also, during the variable display, the advance notice effect may be executed (see FIGS. 10-84(d) and 10-85(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (FIGS. 10-86(g) to 10-87(j). reference).

In particular, even in the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, during the period when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 10-87 (j)), as the late winning flash effect, the speakers 8L and 8R are displayed. Output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2, blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning with brightness C2 and period T2, and display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are executed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-89 (m) and 10-89 (n), when it is time to start the ready-to-win effect due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 After 135SG005F is once whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white), the ready-to-win effect is started. It should be noted that, in this modified example 135SG-1, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

In addition, at the white-out timing, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect at the time of the late winning, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning blinks with the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image display device 5 The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends. On the other hand, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 and the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 except the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the brightness C2 and the period T0 are continuously executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-69, when a starting prize is generated during execution of the variable display, and execution of the holding display notice effect is determined based on the starting prize, the start lamp light emission effect is used. From the start winning timing, the starting port lamp 135SG009S changes color according to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect (for example, if the display pattern of the pending display is the display pattern β, it is blue, and the display pattern of the pending display is the display pattern γ). red) to start emitting light.

The light emission of the starting entrance lamp 135SG009S is an effect that is executed completely independently of the flash effect at the time of winning described above. Light emission in a color corresponding to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect is continued until the target variable display of the start lamp light emission effect (the target variable display of the flash effect at the time of winning) ends from the time of winning.

As described above, in the modification 135SG-1, when the winning flash effect is started based on the start winning, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is stopped as the late winning flash effect during the symbol fixing period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the variable display is being executed by continuously turning on the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the late winning flash effect during the pattern fixing period. ing. Furthermore, during the temporary stop period of the variable display decoration pattern which is the target of the winning flash effect and the temporary stop period of the variable display decorative pattern which is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is provided. By continuing the blinking of the brightness C2 and the period T2, it is possible to prevent the game from erroneously recognizing that the variable display has ended even though the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped.

In this modified example 135SG-1, during the pattern fixing period during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output, the flash effect at the time of winning of the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning 135SG009F, the flash effect at the time of winning, and the silhouette Although the form of stopping the display of the image 135SG005S is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the player is executing the variable display during the symbol fixing period during the execution period of the flash effect for the late winning. If it is possible to prevent misunderstanding that it is, any one of the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the lighting of the flash effect at the time of winning of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S Or you may make it perform only two.

Further, in this modification 135SG-1, during the period during which the flash effect for the late winning is executed, the sound corresponding to the flash effect for the winning is output as the flash effect for the late winning, the lighting of the flash lamp 135SG009F for the winning, and the silhouette. Although the embodiment in which the image 135SG005S is not displayed is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning flash as the late winning flash effect is executed during the symbol fixing period during the execution period of the late winning flash effect. As a form of not executing the output of the sound corresponding to the effect, the light emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S, etc., for example, the effect control CPU 120 receives the pattern confirmation command during execution of the late winning flash effect. Based on this, by clearing the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning, during the pattern fixing period, the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning as the flash performance at the time of winning is output, the lamp 135SG009F for the flash at the time of winning is emitted, The silhouette image 135SG005S may not be displayed.

In this case, the effect control CP 120, based on the reception of the first variable display start command, again selects the flash effect process table for the late winning and resets and starts the process timer for the flash effect for the late winning. By doing so, the late winning flash effect (output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect, emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and display of the silhouette image 135SG005S) may be started in response to the start of the new variable display.

In addition, as a form in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the late winning flash effect is not executed during the pattern fixing period during the execution period of the late winning flash effect, for example, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to perform the late winning flash effect. Based on the reception of the pattern confirmation command during execution of the performance, the lighting control data corresponding to the process data of the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning is not sent to the lamp control board 14, but the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F. Lighting control data for maintaining light-off (for example, "0:0:0" indicating light-off as RGB values of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F) may be continuously output until a variable display start command is received. .

In addition, if the late winning flash effect is not executed during the pattern fixing period, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect will be output again from the start timing of the new variable display, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the silhouette image will be performed. The display of 135SG005S may be re-executed from the beginning of each cycle (see FIG. 10-69), or from the start timing of the new variable display, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the lighting of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S may be restarted from the middle of each cycle.

In addition, in this variation 135SG-1, if the variable display ends during the execution of the flash effect for the late winning, during the pattern fixing period of the variable display, the flash effect for the late winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is displayed. While the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning and the display of the silhouette image 235SG005S are stopped, according to the background image displayed on the image display device 5 of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d However, the present invention is not limited to this. Blinking may also stop. In particular, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d stop blinking during the design confirmation period. The body lamp 9d may be turned off, or the in-lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d may be turned off in a certain color (for example, the background displayed on the image display device 5) during the design fixing period. The color corresponding to the image) may be maintained in a continuously lit state.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, as an explanation of FIG. 10-8, it was described that a plurality of ready-to-reach effects may be provided as a ready-to-reach effect of super reach. is provided, the hit expectations are different between the reach effects of a plurality of super reach (for example, as the reach effects of super reach, the reach effect of super reach α and the reach effect of the super reach α). A reach effect with a high super reach β may be provided).

In particular, in this way, when it is possible to execute a plurality of super reach performances with different jackpot expectations, as shown in FIGS. , the movable body 32 can be moved between a retracted position (for example, a position above the image display device 5) and a production position (for example, a central front position in the front view of the image display device 5), and flash production at the time of winning. If the target variable display is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach α (variable display for executing a reach effect of super reach α), the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 during the variable display is By repeatedly moving the movable body 32 between the retracted position and the retracted position (for example, the intermediate position between the retracted position and the rendering position) during the period when the first display area 135SG005F excluding the first display area 135SG005F is once whited out, the movable body 32 Executes a movable body action suggestive effect that suggests moving to the effect position, and the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach β (Super Reach β reach effect is executed variable display), the first display area 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is temporarily whited out. A movable body motion presentation may be executed to move from the position to the presentation position.

By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the action of the movable body 32 during the whiteout period, and when the movable body 32 moves to the presentation position (when the movable body action presentation is executed). can inform the player that the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win β, which has a higher expectation for big hit than the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win α, will be executed by the movable body operation performance, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

For example, when the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach α, as shown in FIGS. When the variable display is started, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is started. In addition, in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period is continuously executed. Furthermore, during the variable display, there are cases where the advance notice effect is executed (see FIGS. 10-91(B), 10-92(C), and 10-92(D)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (FIGS. 10-93(E) to 10-94(H). reference).

In particular, even in the variable display, which is the object of the winning flash effect, during the period when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 10-94 (H)), as the late winning flash effect, the speakers 8L and 8R are displayed. Winning flash effect corresponding sound is output at volume V2, winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes with brightness C2 and period T2, and silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on image display device 5. FIG.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-95 (I) to 10-96 (L), when the ready-to-win effect starts timing due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area of the image display device 5 excluding the active display area 135SG005A 135SG005F is temporarily whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white). It should be noted that, in this modified example 135SG-2, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

As shown in FIGS. 10-90(A) and FIGS. 10-96(K) to 10-97(N), during the white-out period, at the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 ends. Then, as the movable body motion suggesting effect, the movable body motion suggesting effect is based on the fact that the movable body 32 is repeatedly reciprocated between the retracted position and the suggested position by a drive mechanism (not shown) a predetermined number of times (four reciprocations in this modification 135SG-2). ends, the white-out period also ends. In addition, during the execution period of the movable body motion suggesting effect, the sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggesting effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 instead of the sound corresponding to the variable display. As the sound corresponding to the effect suggesting the action of the movable body, a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "rattling") that enables the player to recognize that the movable body 32 is repeatedly moving between the retracted position and the suggesting position ), etc., should be output.

As shown in FIGS. 10-90(A), 10-98(O) and 10-98(P), from the timing when the movable body motion suggesting effect and the whiteout are completed, the image display device 5 starts superimposing Along with the start of the ready-to-win effect of reach α, lighting of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F starts with the brightness C1 corresponding to the ready-to-win effect. Then, from the speakers 8L and 8R, the output of the ready-to-win effect corresponding sound (BGM or the like different from the variable display corresponding sound) corresponding to the ready-to-win effect of the super reach α is started.

In addition, when the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is the variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach β, as shown in FIGS. When the variable display is started, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is started. In addition, in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period is continuously executed. Furthermore, during the variable display, the advance notice effect may be executed (see FIGS. 10-99(B), 10-100(C), and 10-100(D)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display in the variation pattern of Super Reach, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (FIGS. 10-101(E) to 10-102(H). reference).

In particular, even in the variable display which is the object of the winning flash effect, during the period when the decoration pattern is temporarily stopped (see FIG. 10-102 (H)), as the late winning flash effect, the speakers 8L and 8R are displayed. Output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V2, blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning with brightness C2 and period T2, and display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are executed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-103 (I) to 10-104 (L), when the ready-to-win effect is started due to the progress of the variable display, the first display area of the image display device 5 excluding the active display area 135SG005A 135SG005F is temporarily whited out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white). It should be noted that, in this modified example 135SG-2, the first display area 135SG005F is whited out, suggesting that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed thereafter.

As shown in FIGS. 10-90 (B) and FIGS. 10-104 (K) to 10-105 (N), during the white-out period, at the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 ends. Then, as the movable body motion suggesting effect, the movable body motion is suggested based on the fact that the movable body 32 is repeatedly reciprocated a predetermined number of times (four reciprocations in this modification 135SG-2) between the retracted position and the suggested position by a drive mechanism (not shown). The performance ends. In addition, during the execution period of the movable body motion suggesting effect, the sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggesting effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 instead of the sound corresponding to the variable display. As the sound corresponding to the effect suggesting the action of the movable body, a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "rattling") that enables the player to recognize that the movable body 32 is repeatedly moving between the retracted position and the suggesting position ), etc., should be output.

After the movable body action suggestive presentation ends, the whiteout period ends and the movable body action presentation is completed, as shown in FIGS. 10-90 (B) and FIGS. , the movable body 32 is moved from the retracted position to the performance position by a drive mechanism (not shown). It should be noted that during the period of the movable body motion presentation, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are set at the brightness C1 according to the movable body motion presentation. Light. Although not shown in FIG. 10-90(B), the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the movable object motion presentation at volume V1 (see FIG. 10-106(P)). As the sound corresponding to the motion of the movable body in the characterizing portion 135SG, a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "boom") that enables the player to recognize that the movable body has moved may be output.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-107(Q), the movable body action rendering ends when the movable body 32 returns from the rendering position to the retracted position. As shown in FIGS. 10-90(B), 10-107(Q) and 10-107(R), from the timing when the movable body motion effect and the whiteout are completed, the image display device 5 starts super reach. At the same time that the ready-to-win effect of β is started, lighting of the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F with the luminance C1 corresponding to the ready-to-win effect is started. , the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting a ready-to-win effect corresponding sound corresponding to the ready-to-win effect of the super reach [beta]. As the reach effect corresponding sound corresponding to the reach effect of super reach β, a variable display corresponding sound and the reach effect of super reach α are used so that the player can recognize that the reach effect of super reach β is being executed. BGM or the like that is different from the ready-to-win effect corresponding sound corresponding to the effect may be output.

As described above, in the present modification 135SG-2, in the variable display of super ready-to-win, which is the object of the flash effect for winning, the lamp for flash for winning 135SG009F is set to brightness C2 and period T2 before the start of the ready-to-win effect for super ready-to-win. , and from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the super ready-to-win, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit with the brightness C2. Since light is emitted (lighting with luminance C2) in a manner corresponding to the ready-to-win effect instead of blinking at the cycle T2, the game interest of the ready-to-win effect can be improved.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 10-96(K) to 10-98(O) and FIGS. 10-104(K) to 10-106(O), the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white (white out). In addition, during the white-out period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is extinguished, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit at the brightness C2 from the subsequent start timing of the reach performance of the super reach. Since it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the change in the light emission mode of the lamp 135SG009F, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, when the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach β, the movable body motion suggesting effect is executed during the whiteout period, and the movable body motion suggesting effect is executed. Then, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off in accordance with the execution of the movable body motion effect (moving the movable body 32 to the motion effect position). It lights up with the brightness C1 in a corresponding manner. In other words, the light emission mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning lights up at the brightness C1 after turning off due to the execution of the effect suggesting the operation of the movable body. Since this can be prevented, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 135SG, a form in which the dialogue announcement effect can be executed as an announcement effect suggesting that the variable display result will be a big hit during the variable display has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. , As a modification 135SG-3, as the notice effect, in addition to the dialogue notice effect, the image displayed on the image display device 5 changes in stages, and a big hit is expected according to the final number of change steps. A step-up effect with different degrees, a group announcement effect in which a group of characters crosses the image display device 5, or the like may be executed.

In particular, when the step-up effect can be executed as the modification 135SG-3, as shown in FIGS. When the step-up effect is executed during the variable display in which the flash effect is not executed, the timing for displaying the image (step-up image) on the image display device 5 or the timing for changing the image step by step is used for the winning flash. By temporarily lighting the lamp 135SG009F with the brightness C2, the effect of the step-up effect may be enhanced. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-108(B) and FIGS. 10-114(A) to 10-118(F), the step-up effect is executed during the variable display in which the win-time flash effect is being executed. At this time, since the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has already flashed with the brightness C2 and the period T2, the timing for displaying an image (step-up image) on the image display device 5 and the image are changed step by step. The winning flash lamp 135SG009F is not turned on at the timing, that is, during the execution of the winning flash performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is already emitting light in a manner corresponding to the winning flash performance, is turned on according to the step-up performance. You may make it not emit light in the mode.

As described above, in the present modification 135SG-3, when the step-up effect is started in the variable display during the execution of the flash effect for winning, that is, the lamp for flash for winning 135SG009F has the brightness C2 as the flash effect for winning. In addition, when the step-up effect of turning on the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is started in the state of blinking at the period T2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F from starting lighting in a mode corresponding to the step-up effect from inappropriate timing such as the end timing of the win-time flash effect.

Further, in the characterizing part 135SG, the movable body 32 is not operated before the start of the ready-to-win effect of super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. 2, the movable body motion rendering can be executed to move the movable body 32 from the retracted position (eg, the position above the image display device 5) to the rendering position (eg, the center front position in the front view of the image display device 5). By doing so, the player may be notified that the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win will be executed.

In this way, when the movable body action effect can be executed before the reach effect of super reach, as shown in FIGS. When the winning flash effect is executed for the variable display of the super reach, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the lighting mode corresponding to the movable body operation effect. The degree of expectation for a big hit may differ depending on which one of the light emitting modes according to the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win is changed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10-119 (C), when the variable display result of the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is a big hit, at the start of the variable display, 70% of the movable body It is decided to change the light emission mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning a prize from the mode corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning to the light emission mode corresponding to the motion representation of the movable body from the operation performance start timing, and the ready-to-win performance is started at a rate of 30%. From the timing, it is determined to change the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the ready-to-win effect. Then, if the variable display result of the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is a failure, at the start of the variable display, the lamp for flash at the time of winning 135SG009F is displayed at a rate of 30% from the start timing of the movable body operation effect. It is decided to change the light emission mode from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the movable body motion effect, and the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed at a rate of 70% from the ready-to-win effect start timing. is changed from a mode corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning to a light emission mode corresponding to the ready-to-win performance.

In addition, if it is decided to change the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the lighting mode corresponding to the movable body operation effect or the light emitting mode corresponding to the ready-to-win effect, the decision is made. and control the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer according to the progress of the variable display.

As described above, in the present modification 135SG-4, depending on the timing of ending the lighting mode corresponding to the winning flash effect of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the execution period of the movable body motion effect is Since it may be during the execution period of ready-to-win performance, the game determines whether the end timing of the flash performance at the time of winning is during the execution period of moving body action performance or during the execution period of super-ready-to-win performance. easy for people to recognize. In particular, as shown in FIG. 10-119(C), the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode according to the winning flash effect to the start timing of the movable body motion effect according to the movable body motion effect. Since the degree of expectation for a big hit is different between the case of using the lighting mode and the case of using the lighting mode according to the ready-to-win performance from the start timing of the ready-to-win performance, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the end timing of the flash performance at the time of winning. It is possible to improve the amusement interest of the game.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-4, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect ends (the light emitting mode changes to the light emitting mode according to the movable body operation effect or the ready-to-win effect) timing. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and according to the timing at which the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect ends, the pachinko game The setting value set in the machine 1 may be suggested. By doing so, it is also possible to draw the player's attention to the end timing of the flash effect at the time of winning, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-4, the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F emits light either at the start of the movable body action effect during the variable display that is the object of the win-time flash effect or at the start of the ready-to-win effect of super reach. The mode can be changed, and the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be changed from the lighting mode according to the winning flash effect to the lighting mode according to the movable body motion effect from the start timing of the movable body motion effect. Since the degree of expectation for a big hit differs between the start timing of the ready-to-win performance and the light emission mode corresponding to the ready-to-win performance, the player pays attention to the performance executed at the timing when the light-emitting mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F changes at the time of winning. It is possible to make it possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-4, in the super reach variable display, the movable body action effect can be executed before the start of the super reach reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, before the execution of the movable body motion rendering, a movable body motion suggesting rendering that suggests the execution of the movable body motion rendering may be executed. In this way, when the movable body action suggesting effect can be executed before the execution of the movable body action effect, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the lighting mode according to the winning flash effect to the movable body motion suggesting effect. A case is provided in which the light emission mode is changed from the start timing of the performance to the light emission mode corresponding to the motion suggestive performance of the movable body, and the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning to the motion suggestive performance of the movable body motion. The degree of expectation for a big hit may be different between the case of setting the light emission mode according to the movable body operation suggesting performance from the start timing and the case of setting the light emission mode according to the ready-to-win performance from the start timing of the ready-to-win performance. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect executed when the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F changes, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in this modification 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission corresponding to the movable body motion suggesting effect from the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect. A mode is exemplified in which the degree of expectation for a big hit is different between the case of the mode and the case of the light emission mode according to the ready-to-win effect from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the prize is won. The light emission (blinking) of the hour flash lamp 135SG009F is terminated at the start timing of the movable body operation suggestive presentation and at the start timing of the ready-to-win presentation, and at which timing the light emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of prize winning is provided. The degree of expectation for a big hit may differ depending on whether the game ends with . In this way, even if a plurality of timings are provided for stopping the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect during the variable display of 1, the effect control CPU 120 may not flash the winning flash due to the generation of static electricity or the like. If the flashing of the flashing lamp 135SG009F cannot be stopped, the late winning including the flashing of the flashing lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning again at the end timing of the variable display (the timing of receiving the pattern confirmation command), which is the timing after these timings It suffices to end the time flash effect.

By doing so, even if the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect cannot be finished at the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting effect or the start timing of the ready-to-win effect, the winning flash effect can be performed. At the end timing of the target variable display, the late winning flash effect including blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be ended.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, as the display patterns of the specific display (holding display and active display), the display pattern α having the lowest big-hit expectation is a white circle, and the big-hit expectation is higher than the display pattern α and is blue. and a red circular display pattern γ with a higher expectation of a big hit than the display pattern β, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific display As the display pattern, a display pattern other than these display patterns α to γ may be provided.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-120 as modification 135SG-5, as the display pattern of the specific display, in addition to the above-described display pattern α to display pattern γ, either display as pending display or active display (Expectation of change to display pattern β or display pattern γ: low) Display pattern δ, which is a round shape with flashing white, can be changed to display pattern β or display pattern γ at the timing of is more likely than display pattern δ to change to display pattern β or display pattern γ at any time during the display of a specific character-shaped circle display pattern ε may be provided.

That is, as the display patterns of the pending display and the active display in the modification 135SG-5, for the display pattern α to the display pattern γ, the display pattern γ (red display) has the highest expectation for a big hit, and the display pattern α (white display ) is set to have the lowest jackpot expectation. On the other hand, regarding the degree of expectation for the big win of the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε when the display pattern β and the display pattern γ do not change, the degree of expectation for the big win may be set lower than that of the display pattern α. The degree of expectation for a big hit may also be set to be high and low for the display pattern β.

Further, in the modification 135SG-5, the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε that can change to the display pattern β and the display pattern γ are provided as the pending display and the active display pattern, but the present invention is limited to this. The display pattern α may be changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ at a lower rate than the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε. Furthermore, the suspended display and active display of the display pattern β may also be changed to the display pattern γ.

Further, in the characterizing section 135SG, whether or not execution of the pending display notice effect (display pattern β or display pattern β of the pending display or the active display) and the display pattern are determined as determination of execution of the winning flash effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. may decide.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10-120 as the above-mentioned modification 135SG-5, when it is decided to execute the flash effect at the time of winning based on the time of starting winning, the display mode of the pending display or active display based on the starting winning , the display pattern ε is determined at the highest rate, the display pattern δ is determined at a rate lower than the display pattern ε, the display pattern γ is determined at a rate lower than the display pattern δ, and the display pattern β is determined from the display pattern γ is determined at the lowest rate, and the display pattern α is determined at the lowest rate. Display pattern α).

As described above, display patterns α to ε are provided as display modes of specific displays (suspended display and active display), and when specific displays are displayed in display pattern δ and display pattern ε, the specific display is displayed. Since the ratio of execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is higher than in the case of display in the pattern β or the display pattern γ, the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning can draw the player's attention to the specific display and the specific display. Since the player can also be made to pay attention to whether the display changes from the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, the display pattern α is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in a white circle, the display pattern β is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in a blue circle, and the display pattern γ is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in a red circle. Since the display pattern and the display pattern δ are display patterns in which the specific display is displayed in a circle that blinks in white, the player can easily identify the difference in the specific display by the display color and blinking mode.

In this modification 135SG-5, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, the display pattern of the specific display is changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern depending on whether or not the flash effect at the time of winning is executed. Although the rate of change to the pattern γ is not described, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, flash effects are displayed at the time of winning. The rate at which the display pattern of the specific display changes to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ may differ depending on whether or not it is executed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the winning flash effect is being executed when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, so that the interest in the game is improved. can.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-5, as a special mode of the specific display in the present invention, the display pattern δ blinking in white was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific display in the present invention. The special mode (display pattern δ) may be a color (for example, purple, black, etc.) other than white, blue, and red, which are the normal mode or special mode of the specific display in the present invention.

Further, in the modification 135SG-5, by displaying the specific display in the display pattern δ, the specific display is exemplified to change to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ. The present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to execute an effect rendering that can change the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ. .

In particular, in the case of action effects, a plurality of effects modes ( For example, a first action effect that can change the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ, and the first effect effect have different effects. A second effect effect that can change the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ at a higher rate than the first effect effect by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ is provided. When the second effect performance is executed, the win-time flash performance may be executed at a higher rate than when the first effect performance is executed.

By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the action effect is executed as the first effect effect or the second effect effect. It is possible to heighten the sense of expectation for execution in the action presentation.

In addition, in the present modification 135SG-5, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern ε, the ratio of execution of the win-time flash effect is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ. is high, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern ε and the flash effect at the time of winning is executed, the change of the display pattern of the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ will cause the player to be dissuaded. Since it is possible to make the player pay attention, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, in the modified example 135SG-5, a display pattern ε for displaying a character is provided as a display pattern of the specific display (suspended display and active display), and an action effect is executed for the character as the specific display. , the display pattern of the specific display can be changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may act on other characters, and as a result of the action, the display pattern of the specific display can be changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-121 (A) and 10-121 (B), when the number of the first special figure pending memory is 3 and the variable display is in progress, the first start opening wins When (start winning) occurs, and the display pattern of the hold display based on the start win is determined as the display pattern ε as a hold display notice effect based on the start win, the fourth display pattern ε of the first hold memory display area 135SG005D is displayed. 10-121(B-1), the active display displayed in the active display area 135SG005A changes to the enemy character.

In this state, the variable display ends and a new variable display starts, that is, as shown in FIGS. 10-122(A) and 10-122(B), the When the friendly character (suspended display of the display pattern ε) moves from the display position of the fourth suspended display to the display position of the third suspended display, the friendly character is displayed in the active display area 135SG005A. act (shoot) against

Next, every time the variable display ends and a new variable display is started, that is, as shown in FIGS. 10-122(C) and 10-122(D), the When the friendly character displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves from the display position of the third reserved display to the display position of the second reserved display, the friendly character displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D In the case of moving from the display position of the display to the display position of the first hold display, the ally character acts (shoots) on the enemy character displayed in the active display area 135SG005A.

Furthermore, when the variable display ends and the variable display which is the target of the pending display notice effect is started, the ally character displayed at the display position of the first pending display in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D is displayed in the active state. It moves to the area 135SG005A, and the ally character directly acts on the enemy character in the active display area 135SG005A (a battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character is executed).

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-123(G) and 10-123(H), when the friendly character wins as a result of the battle effect, the friendly character is displayed in the display pattern β or It changes to the active display of the display pattern γ. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-123(I) and 10-123(J), when the friendly character is defeated as a result of the battle effect, the display pattern of the enemy character or the friendly character is displayed in the active display area 135SG005A. Change to the active display of α.

In this modification 135SG-6, when the pending display is displayed in the display pattern ε, the friendly character as the pending display of the display pattern ε defeats the enemy character in the active display area 135SG005A, thereby causing the active display to occur. Although the display pattern β and display pattern γ can be changed to the active display of the friendly character, the present invention is not limited to this. By defeating the enemy character while the hold display is displayed in the first hold display area 135SG005D, the friend character as the hold display may be changed to the hold display of the display pattern β or the display pattern γ.

Further, when the pending display is displayed by the display pattern ε, the pending display of the display pattern ε is higher in the case where the winning flash effect is executed than in the case where the winning flash effect is not executed. may be changed to the suspended display (or active display) of the display pattern β or the display pattern γ. By doing so, it is possible not only to draw the player's attention to the result of the battle between the ally character and the enemy character as the pending display of the display pattern ε, but also to execute the winning flash effect during the execution of the battle. Since it is possible to attract the player's attention to whether or not the player is present, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, in the modification 135SG-5 and the modification 135SG-6, the display patterns of the pending display and the active display are the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε in the display pattern α to the display pattern γ described in the characteristic portion 135SG. is added, but when the pending display and the active display are displayed in these display patterns δ and ε, it is the same as when the pending display and the active display are displayed in the display patterns α to γ. Then, the specific display start effect A or the specific display start effect B may be executed.

More specifically, when the pending display or the active display is displayed in the display pattern δ, the specific display start effect A (see FIG. 10-19) is executed as in the case of the display pattern α, and the pending display or the active display is displayed. When the display pattern ε is displayed, the specific display start effect B (see FIG. 10-20) or the period when the display of the pending display or the active display is completed is the specific display start as in the case of the display pattern β or the display pattern γ. A specific display start effect longer than the effect A and shorter than the specific display start effect B may be executed. By doing so, when the pending display and the active display are displayed in the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε, similar to the characteristic portion 135SG, the timing before the display of the pending display and the active display is completed. , the winning flash effect sound and the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F are recognized by the player.

In addition, in the characterizing section 135SG, as the prize-winning flash effect, a form in which the prize-winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as a modified example 135SG-7, the display mode of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 may be changed stepwise according to the progress of the winning flash effect.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-124 (A) and 10-124 (B), winning a prize to the first start port during variable display in a state where there are three first special figure pending memories ( start winning) occurs, and execution of the pending display notice effect and the execution of the winning flash effect are determined based on the starting win, as shown in FIG. The performance begins.

First, as shown in FIG. 10-124 (B), as the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is started at a volume V1 (V1>V2). , the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are turned off once. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-125(C) and 10-125(D), the effect image 135SG005E starts to be displayed from around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5, and the winning flash Flashing control of the control lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the period T1. In addition, in the flashing control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

Further, when the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous term is started, as shown in FIGS. An animation is displayed in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F which is controlled to blink, and an animation is displayed in which the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. After the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D, the character A moves to the position where the reserved display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D (in the case of this characteristic part 135SG, the fourth reserved An animation that attacks (acts) against the position where the display is displayed is displayed.

After the character A acts on the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the pending display, which is the target of the winning flash effect (previous winning flash effect) being executed, gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the acting position. Appearance animation is displayed (see FIGS. 10-20 (D-1) to 10-20 (D-5)). It should be noted that the suspended display for which the appearance animation in the first suspended storage display area 135SG005D is completed shifts to the rotating display as the specific display rotating display effect like the other suspended displays.

When the flash effect at the time of winning the first term ends, the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term starts from the end timing. As the late winning flash effect, as shown in FIGS. 10-127 (G) and 10-127 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R is started at volume V2. , Blinking at brightness C2 and cycle T2 (cycle T2 > cycle T1) of flash lamp 135SG009F for winning a prize, brightness C2 and blinking at cycle T2 of game effect lamp 9 excluding stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y (Fig. 10- 27(A) to FIG. 10-27(D)), the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F in the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals. be.

The blinking of the game effect lamps 9 other than the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y with the brightness C2 and the period T2 is determined according to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image, gradation in bluish colors, gradation in reddish colors if the background image is an evening image, etc.).

The cycle T2, which is the flashing cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-described cycle T1 and shorter than the above-described cycle T0 (length of lamp flashing cycle: T0>T2 >T1). It should be noted that the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term.

10-128(I) and 10-128(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is excluded. A silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in a state in which a black image 135SG005B having transparency is displayed in an overlapping manner over the entirety of one display area 135SG005F.

As shown in FIGS. 10-128 (J), 10-129 (K) and 10-129 (L), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the design confirmation command, the image display device 5 The symbols 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed in a state where the variable display is stopped), and the outputs of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R are stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of winning in the second period in this modified example 135SG-7 is executed irrespective of whether it is the symbol fixing period or not. That is, as shown in FIG. 10-128(J), the image display device 5 displays the silhouette image 135SG005S in a state where the black image 135SG005B is displayed in an overlapping manner even during the design determination period, and the speakers 8L and 8R output the silhouette image 135SG005S. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at the volume V2.

When the symbol fixing period ends, a new variable display is started. At this time, in the image display device 5, the first reserved display displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D moves to the active display area 135SG005A as the active display and is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted rightward by one. Also, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is started.

In the variable display, as shown in FIGS. 10-129(K) and 10-129(L), the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed together with the black image 135SG005B on the image display device 5 is larger than the previous variable display. may be displayed. By displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S larger than the previous variable display in this manner, the silhouette image is displayed in an overlapping manner in the active display area 135SG005A.

As shown in FIGS. 10-130 (M) and 10-130 (N), when the variable display is completed based on the reception of the design determination command, the combination of the decorative design and the small design 135SG005M in the image display device 5 indicates a failure. Along with the derived display (displayed with the variable display stopped), the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Even during the symbol fixation period, the flash effect at the time of the latter winning is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 10-130(N), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 while the black image 135SG005B is overlapped and displayed even during the pattern confirmation period. In particular, the silhouette image 135SG005S is also displayed overlapping the active display area 135SG005A. Also, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at volume V2 from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this modification 135SG-7, one of two silhouette images 135SG005S having different sizes can be displayed as the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning, and a silhouette of a large size can be displayed. When the image 135SG005S is displayed, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A are overlapped and displayed as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a large size silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed. and the active display area 135SG005A may be displayed in an overlapping manner only when the variable display, which is the target of the winning flash effect, is executed. By doing so, the player can easily recognize the variable display corresponding to the flash effect when winning, and the active display area 135SG005A, that is, the active display corresponding to the flash effect when winning can be hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by imparting surprise to the player.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-7, silhouette images 135SG005S having different sizes can be displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning, and the silhouette images 135SG005S and the silhouette images 135SG005S are active according to the size of the silhouette images 135SG005S to be displayed. Since the overlap mode with the display area 135SG005A is different, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In this modification 135SG-7, depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5, there are cases where the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A overlap and cases where they do not overlap. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the overlapping area between the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A differs depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 (for example, active display A case where only a part of the area 135SG005A overlaps the silhouette image 135SG005S, a case where the entire area of the active display area 135SG005A overlaps the silhouette image 135SG005S, etc.) may be provided.

In addition, in the modification 135SG-7, a case where the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A overlap according to the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 is provided. However, before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is started, it overlaps with the pending display that is the target of the winning flash effect displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D. The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed so as to overlap the active display, which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning displayed in the active display area 135SG005A, during execution of the variable display which is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. A silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed. By doing so, the player can easily recognize the pending display and the active display corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, and not only the pending display but also the active display can be hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S. It is possible to improve the amusement of the game by further imparting unexpectedness to the game.

In addition, in the modification 135SG-7, only one of the suspension display and the active display is hidden by the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S as the flash effect at the time of winning, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a case may be provided in which both the suspension display and the active display are hidden by the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-7, the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning is exemplified in a form in which the silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed in an overlapping manner in the active display area 135SG005A and the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D. It is not limited to this, and in the case where the pseudo-continuous effect is executed in the variable display during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning as illustrated in the characteristic portion 135SG, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the "intermediate ” (see FIGS. 10-40, etc.) displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C, the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning may be displayed in an overlapping manner. In this way, the silhouette image 135SG005S as a winning flash effect hides the special pattern for notifying the temporary stop, so that the player can be given unexpectedness and enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-7, as a re-variable display effect in the present invention, a mode in which the special symbol stops in the "medium" decoration symbol display area 5C was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, as a re-variable display effect, the image display device 5 may display an image different from the special symbol, and the silhouette image 135SG005S as a winning flash effect may be displayed overlapping the image.

Further, in the characterizing section 135SG, when a start winning to the first start opening occurs during the execution of the ready-to-win effect of super reach, execution of the flash effect at the time of winning based on the start winning is not determined (determined to be non-execution). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-8, when a start winning to the first start opening occurs during the execution of the variable display, the variable display is specified, and if the specified period is equal to or less than the execution period of the flash presentation at the time of winning, the execution of the flash presentation at the time of winning is not determined (determined to be non-execution). By doing so, when the remaining period of the variable display is short, such as the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term or less, the flash effect at the time of winning (the flash effect at the time of winning the first term) is executed, whereby the flash at the time of winning is performed. It is possible to prevent the specific display (suspended display or active display) of the object of rendering from becoming difficult to understand.

In this variation 135SG-8, whether or not to execute the winning flash effect is exemplified based on the remaining period of the variable display and the execution period of the previous winning flash effect. is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute the winning flash effect depends on a period other than the remaining variable display period and the execution period of the previous winning flash effect (for example, a period of 5 seconds, 10 seconds, etc.) ) may be used as a reference.

Furthermore, in this modification 135SG-8, when a start winning to the first start opening occurs during the execution of the variable display, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and the specified period is the first winning flash effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specified period is less than or equal to the execution period of the first prize flash effect. In this case, on the condition that the variable display result of the variable display is a loss, the win-time flash effect may be executed from the start timing of the next variable display. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the interest of the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win and the flash performance to win a prize from being lowered due to the redundant execution of the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win and the flash performance to win.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, as the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect, blinking with brightness C1 and cycle T1 (light emission mode in the previous winning flash effect) and brightness C2 and cycle T2. blinking (light emission mode in the flash effect at the time of winning a prize later) and two light emission modes are provided. On the other hand, as the light emission mode of the starter lamp 135SG009S in the light emission effect of the starter lamp, blue light emission with a luminance C2 corresponding to the display pattern β and red light emission with a luminance C2 according to the display pattern γ are combined. is provided. That is, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the number of lighting modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect is the same as the number of lighting modes of the starting lamp 135SG009S in the starting lamp lighting effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-9, the number of lighting modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect and the light emission of the starting lamp 135SG009S in the starting lamp light emitting effect The number of modes may be different.

In particular, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-5, a display pattern δ and a display pattern ε are provided as display patterns for the pending display and the active display, and these display patterns δ are used as the lighting mode of the starting lamp 135SG009S in the lighting performance of the starting lamp. and the display pattern ε, even if the number of light emission modes of the starter lamp 135SG009S in the starter lamp light emission effect is greater than the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect. good. By doing so, the variations in light emission of the starter lamp 135SG009S are increased, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 135SG, the win flash lamp 135SG009F emits light as the win flash effect, and the starting lamp 135SG009S emits light in the start lamp light emitting effect, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as a modified example 135SG-10, the light emitting area in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light as the flash effect at the time of winning may be provided larger than the light emitting area in which the starting lamp 135SG009S emits light as the starting lamp light emitting effect. good.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-28, in the case where execution of both the winning-time flash effect and the hold display notice effect is determined based on the starting winning, the winning-time flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on when the starting winning occurs. After that, it emits light until the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display that is the target of the start winning flash effect, while the starting port lamp 135SG009S emits light until the start timing of the start winning flash effect. Since the light is emitted until the end of the variable display, which is the object of the flash effect, by applying the modification 135SG-10, the light emission corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning by the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be performed for an excessively long time. It is possible to maintain the player's expectation of being controlled to the jackpot game state by the light emitting mode of the starter lamp 135SG009S while preventing the deterioration of the game interest due to the above.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the form in which the starter lamp 135SG009S emits light without blinking as the starter lamp light emission effect was exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the starter lamp is started as the starter lamp light emission effect. The mouth lamp 135SG009S may be blinked. Furthermore, when the starter lamp 135SG009S is flashed as the starter lamp light emission effect in this way, the flashing cycle of the starter lamp 135SG009S is regarded as the flashing cycle (cycle T2) of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect. can be different. By making the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the blinking cycle of the starting lamp 135SG009S different in this way, the player pays attention to both the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the blinking of the starting lamp 135SG009S. It is possible to make it possible to improve the game interest.

Further, in the characteristic portion 135SG, as shown in FIG. 10-28, when executing the winning flash effect, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, etc. are turned off once. Although it is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as modification 135SG-11, in the case of executing the flash effect at the time of winning, the brightness of the backlight or the like built in the image display device 5 is temporarily changed. may be reduced to reduce the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5, and then the winning flash effect may be started. In this way, when the winning flash performance is executed, the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is lowered so that the player can easily recognize the start of the winning flash performance.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-11, the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is reduced by reducing the brightness of the backlight or the like built in the image display device 5, that is, the image display Although the form in which the brightness of the device 5 is changed to change the image display device 5 to the low visibility state in which the visibility is lower than that of the previous state has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image display device 5 is not limited to this. As a form of reducing the visibility of the image displayed on the display device 5, in addition to reducing the luminance (brightness) of the image display device 5, temporarily stopping the display of the image on the image display device 5, The movable body 32 is operated in front of the image display device 5, the image display device 5 itself is repeatedly operated in vertical directions, etc., and the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 is increased to relatively display on the image display device 5. It may be one that lowers the visibility of the image that is displayed.

In other words, the "low visibility state" in the present invention means that if the visibility of the image display device 5 is lower than the previous state, the brightness of the image display device 5 is reduced by a method other than the brightness reduction. Includes images that reduce the visibility of the image.

Further, in the characterizing section 135SG, as shown in FIG. 10-28, when the execution of the winning flash effect is determined according to the start winning, the output of the winning flash effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is started. Although the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking after the win-win flash lamp 135SG009F is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. When the execution is decided, after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the speaker 8L, 8R will output the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect and the animation of the pending display and the active display will be completed. may By doing so, it is possible for the player to quickly recognize that the start winning has occurred by flashing (emission) of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and that the execution of the winning flash effect has been decided. It can improve amusement interest.

In this modified example 135SG-12, after the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the win-win flash effect, and the appearance animation of the pending display and the active display is completed. Although the form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the winning flash effect corresponding sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the hold display and An appearance animation of the active display may be started.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-28, in the characteristic portion 135SG, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V1, and for the flash effect at the time of winning. Flashing of the lamp 135SG009F with the brightness C1 and the period T1, display of the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period, the volume of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning by the speakers 8L and 8R Although the output at V2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are each repeatedly executed, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, as a modified example 135SG-13, even during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the second term, when the variable display targeted for the flash effect at the time of winning is started, it is the same as during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term. , the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning by the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning at the brightness C1 and the period T1, and the display of the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are temporarily executed. You may By doing so, even during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R is output at the volume V1 as in the case of the flash effect at the time of the previous term, and is for the flash at the time of winning. When the lamp 135SG009F blinks with the brightness C1 and the period T1 and the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, the player recognizes that the variable display that is the object of the flash effect at the time of winning is started. Since it can be easily performed, the amusement of the game can be improved.

In this variation 135SG-13, even during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second term, when the variable display for the flash effect at the time of winning is started, the same as during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first term, The speaker 8L, 8R output the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V1, the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning blinks with the brightness C1 and the period T1, and the display of the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 is temporarily executed. Although the form is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display for the flash effect at the time of winning starts during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning at the later stage, the flash effect at the time of winning by the speakers 8L and 8R is started. Only one or only two of the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the volume V1, the blinking of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning with the brightness C1 and the period T1, and the display of the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are executed. You may do so.

In addition, as the pachinko game machine 1 of the present specification, the jackpot probability differs according to the set value (FIGS. 1 to 9), and the pending display notice effect and the flash effect at the time of winning are displayed based on the start winning. It is executable, and the change in the lighting mode as the winning flash effect differs according to the lamp (characteristic portion 135SG, FIGS. 10-1 to 10-68), and the winning flash effect during the fixed period of the variable display pattern (Modification 135SG-1, FIGS. 10-69 to 10-89), capable of executing reach effects of super reach with different expectations of big hits, and moving body operation before reach effects with high expectations of big hits. An effect can be executed, and when the movable body action effect is to be executed, the light emission mode of the win-time flash lamp 135SG009F is changed to a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body action effect from the start timing of the movable body action effect. One (Modification 2, FIGS. 10-90 to 10-107), step-up effect can be executed during variable display, and when step-up effect is executed when winning flash effect is not executed, winning flash effect While the lighting lamp 135SG009F is caused to emit light in a mode corresponding to the step-up performance, when the step-up performance is executed during execution of the winning flash performance, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed to the winning flash performance. (Modification 135SG-3, FIGS. 10-108 to 10-118) that does not change from the light emission mode according to the response, the movable body action effect can be executed before the start of the reach effect of super reach, and the lamp for the flash at the time of winning When the light emission mode of 135SG009F changes from the light emission mode according to the flash effect at the time of winning to the light emission mode according to the movable body motion effect from the start timing of the movable body motion effect, and from the start timing of the ready-to-win effect according to the ready-to-win effect. The degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on whether it changes to the light emitting mode (variant 135SG-4, FIGS. 10-119), and the display pattern α to the display pattern ε are provided as the display modes of the pending display and the active display. Depending on whether the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is determined by winning, the ratio of which display pattern is determined as the display pattern of the pending display or the active display is different (Modification 135SG-5, Fig. 10- 120), when the display pattern ε is determined as the display pattern for the pending display, the display pattern (Modification 135SG-6, FIGS. 10-121 to 10-123), silhouette image displayed on the image display device 5 according to the progress of the flash effect at the time of winning 135SG005S in which the display mode changes (modification 135SG-7, FIGS. 10-124 to 10-130), etc. are disclosed, but the pachinko machine of the present invention has these plural characteristic parts and modifications Any combination of two or more features or variations from the examples may be implemented.

Further, in the characteristic portion 135SG, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as the gaming machine that performs the predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the gaming machine that performs the predetermined game is at least the predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko game machine 1, a slot machine or a general game machine may be used as long as it performs

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiments and other examples of forms described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if changes and additions are made within the scope of the present invention.

Further, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the scope of the claims.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention performs variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and is advantageous when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state (for example, a jackpot game state),
Light emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F);
Display means (for example, image display device 5) capable of displaying specific displays (for example, pending display and active display) corresponding to variable display;
A specific display effect for displaying the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a portion in which a pending display or an active display is displayed in any one of the display patterns α to γ) ) and a specific light emitting effect (for example, flash effect at the time of winning) that causes the light emitting means to emit light, effect executing means (for example, effect control CPU 120)
with
The effect execution means executes the specific light emission effect so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, FIG. 10). -28, Figures 10-29(A) to 10-32(H), Figures 10-49(A) to 10-50(D), before the display of the pending indication is complete The part that lights the flash lamp 135SG009F when winning),
The ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-24, when the winning flash effect is executed) In the case of winning, the proportion of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning),
The light emitting means includes first light emitting means (for example, winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d) and
The first light emitting means has a first period from the start of the specific light emission effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous winning flash effect). A second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, from the start of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize to the start timing of the ready-to-win effect of the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning. period) in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has the brightness C1 and A part that flashes at cycle T1 and flashes at brightness C2 and cycle T2 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of the late winning),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect in the first period, and emits light in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed in the second period (for example, FIG. 10-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d blink at the brightness C1 and the period T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term, and the flash effect at the time of winning the latter term is executed. During the period, the part blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T0),
The specific display effect is performed by an appearance effect unit (for example, FIGS. ~As shown in FIG. 10-50(D), the effect control CPU 120 executes the specific display start effect execution process, and the part where the appearance animation in which the pending display and the active display gradually appear from the bottom to the top is displayed ), and a periodic effect section (for example, FIG. 10-15, FIG. 10-30 (D) to FIG. 10-32 (H), as shown in FIGS. 10-49 (B) to 10-50 (D), the effect control CPU 120 executes the specific display rotation display effect execution processing, so that the pending display and active display is displayed as a rotation animation) and
moreover,
Controllable state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17, step 100IWS166, step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 Part to be executed, as shown in FIG. 12-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and updating means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display (for example, As shown in FIG. 12-13, a portion for executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state control means, the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times It is possible to control to a special state when a special condition is established by this (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, FIG. 12-17 As shown, the part that executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means executes the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. It is characterized by updating the numerical information in each case (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100).
According to this feature, since the light emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, the player can easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the first period of the specific light emission effect. , not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means can emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, so that the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous. This makes it even easier for the player to recognize the specified display. Furthermore, even if the game state changes and any of the identification information is displayed variably, the updating of the numerical information continues, so that the player can be easily rescued and the motivation for playing the game can be enhanced.

In other words, it is possible to make the gaming machine easy for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect by the light emission mode of the light emission means, and the variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information can be performed. Since the numerical information is updated when the variable display of the identification information is executed, for example, the numerical information is updated only when either the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information is executed. Numerical information is more likely to reach the special number of times than in the case of doing so, and the player is more likely to be relieved, so that the player's desire to play can be enhanced. In other words, it is possible to provide a game machine that can enhance the player's willingness to play by making the presentation easy for the player to understand when installed in the game hall.

Also, the light emission mode of the light emitting means and the numerical information may be associated. For example, the light emission mode is made different before and after the numerical information reaches the special number of times. By doing so, the player can grasp the number of times of variable display in an easy-to-understand manner, thereby improving interest.

Furthermore, as another example of a gaming machine capable of improving interest, variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and a specific display result (for example, a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big win game state) when a game is played, and a state control means (for example, a state control means ( For example, as shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 12-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 ), and update means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) based on the execution of the variable display. In addition, the state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of times variable display is executed (for example, , as shown in FIG. 12-13, a portion that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. part), the updating means updates the numerical information between when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13 2, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), a predetermined suggestive effect execution means (for example, FIG. 12- 49, a part that executes step 108IWS811 in the effect control CPU 120) and a special notification effect that notifies that the special state control is started based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, FIG. -The background image changes as shown in -52 (C1) and (C2), blacks out at the start of the fluctuation as shown in Fig. 12-53 (B), and the fluctuation ends as shown in Fig. 12-54 (C) Special notification effect execution means capable of executing blackout etc. and (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-23, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS 638), the predetermined suggestive effect executing means executes the predetermined suggestive effect in the period before the special condition is established. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-44, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A. (See FIG. 12-50) A gaming machine can be mentioned. The form example of this gaming machine will be described below as another form example.

(Other form examples)

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S902). The initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register setting, and setting to make the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S903). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S903; Yes), initialization processing (step S908) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S909). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S903; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), but also the states of backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S904; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S904; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backup data (using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S904; Yes). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S905; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S908) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S905; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S906) to return the internal state of the main substrate 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed-up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S907). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that specifies the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, a predetermined time (for example, 2ms) so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied to the game control microcomputer 100 built-in CTC register setting (step S9011), interrupt is permitted (step S9012 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

Next, the game machine according to Example 1 in the characterizing portion 108IW of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-1 to 12-47.

(board configuration)
FIG. 12-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the characteristic portion 108IW. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 108IW, in addition to the board configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1, as shown in FIG. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 12-1, a right-handed informing LED 100IW20 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. As shown in FIG.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-1, fourth pattern displays 100IW21a and 21b are provided on the left and right sides of the image display device 5, respectively. Of these, the fourth symbol display 100IW21a provided on the left side of the image display device 5 is a display that performs variable display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with variable display of the first special symbol. Also, the fourth symbol display 100IW21b provided on the right side of the image display device 5 is a display that executes the variable display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol. In this example, the fourth pattern display units 100IW21a and 21b are each composed of two vertically arranged LEDs, and by alternately turning on and off these two LEDs, the variable display of the fourth pattern is executed. be.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-1, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this characteristic portion 108IW, instead of the passage gate 41 shown in FIG. A gate 100IW41 is provided. In this characterizing portion 108IW, a normal game is executed based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 100IW41. Therefore, in this characteristic portion 108IW, in the variable probability state and the time saving state, the probability of hitting the normal pattern increases, so it is advantageous to perform the firing operation (right hitting operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. On the other hand, in the present characteristic portion 108IW, in the normal state, it is more advantageous to aim at the left side of the game area and perform the shooting operation (left hitting operation).

(Jackpot probability, time-saving loss probability)
FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the jackpot probability and time-saving loss probability for each set value. Of these, FIG. 12-2 shows the big hit probability and the short-time loss probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Also, FIG. 12-3 shows the big hit probability and the short-time loss probability when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this example, any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) can be set. Setting confirmation processing and setting change processing can be executed to check the current set values and change the set values. Also, as shown in FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3, this example shows a case where the setting can be changed in six stages from setting values "1" to "6". It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to the case where the setting can be changed in 6 steps, and for example, the configuration may be such that the setting can be changed in 2 to 5 steps, or the setting can be changed in 7 or more steps.

As shown in FIGS. 12-2 (A) and 12-3 (A), both when performing the variable display of the first special symbol and when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the non-variable state (low In the probability state (normal state or time saving state), the set value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "205/65536" (approximately 1/319), which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the set value “2”, the set value “3”, the set value “4”, and the set value “5” increase in order, and the set value “6” has the highest hit probability “242/65536”. It is high (approximately 1/270) and is the most advantageous setting for the player.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 12-2 (B) and 12-3 (B), both when performing the variable display of the first special symbol and when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the probability variation state ( In the high probability state), the set value "1" is the lowest (approximately 1/32) jackpot probability of "2050/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. The set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5" increase in order, and the set value "6" has the highest hit probability "2420/65536". It is high (approximately 1/27) and is the most advantageous setting for the player. Also, as shown in FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3, in this example, the probability of a big hit is ten times higher in the variable probability state than in the non-variable probability state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-2, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" (further, whether it is a probability variable state Regardless of whether it is a non-variable state), the time saving probability is constant at “164/65536” (about 1/400). Also, as shown in FIG. 12-3, when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6" (further, whether it is a probability variable state Regardless of whether it is a non-variable state), the time saving probability is constant at “328/65536” (about 1/200). That is, in the present example, the determination value for time saving deviation determination is common regardless of the set value.

Even if the time saving probability is configured to be constant while varying the jackpot probability according to the set value as described above, as shown in FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3, time saving without loss By varying the probabilities between the set values "1" to "6", the number of judgment values for each set value may be matched.

In addition, it may be configured so as to be controllable to a small winning game state. When the configuration is such that the small hit can also be determined, for example, regardless of which of the set values "1" to "6", the small hit probability may be configured to be constant.

In addition, when the small hit is configured to be determinable, it may be configured so that there is a time-saving small hit that is controlled to the time-saving state with the small hit as a trigger.

In addition, the example shown in FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3 is an example, and various aspects can be considered as how to set the big hit probability and the time saving probability. For example, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the time saving probability is about 1/400, and the variation of the second special symbol When executing the display, the time saving probability is about 1/200, but on the contrary, when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the time saving probability is about 1/200, In the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the probability of losing time may be set to about 1/400.

(Jackpot type determination table)
FIG. 12-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. Among them, FIG. 12-4(A) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 12-4(B) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 12-4(A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. This is a table referred to for determining the type of jackpot to be one of "normal jackpot", "probability variable jackpot", or "sudden probability variable jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 12-4 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. This is a table referred to for determining the type of jackpot to be one of "normal jackpot", "probability variable jackpot", or "sudden probability variable jackpot".

"Normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot game state of 15 rounds and shifts to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends. When shifting to the time saving state, the time saving state is maintained until 100 times of variable display is completed or the next big hit occurs.

A "variable probability big hit" is a big win that is controlled to a 15-round big-hit game state and is shifted to a variable-probability state after the big-hit game state ends. When shifting to the variable probability state, the variable probability state is maintained until the variable display of 100 times is completed or the next big hit occurs. In addition, in this example, when controlled to a variable probability state, it is also controlled to a time saving state.

The "suddenly variable probability big hit" is a big win that is controlled to a two-round big win game state and is shifted to a variable probability state after the big win game state is ended. When shifting to the variable probability state, the variable probability state is maintained until the variable display of 100 times is completed or the next big hit occurs. In addition, in this example, when controlled to a variable probability state, it is also controlled to a time saving state.

In this example, in the case of "normal jackpot" and "variable probability jackpot", in each round of 15 rounds during the jackpot game, 29 seconds elapse or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of the game The big winning hole is controlled to be open until the ball wins (therefore, the long-term opening of the big winning hole is performed 15 times). On the other hand, when the "sudden probability variable jackpot" occurs, in each of the two rounds of the jackpot game, the big prize opening is controlled to be open for an extremely short period of 0.5 seconds (therefore, the big prize opening is opened for a short period of time). opening is performed twice). Therefore, in the event of a "suddenly variable probability big hit", it is possible to make it appear as if a sudden transition to a variable probability state has occurred, since it is virtually impossible to expect a prize to be won in the big winning slot.

As shown in FIG. 12-4(A), in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and a big hit is achieved, the probability of the "normal big hit" is determined at 40%, and the probability of the hit is 40%. It is determined as a "variable probability big hit" with a probability, and determined as a "sudden variable probability big hit" with a probability of 20%. Further, as shown in FIG. 12-4(B), in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a big win is achieved, it is determined as a "normal big win" with a probability of 40%. A probability of 5% is determined as a "variable probability big hit", and a probability of 5% is determined as a "suddenly variable probability big hit".

(Time saving type judgment table)
FIG. 12-5 is an explanatory diagram showing a time saving type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. Among them, FIG. 12-5(A) shows a specific example of the time reduction type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 12-5(B) shows a specific example of the time reduction type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 12-5 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a time-saving lost symbol. , the table referred to for determining the time saving type to be either “time saving A”, “working time saving B”, or “working time saving C”.

As shown in FIG. 12-5 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on a random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a time-saving lost symbol. , the table referred to for determining the time saving type to be either “time saving A”, “working time saving B”, or “working time saving C”.

As shown in FIGS. 12-5 (A) and (B), in this example, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the time saving is lost, and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the time saving In any case of loss, with a probability of 1/3 it is determined to be "time saving A", with a probability of 1/3 it is decided to be "time saving B", and with a probability of 1/3 "time saving C" is determined.

In addition, the example shown in FIG. 12-5 is an example, and various aspects can be considered as a method of determining the time saving type. For example, if it is determined that the time saving is lost in the variable display of the first special symbol, the probability of "time saving C" is increased, while if it is determined that the time saving is lost in the variable display of the second special symbol, "time saving The determination ratio of the time reduction type may be made different between the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol, such as by increasing the determination probability of "loss A".

In addition, for example, if it is configured to be able to determine the time saving loss even during the time saving state via the relief time saving, it may be configured not to uniformly overwrite the time saving counter or the like even if the time saving loss occurs, or the time saving loss pattern It may be configured so that there are cases where the time saving number counter and the like are overwritten and cases where they are not overwritten depending on the type.

FIG. 12-6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the time saving type. As shown in FIG. 12-6, in this example, in the normal state, when it becomes "time saving A", it is controlled to the time saving state of 100 times, and when it becomes "time saving B", the time saving number 50 It is controlled to the time saving state of times, and when it becomes "time saving deviation C", it is controlled to the time saving state of 30 times of the number of time saving. Also, in the time saving state, when it becomes "time saving A", it is controlled to the time saving state until the next big hit, and when it becomes "time saving B", it is controlled to the time saving state with the number of times of 200 times, "time saving is off" C”, it is controlled to the time saving state of 100 time saving times. In addition, in the normal state and the time saving state, when it becomes relief time saving, it is controlled to the time saving state of 800 times of the number of times of time saving.

In addition, in this example, as will be described later, there is no case where it is determined that the time saving is off during the variable probability state. Further, in this example, as will be described later, there is no case where it is determined that the time saving is off even in the time saving state due to the relief time saving. In addition, in this example, as will be described later, after being controlled to the time saving state of 800 times of time saving by relief time saving, if no big hit occurs even after 800 times of fluctuation display is completed, relief time saving is performed again. It is controlled to the time saving state (relief time saving) of 800 time saving times. Therefore, the number of times of time saving by relief time saving is substantially until the next big hit occurs.

Here, the relief time reduction arrival rate for each set value will be described. Relief time saving arrival rate is the rate of being controlled to the time saving state via the relief time saving. Since the time saving state via the relief time saving is controlled by changing n times (800 times in this example) without being controlled to the jackpot game state, the relief time saving arrival rate K is as follows. It can be calculated as follows.
K=(1−ML)n={(P−1)÷P}n
(K = reduction time arrival rate, P = denominator of jackpot probability ML, n = number of operations)

Specifically, for example, if the setting value is "1", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/319, so the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 8.1%, and if the setting value is "2", the jackpot probability ML is Since it is about 1/310, the relief time-saving arrival rate K is 7.5%, and if the set value is "3", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/300, so the relief time-saving arrival rate K is 6.9%. If the set value is "4", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/290, so the relief short-time arrival rate K is 6.3%, and if the set value is "5", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/280. The relief time-saving arrival rate K is 5.7%, and if the set value is "6", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/270, so the relief time-saving arrival rate K is 5.1%.

In this way, the lower the set value of the jackpot probability, the higher the relief time reduction arrival rate. As a result, the player can be rescued even if the set value has a low jackpot probability.

In addition, the method of controlling the number of times of time saving when time saving is lost is not limited to that shown in FIG. 12-6. For example, even if the same time-saving lost symbol is derived and displayed, it may be configured so that it is the same at 100 time-saving times during the normal state and during the time-saving state. Also, for example, even if the same time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times of time saving is controlled to 100 times in the normal state, and the number of times of time saving is controlled to 0 times in the time saving state (that is, It may be configured to fall from the time saving state to the normal state). Various modes are conceivable as a method of controlling the number of times of time saving when such time saving is lost.

(Variation pattern table)
12-7 and 12-8 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the variation pattern table in the characteristic portion 108IW. Among them, FIG. 12-7(A) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table A for big wins. Also, FIG. 12-7(B) shows a specific example of the deviation pattern table B in the normal state. Further, FIG. 12-7(C) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table C for loss during the time saving state controlled via the big hit. In addition, FIG. 12-7 (D) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table D for the loss during the time saving state controlled via the time saving loss.

In addition, FIG. 12-8 (E) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table E for deviation during the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving. Also, FIGS. 12-8(F) and (G) show specific examples of variation pattern tables F and G for deviations within 10 variations immediately before the relief time is shortened. Of these, the variation pattern table F shown in FIG. 12-8 (F) is a variation pattern table for just before the relief time reduction selected when the number of pending memories (for example, the number of total pending memories) is 3 or less. In addition, the variation pattern table F shown in FIG. 12-8 (G) is a variation pattern table immediately before relief time reduction selected when the number of pending memories (eg, the number of total pending memories) is 4 or more.

Also, FIG. 12-8(H) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table H for the loss in the probability variation state. However, in this example, even if the variable probability state or the time saving state, if the number of pending storage is not 1 or more (if there is no pending storage), the variation pattern table B is used to determine the variation pattern.

Further, FIG. 12-8(I) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table I for the deviation of the variation display that shortens the repair time. Further, FIG. 12-8(J) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table J for the big hit of the variation display that shortens the relief time.

As shown in FIG. 12-7 (A), in this example, when a big hit is achieved, the variation patterns are variation pattern PB2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PB2-2 (super reach α), and variation pattern PB2. -3 (super reach β).

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (B), in this example, when there is a deviation in the normal state, the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation), the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach) , variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (C), in this example, if there is a deviation during the time saving state controlled via the big hit, the variation pattern PA1-2 (super shortened variation), variation Pattern PA1-3 (shortened variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (D), in this example, if the deviation occurs during the time reduction state controlled via the time reduction deviation, the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened variation), Variation pattern PA1-3 (shortened variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (E), in this example, if the deviation occurs during the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, the variation pattern PA1-4 (ultra ultra-shortening variation) , variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is determined.

As shown in FIG. 12-7 (C), FIG. 12-7 (D), and FIG. 12-8 (E), in this example, during the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (super shortening fluctuation) and fluctuation Pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation) and fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortened fluctuation) are determined at a high rate, and the average fluctuation time is shorter than in the normal state. Furthermore, even in the same time-saving state, when the time-saving state is controlled via the time-saving deviation, compared to the time-saving state controlled via the jackpot, the selection probability of the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening variation) is 80. %, and the average fluctuation time is short. In addition, during the time-saving state controlled via the relief time-saving, the selection rate of the variation pattern PA1-4 (ultra-ultra-shortening variation) is as high as 99%, and when the time-saving state is controlled via the time-saving loss or the jackpot In comparison, the average fluctuation time is shorter. With such a configuration, when the number of executions of the variation display reaches a predetermined number (900 times in this example) and the relief time is shortened (that is, when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), the variation pattern PA1-4 Due to the (super-ultra-shortened variation), the rate at which the variation display is executed is increased, and the period until the next big win is controlled is shortened, so that the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 12-7 (C), 12-7 (D), and 12-8 (E), in this example, compared to the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultrashortening variation) The selection probability is as high as 80%, and the average fluctuation time is short. In addition, during the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, unlike the time saving state controlled via the time saving loss or via the jackpot, the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β ) and no super-reach is performed. In other words, during the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, unlike the time saving state controlled via the time saving loss or the jackpot, there is no case where the super reach is executed at the time of loss, and the average fluctuation time is shortened there is With such a configuration, when the number of executions of the variable display reaches a predetermined number (900 times in this example) and the relief time is shortened (that is, when the jackpot has not occurred for a long period of time), the super reach is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest. In addition, since the period until the next big hit is controlled is shortened, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of interest. In addition, in this example, in the time saving state controlled via relief time saving, super reach is not executed at the time of deviation, but may be configured to be executed. For example, in the time-saving state controlled via relief time-saving, super reach may be executed at loss at a lower rate than in the time-saving state controlled via time-saving loss or jackpot. With such a configuration, when the number of executions of the variable display reaches a predetermined number (900 times in this example) and the relief time is shortened (that is, when the jackpot has not occurred for a long period of time), the super reach is not lost. Since the ratio of becoming becomes lower, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (F), in this example, if the deviation occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the number of pending memories (for example, the number of total pending memories) is 3 or less. For example, as the variation pattern, either the variation pattern PA1-3 (shortening variation) or the variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach) is determined, and the probability that the variation pattern PA1-3 (shortening variation) is determined is 95%. getting higher. Also, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (G), in this example, if the shift occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the number of pending memories (for example, the number of total pending memories) is 4 or more. For example, as the variation pattern, either the variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation) or the variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach) is determined, and the probability that the variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation) is determined is 95%. getting higher.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-8 (F) and (G), if the deviation occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (Super Reach β) is not determined and Super Reach is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest when super reach variable display is executed in the period immediately before the relief time is shortened but the jackpot is not achieved. Note that even if the deviation occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) may be determined. For example, within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the period before the 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened (that is, the period using the variation pattern table C shown in FIG. 12-7 (C)) At a lower rate, It may be determined to be the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) at the time of loss.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (H), in this example, if there is a deviation during the probability variable state, the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening variation), the variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach ), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

As shown in FIG. 12-8 (H), in this example, in the probability variable state, the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened variation) is determined with a high probability of 90%, and the average variation time is further averaged than in the time-saving state. is getting shorter.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (I), in this example, it is a variation display that shortens the relief time, and if it is lost, the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern PA3-1 (rush failure). be. In other words, the variation pattern PA3-1 (missing in rush) is a variation pattern dedicated to the short-relief time, which is not used for the variable display that does not result in the short-relief time, but is used only in the variable display (missing) that shortens the remedial time. In this example, when the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern PA3-1 (running out), as will be described later, the time-saving rush effect (for example, 12-38 (G), (H)) is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the rescue time is shortened and that control is performed in the time saving state, and to improve the interest when the rescue time is shortened.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (J), in this example, it is a variation display that shortens the relief time, and if the big hit is lost, the variation pattern PA3-2 (rush phantom big hit) is determined as the variation pattern. be done. That is, the variation pattern PA3-2 (rush phantom jackpot) is a variation pattern dedicated to relief time reduction, which is not used for variation display that does not result in relief time reduction, but is used only for relief time reduction variation display (jackpot). In this example, when the variation pattern PA3-2 (rush fake jackpot) is determined, as will be described later, a time-saving rush effect (for example, FIG. 12 -38 (G), (H)) and the production (for example, see FIG. 12-41 (G′)) in a common mode (for example, see FIG. 12-41 (G′)), after which the production for notifying that a big hit will be achieved (for example, FIG. 12-41) (H') reference) is executed. With such a configuration, after the player once recognizes that the rescue time has been shortened, the player is notified of the big win, so that the player can be given unexpectedness and the interest can be improved.

It should be noted that the method of setting the variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 12-7 and 12-8 is an example, and various modes are conceivable. For example, if the time saving is lost during the time saving state and is controlled again to the time saving state, the same as the variation pattern table C for the loss during the time saving state controlled via the big hit shown in FIG. 12-7 (C) A table may be used to determine the variation pattern.

Also, for example, only if the time saving state continues until the next big hit in the case of the time saving loss (in this example, if the time saving loss A occurs during the time saving state), the jackpot shown in FIG. 12-7 (C) A variation pattern may be determined using the same table as the variation pattern table C for deviation during the time saving state controlled by .

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (E), during the time saving state via the relief time saving, the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 of the ultra-super shortened fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is high, and the fluctuation display Since the digestion speed is fast, there are few types of executable notice effects and pre-reading notice effects. For example, when it is in the time saving state via the relief time saving, the effect of displaying the effect image at the end of the display screen of the image display device 5, the effect of lighting the lamp or LED, the predetermined effect sound, and the normal An effect such as outputting a different variable stop sound is executed.

In addition, in this example, the case of providing a variation pattern table E dedicated during the time saving state via the relief time reduction is shown, but the variation pattern table E dedicated during the time reduction state via the relief time reduction is not provided, for example, via the jackpot It may be configured to determine the variation pattern using the variation pattern table C (see FIG. 12-7 (C)) during the time saving state.

In addition, in this example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is 10 times or less, the fluctuation pattern tables F and G (see FIGS. 12-8 (F) and (G)) are shown. , is not limited to such aspects. For example, it may be configured to switch the variation pattern table so that the reach ratio gradually decreases as the number of remaining variations until the relief time is reduced decreases, or the number of divisions such as 100 times or 200 times of remaining variations Only in the case of , the variation pattern table may be switched to suggest the number of remaining variations.

In addition, in this example, the time-saving state via the jackpot, the time-saving state via the loss time-saving, and the time-saving state via the relief time-saving are configured to use different variation pattern tables (that is, the average variation time is different). However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in either case, the same variation pattern table may be used (that is, the average variation time is the same), and the time saving state via the relief time saving is better than the time saving state via the jackpot or the lost time saving. Also, the average fluctuation time may be made longer.

(Production control command)
12-9 and 12-10 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. FIG. In the example shown in FIGS. 12-9 and 12-10, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command that designates the variation pattern of the decorative symbols variably displayed on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols. (fluctuation pattern command). It should be noted that the effect control command specifying the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 120 receives one of the commands 80XX (H), it controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decoration pattern.

Command 9000 (H) is a production control command (display result 1 specification command) (off specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is lost (no time saving). be.

Command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command) (time reduction A designation command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is time saving A. be. Command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command) (time reduction B designation command) that designates the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command as time reduction B. be. Command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command) (time reduction C designation command) that designates the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command as time reduction C. be.

The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (normal jackpot designation command) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the variation pattern command is a normal jackpot. Command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 specification command (probability variation big hit specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a probability variation big hit. Command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 specification command (sudden probability variation big hit specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is suddenly a probability variation big hit. .

Command 95XX (H) is an effect control command (relief time reduction number 1 designation command) that specifies the remaining number of fluctuations (126 times or less) until relief time reduction. In this example, a value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations (126 times or less) until the relief time is reduced is set in the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 1 designation command. For example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 1 time, the command 9501 (H) is transmitted as the relief time reduction number 1 designation command, and if the remaining number of fluctuations is 126 times, A command 957E (H) is transmitted as a relief time reduction number 1 designation command. In this example, if the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 127 times or more, the maximum value of 7F (H) is set to the EXT data, and the relief time reduction number 1 designation command is uniform. command 957F(H) is sent to

Command 96XX (H) is an effect control command (relief time reduction number 2 designation command) that specifies the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times in units of 100) until relief time reduction is achieved. In this example, a value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations (the number of times in units of 100) until the relief time is reduced is set in the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. For example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 100 times, the command 9601 (H) is transmitted as a relief time reduction number 2 designation command, and if the remaining number of fluctuations is 800 times, A command 9608 (H) is transmitted as a relief time reduction number 1 designation command.

Command 97XX (H) is an effect control command (restoration relief time reduction number designation command) that specifies the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times in units of 100) until relief time reduction when power is restored. In this example, when the power is restored, a value corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the command for specifying the number of times of relief time when restoration is performed and transmitted. For example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is reduced at the time of power restoration is 100 times or less, the command 9701 (H) is transmitted as a relief time reduction number designation command at the time of restoration, and the remaining number of fluctuations is 701 times or more. And when it is 800 times or less, a command 9708 (H) is transmitted as a recovery time reduction time number designation command.

In this example, the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened can be specified in units of 126 times, and if the remaining number of times is 127 or more, it can be specified in units of 100 times. Although the case of transmitting to . For example, two commands may be combined and transmitted so that even when the remaining number of times is 127 or more, the commands can be transmitted in units of one.

Command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation A specification command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. Command A001 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation B designation command) capable of specifying that the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. The command A002 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation C designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. be.

The command A100 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation A designation command) capable of specifying the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and specifying that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. The command A101 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation B designation command) capable of specifying that the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped and that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. The command A102 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol determination C designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and that the symbol determination period is 0.5 seconds. be.

Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for designating the start of a big hit game. The command B001 (H) is an effect control command (jackpot end designation command: ending designation command) that designates the end of the jackpot game.

The command B1XX(H) is an effect control command (large winning opening open display command) that designates display during the round during the big win game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. Command B2XX(H) is an effect control command (post-opening big winning opening display command) that designates a post-round display (display of an interval between rounds) during a big win game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (large winning opening designation command) that designates that a game ball has entered a large winning opening.

Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number addition designation command) that designates that the first reserved memory number is increased by one. Command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number addition designation command) that designates that the second reserved memory number is increased by one. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that designates that the first reserved memory number has decreased by one. Command C101 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that designates that the second reserved memory number has decreased by one.

Command E000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state designation command) that designates that the game state is controlled to the normal state. Command E001 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state A designation command) that designates that the game state is controlled to the time saving state at the end of the jackpot game. Command E002 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state B designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time saving state when time saving is lost. Command E003 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state C designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time saving state during relief time saving. Command E004 (H) is an effect control command (variable probability state designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to a variable probability state.

The command E100 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed notification start designation command) that designates the start of the right-handed notification. The command E101 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed notification end designation command) that designates the end of the right-handed notification.

Command F000(H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration specifying command) for designating the start of display of a customer waiting demonstration. The customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, for example, when the reserved memory is not stored (that is, when the total reserved memory number is 0) at the end of the pattern fixing period and the end of the big hit game. Also, the customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted, for example, when the power is turned on (transmitted when either the initialization process or the recovery process is executed). Further, for example, when shifting to a setting change mode for executing setting change processing or a setting confirmation mode for executing setting confirmation processing, a setting value designation command is transmitted after the end of each mode, and then customer waiting demonstration designation is performed. Command is sent. In addition, when the restoration process or the setting confirmation process is executed, the customer A wait demo specification command is sent. As will be described later, when the production control CPU 120 receives the customer waiting demo designation command, when 10 seconds pass without receiving other commands such as the production control command at the time of starting winning, the relief time saving function is A telop display indicating that the device is installed is started (in this example, a lottery determines whether or not to display a telop). Also, when 3 minutes have passed without receiving any other command after receiving the customer waiting demonstration specifying command, the demonstration movie is reproduced.

Command F1XX (H) is an effect control command (set value designation command) that designates the set value that has been set. A value corresponding to the setting value is set to "XX".

The effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. 12-9 and FIG. 12-10, the display state of the image display device 5 is changed, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the sound control board 13. FIG. Incidentally, the effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 12-9 and 12-10 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. For example, a more detailed production control command related to the jackpot game and a production control command indicating a game state (for example, a production control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 .

(Game control main processing)
FIG. 12-11 is a flow chart showing game control main processing in the characterizing section 108IW. In this example, the processes of steps S1-S7, the processes of steps S8-S9, and the processes of steps S10-S12 are the same as those shown in FIG.

In this example, when the effect control command for instructing recovery from the power failure is transmitted in step S7, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the relief time reduction number counter for counting the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction. Control is performed to set a value corresponding to the current relief time reduction counter value and to transmit a restoration time relief time reduction number designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS11). For example, when the current value of the relief time reduction number counter is 100 or less, the CPU 10 performs control to transmit a command 9701 (H) as a restoration time relief time reduction number designation command. Further, for example, when the current value of the relief time reduction number counter is 701 or more and 800 or less, the CPU 10 performs control to transmit a command 9708 (H) as a restoration time relief time reduction number designation command. Therefore, in this example, when the RAM clear processing is not executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the recovery processing is executed, the command for specifying the number of times of recovery time reduction is transmitted, and the remaining time until the current relief time reduction The number of fluctuations is notified. In addition, by executing the variable display based on the suspended memory restored by the recovery process (that is, the suspended memory stored before the power failure), the relief time can be reduced. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player when the power failure occurs in a situation where the pending memory corresponding to the variable display that shortens the relief time is stored before the power failure.

In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which the command for specifying the number of times to shorten the recovery time during recovery is transmitted separately from the command for recovery from a power failure, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the EXT data of the recovery command (for example, power-on designation command) transmitted in step S7 may be configured to set a value corresponding to the remaining number of times until the recovery time is shortened and transmitted.

In addition, when the effect control command for instructing initialization is transmitted in step S9, the CPU 103 sets "800" to the relief time reduction number counter (step 100IWS12). Therefore, in this example, when the RAM clearing process is executed when the game machine is powered on, "800" is set to the relief time saving number counter. That is, in this example, after the RAM clearing process is executed when the power is turned on to the game machine, even if the variation display is executed 800 times, if neither the big hit nor the time-saving deviation occurs, the relief time-saving state occurs. will be controlled by In addition, in this example, it is possible to specify the initial value to be set to the relief time reduction number counter based on the effect control command instructing the initialization transmitted in step S9.

In addition, in this example, when the RAM clearing process is executed at the time of turning on the power to the gaming machine, the relief time reduction counter is set to "800" and initialized. Instead, the configuration may be such that the initial setting of the relief time reduction number counter is not performed when the RAM clear processing is executed. For example, when the RAM clear process is executed, the time saving flags A to C that indicate the time saving state, the time saving counter for counting the number of times the variable display is performed during the time saving state, and the reserved memory are initialized. On the other hand, the value of the relief time reduction number counter may be restored. With such a configuration, the game can be started from the continuation of the value of the relief time reduction number counter of the previous day, so that the investment amount until the relief time reduction can be reduced and the player is not disadvantaged. be able to. In addition, intentional initialization of the relief time reduction counter can be prevented, and the degree of relief for the player can be increased.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, only when the ON of the clear switch is detected (Y in step S3) and the RAM clearing process is executed, the initial setting of the relief time reduction counter is not performed, and the RAM When an abnormality is detected (N in steps S4 and S5) and the RAM clearing process is executed, the initial setting of the relief time reduction number counter may be performed.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIGS. 12-12 and 12-13 are flowcharts showing special symbol normal processing (step S110) in special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending memory number (step 100IWS51). Specifically, the count value of the combined reserved storage number counter for counting the total number of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is confirmed. If the total reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second reserved storage number is 0 (step 100IWS52). Specifically, it confirms whether or not the value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting the second reserved storage number is zero. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). is set with data indicating "second" (step 100IWS53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (that is, if only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special symbol pointer (step 100IWS54).

In this characterizing part 108IW, the processing of steps 100IWS52 to S54 is executed, so that the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed with respect to the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to take precedence over the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

In addition, not limited to the aspect shown in this example, for example, the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display are executed in the order in which the game ball wins the first start winning hole and the second start winning hole It may be configured as

Next, the CPU 103 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 100IWS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random random A numerical value is read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 . In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory number buffer. is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 100IWS56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and each storage area in the first reserved storage number buffer shift the contents of Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", 1 is subtracted from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and the contents of each save area in the second reserved memory number buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102. , is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 Each random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n−1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or 2nd reserved storage number)=1, 2, 3, 4.

Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step 100IWS57). Note that the CPU 103 saves the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 .

Next, the CPU 103 reads out the hit determination random number from the random number buffer area (step 100IWS61), and executes the big hit determination module (step 100IWS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the hit determination random number extracted in the starting prize determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserve memory buffer or the second reserve memory buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3) with a hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining a jackpot if they match. It's a program. That is, it is a program for executing the process of judging a big hit. In this case, if the probability variable flag indicating that the probability variable state is not set (if it is a low probability state), the CPU 103 has a low probability jackpot determination value (FIGS. (A) reference) is used to determine the big hit. In addition, CPU103, if the probability variation flag is set (if the high probability state), using the jackpot determination value for high probability (see FIGS. 12-2 (B) and FIG. 12-3 (B)) Judge the jackpot. The CPU 103 determines that the special symbol will be a big hit when the value of the hit determination random number matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3.

If it is determined to be a big hit (Y of step 100IWS63), the CPU 103 sets a big hit flag indicating a big hit (step 100IWS64). Then, the CPU 103 determines the type (normal big win, variable probability big win, sudden variable probability big win) corresponding to the value of the random number for type determination stored in the random number buffer area as the type of the big win (step 100IWS65). Incidentally, in this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random number extracted in the starting prize determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserve memory buffer or the second reserve memory buffer, and determines the jackpot type. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS84.

On the other hand, if it is not determined to be a big hit (N of step 100IWS63), the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the time saving number counter for counting the number of times the variable display is executed during the time saving state is 0. (step 100IWS66). If the value of the time saving number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the time saving number counter (step 100IWS67), and confirms whether or not the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS68). ). If the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a time saving end flag indicating that the time saving state is ended at the end of fluctuation (step 100IWS69).

In this example, steps 100IWS66 to S69 are executed before the counting process of the number of fluctuations until the relief time saving after step 100IWS70 to perform the subtraction process of the time saving number counter, but such a processing mode not limited to For example, after executing the counting process of the number of fluctuations up to the remedy time saving after step 100IWS70, the time saving number counter subtraction process may be executed. In this case, for example, if it is a variable display that will save time, if the subtraction process is performed after setting "800" in the time saving counter (see step 100IWS172), the value of the time saving counter will be 1 extra. Since it is subtracted, it may be configured to add 1 again to the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction process in the variable display for saving time. Moreover, it may be configured such that "901", which is one more, is set in the time saving number counter in advance.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0 (step 100IWS70). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 100IWS79. If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the relief time reduction number counter value (step 100IWS71). In this example, by executing the process of step 100IWS71, regardless of whether the game state is normal state, time saving state, or probability variable state, the value of the relief time saving number counter is uniformly updated. . Further, in this example, by executing the process of step 100IWS71, regardless of whether the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner or the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. , the value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 127 or more (step 100IWS72). If the value of the relief time-saving counter after subtraction is 126 or less (N of step 100IWS72), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time-saving counter to EXT data, and issues a relief time-saving number 1 designation command. Control for transmission to the effect control CPU 120 is performed (step 100IWS73). For example, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 1, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the command 9501 (H) as the relief time-saving number 1 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 126, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the command 957E(H) as the relief time-saving number 1 designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter after subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS74). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step 100IWS79. If the value of the relief time-saving number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a relief time-saving decision flag indicating control to the time-saving state at the end of fluctuation based on the occurrence of the relief time-saving (step 100IWS75). . Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS84.

On the other hand, if the value of the relief time reduction number counter after subtraction is 127 or more (Y in step 100IWS72), the CPU 103 uniformly sets 7F (H) as the EXT data, command 957F as a relief time reduction number 1 designation command (H) is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS76). Next, the CPU 103 determines that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is in units of 100 times (in this example, 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times). It is checked whether or not it is (step 100IWS77). Whether or not the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time reduction is in units of 100 can be determined by confirming the value of the relief time reduction number counter. If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is in units of 100 times, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction counter to the EXT data, and controls the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Control is performed to transmit the data to the CPU 120 for use (step 100IWS78). For example, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 100, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the command 9601 (H) as the relief time-saving number 2 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time-saving number counter is 800, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 9608 (H) as a relief time-saving number 2 designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS79.

In this example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) counts the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction, and when transmitting the relief time reduction number 1 designation command or the relief time reduction number 2 designation command is shown, but is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 side may be configured to count the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction, and to execute a fan effect, a countdown effect, and an effect effect, which will be described later.

In addition, for example, as will be described later, the number of relief time reduction counters is set (set to "800") at the timing of the relief time reduction, and in a configuration where the relief time reduction can occur continuously, the relief time reduction is performed for the first time. Only when it becomes, it is configured to transmit the command for specifying the number of times of saving time 1 and the command for specifying the number of times of saving time 2, and when the time is reduced after the second time, the command for specifying the number of times of saving time 1 and the number of times of saving time 2 are sent. It may be configured not to.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a time saving flag C indicating a time saving state controlled via relief time saving is set (step 100IWS79). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if it is in the time saving state via relief time saving), the process proceeds to step 100IWS84. In this example, by executing the processing of step 100IWS79, if it is in the time saving state via relief time saving, without performing the time saving loss determination processing after step 100IWS81, it is assumed that there is no time saving loss as it is. It is decided that

In addition, not only during the time saving state through relief time saving, but also during the time saving state through the big win and during the time saving state through the time saving loss, it may be configured not to uniformly determine the time saving state. That is, not only when the time-saving flag C is set, but also when the time-saving flag A and the time-saving flag B are set, the time-saving deviation determination processing after step 100IWS81 is uniformly not performed, and there is no time-saving as it is. may decide to exclude

Conversely, even during the time saving state via relief time saving, it may be configured to be able to determine the time saving deviation by executing the processing after step 100IWS81. In addition, it may be configured such that both relief time saving and time saving deviation may occur in the same variable display. In this case, for example, it may be configured to control to the time saving state with priority on relief time saving, or may be configured to control to the time saving state with priority on time saving deviation.

If the time saving flag C is not set (that is, if it is not a time saving state via relief time saving), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 100IWS80). If the variable probability flag is set (that is, if the variable probability state), the process proceeds to step 100IWS84. In this example, by executing the process of step 100IWS80, if it is in the probability variable state, without performing the time saving loss determination process after step 100IWS81, it is determined to be the loss without time saving as it is. be.

If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probability variation state), the CPU 103 uses the time saving loss determination table for determining whether or not the time saving loss is determined, lottery processing based on the random number for time saving loss determination and determines whether or not it is time-saving (step 100IWS81). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the time saving loss judgment table for the first special symbol is selected, and the time saving loss is determined with a probability of about 1/400. (See Figure 12-2). Also, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", select the time-saving loss determination table for the second special symbol, and decide to make the time-saving loss with a probability of about 1/200 ( (see Figure 12-3).

If it is determined to be time saving (Y in step 100 IWS82), the CPU 103 determines the type (time saving A or time saving) corresponding to the value that matches the type determination random number value stored in the random number buffer area B, time-saving loss C) is determined as the type of time-saving loss (step 100IWS83). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random number extracted in the starting winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first and second reserve storage buffers, and determines the time saving type. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS84.

In addition, in step 100IWS83, time-saving type determination is performed using the random number for type determination common to the random number for type determination used by jackpot type determination of step 100IWS65, and the random number for type determination. Furthermore, when configured to determine a small hit and also to determine a small hit type, a common type determination random number is used in the small hit type determination in addition to the big hit type determination and time saving type determination. It suffices to configure such that the determination process is performed by

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type and the time saving type (step 100IWS84). In this case, for example, when it is determined to be a normal jackpot, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "3", and when it is determined to be a probability variable jackpot, the stop symbol of the special symbol is "7". When it is decided to make a sudden probability variable big hit, the stop pattern of the special pattern is decided to be "9", and when it is decided to be a time-saving loss A, the stop pattern of the special pattern is set to "2". If it is determined to be time-saving deviation B, the stop pattern of the special design is determined to be "4", and if it is determined to be time-saving deviation C, the special symbol to be stopped is determined to be "6". If it is determined to be lost (no time saving), the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "-". Further, the CPU 103 stores the determined special symbol stop symbol in the stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 100IWS85).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 100IWS86).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 12-14 is a flow chart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S111) in the special symbol process process. In the variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step 100IWS1701). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0 (step 100IWS1701A). When the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0 (that is, when it is a variation display that reduces the relief time and results in a big hit), the CPU 103 creates a table for determining the variation pattern in FIG. 12-8 (J ) is selected for the relief time-saving variation big hit variation pattern table J (step 100IWS1701B). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 selects the big hit variation pattern table A shown in FIG. .

If the jackpot flag is not set (that is, if the win is lost), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0 (step 100IWS1702A). When the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 0 (that is, when the variation display is a relief time reduction and is lost), the CPU 103 creates a table for determining the variation pattern in FIG. 12-8 (I ) selects the fluctuation pattern table I for the relief short-time fluctuation loss (step 100IWS 1702B). When the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 10 or less (step 100IWS1703). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 10 or less (that is, if the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 10 times or less), the CPU 103 determines that the value of the total pending storage number counter is 3 or less. Check if it is. It should be noted that, without being limited to the aspect shown in this example, for example, it may be configured to confirm whether or not the values of the first reserved storage number counter and the second reserved storage number counter are 3 or less.

If the value of the total pending storage number counter is 3 or less (Y in step 100IWS1704), the CPU 103 uses the table for determining the variation pattern as the table for the failure immediately before the relief time reduction shown in FIG. 12-8 (F). selects the variation pattern table F (step 100IWS1705). If the value of the total pending storage number counter is 4 or more (N in step 100IWS1704), the CPU 103 uses the table for determining the variation pattern as the failure immediately before the relief time reduction shown in FIG. 12-8 (G). is selected (step 100IWS1706).

If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not less than 10 (N of step 100IWS1703), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the variable probability flag is set (step 100IWS1707). If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if the probability variation state), the CPU 103, as a table for determining the variation pattern, the variation pattern table for deviation during the probability variation state shown in FIG. 12-8 (H) Select H (step 100IWS 1708). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number counter, selects the fluctuation pattern table H on the condition that the value of the total pending storage number counter is 1 or more, and is 0 (that is, if there is no pending storage), the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7(B) is selected.

If the variable probability flag is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag A indicating the time saving state controlled via the big hit is set (step 100IWS1709). If the time saving flag A is set (that is, if the time saving state controlled via the jackpot), the CPU 103 is a table for determining the variation pattern, via the jackpot shown in FIG. 12-7 (C) Select the fluctuation pattern table C for deviation during the controlled time saving state (step 100IWS1710). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number counter, selects the variation pattern table C on the condition that the value of the total pending storage number counter is 1 or more, and selects the value of the total pending storage number counter is 0 (that is, if there is no pending storage), the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7(B) is selected.

If the time saving flag A is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag B indicating the time saving state controlled via the time saving failure is set (step 100IWS1711). If the time saving flag B is set (that is, if it is a time saving state controlled via time saving off), the CPU 103, as a table for determining the variation pattern, the time saving off shown in FIG. 12-7 (D) Select the fluctuation pattern table D for deviation during the time saving state controlled via (step 100IWS1712). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number counter, selects the variation pattern table D on the condition that the value of the total pending storage number counter is 1 or more, and determines the value of the total pending storage number counter. is 0 (that is, if there is no pending storage), the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7(B) is selected.

If the time saving flag B is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag C indicating the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving is set (step 100IWS1713). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving), the CPU 103 uses the relief time saving shown in FIG. 12-8 (E) as a table for determining the variation pattern Select the fluctuation pattern table E for deviation during the time saving state controlled via (step 100IWS1714).

If the time saving flag C is not set (that is, if the normal state), the CPU 103, as a table for determining the variation pattern, the variation pattern for the deviation during the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7 (B) Select table B (step 100IWS 1715).

Next, the CPU 103 is stored in the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 100IWS1701B, S1702, S1702B, S1705, S1706, S1708, S1710, S1712, S1714, S1715 and the first special symbol determination buffer. 12-7 and 12-8 is determined (step 100IWS 1716). In this example, by determining the variation pattern, the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined. After determining the variation time, the variation pattern for which the determined variation time is set may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1717).

Further, when the variation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined in step 100IWS1716, the CPU 103 sets the variation time data indicating the determined variation time to the variation time timer to measure the variation time. (step 100IWS1718), and start the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 100IWS1719). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 100IWS1720).

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 12-15 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation process (step S112) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) first, if not yet transmitted, the decision result of whether or not to hit the big hit, the decision result of the big hit type, and the time saving type Based on the result of determination, control is performed to transmit one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 7 designation command) to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1121).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step 100IWS1122), and when the variable time timer times out (step 100IWS1123), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is determined to be short (step 100IWS1123). 100 IWS 1124). It should be noted that whether or not it is determined to be time-saving can be determined, for example, by confirming the stop symbols of the special symbols stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 100IWS85.

If it is determined to be time-saving, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS1125). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1126).

By executing the process of step 100IWS1125, in this example, when the time-saving lost symbol is derived and displayed, the lighting of the right-handed LED 100IW10 is started at the start of the symbol fixing period.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (step 100IWS1127). If neither the time saving flag A nor the time saving flag B is set (that is, if it is in a normal state), the CPU 103 is a symbol for measuring the fixed display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "20 seconds" is set in the fixed period timer (step 100IWS1128). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1129). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to transmit the first symbol determination A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit the second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS1139.

If the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (that is, if the time saving state), the CPU 103 is a design confirmation period for measuring the fixed display period of the stop design of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "10 seconds" is set in the timer (step 100IWS1130). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1131). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to transmit the first symbol determination B designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In that case, control is performed to transmit the second symbol confirmation B designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS1139.

If it is not determined to be time saving (N of step 100IWS1124), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the relief time saving determination flag is set (step 100IWS1132). If the relief time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS1133). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1134).

In this example, when the relief time is shortened by executing the process of step 100IWS1133, the lighting of the right-handed LED 100IW10 is started at the start of the symbol fixing period.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "20 seconds" to a symbol fixation period timer for measuring the fixation display period of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (step 100IWS1135). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1136). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to transmit the first symbol determination A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit the second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS1139.

If the relief time reduction determination flag is not set (N of step 100IWS1132), the CPU 103 sets the symbol determination period timer for measuring the determination display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol to "0.5 Seconds" is set (step 100IWS1137). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the first symbol determination C designation command or the second symbol determination C designation command that can specify that the symbol determination period is 0.5 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1138). . In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to transmit the first symbol determination C designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit the second symbol confirmation C designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS1139.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (step S113) (step 100IWS1139).

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIGS. 12-16 and 12-17 are flowcharts showing special symbol stop processing (step S113) in special symbol process processing. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol fixing period timer (step 100IWS131), and confirms whether or not the value of the symbol fixing period timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS132). .

If the value of the symbol fixed period timer after the subtraction is not 0 (that is, if the fixed display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not ended yet), the special symbol stop processing is terminated. do. If the value of the symbol fixing period timer after the subtraction is 0 (that is, if the fixed display period of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has ended), the CPU 103 sets the big hit flag. is confirmed (step 100IWS133). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103, if set, counts the probability variation flag, the time saving flag A, the time saving flag B, the time saving flag C, and the number of times of execution of the variable display during the probability changing state. The probability variable number counter and the time saving number counter for counting the number of times the variable display is executed during the time saving state are reset (step 100IWS134).

Next, the CPU 103 sets "800" to the relief time reduction number counter (step 100IWS135). Therefore, in this example, "800" is set to the relief time saving number counter with the big hit as a trigger, and even if the variation display is executed 800 times after the big win game ends, neither the next big win nor the time saving occurs. , it will be a relief time reduction and will be controlled in a time reduction state.

In this example, by executing the processing of step 100 IWS 135, when a big hit is made, the initial setting is shown by setting "800" to the relief time reduction number counter at the start of the fanfare period of the big win. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, "800" may be set in the relief time reduction counter during the round of the jackpot game, and "800" may be set in the relief time reduction counter at the start or end of the ending period of the jackpot game. can be configured to

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS136). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS137).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS138). Next, the CPU 103 sets a pre-opening big winning hole timer for measuring the time before opening the big winning hole (fanfare time) until the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the open state (step 100IWS139). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S144) (step 100IWS140).

If the jackpot flag is not set (N of step 100IWS133), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving end flag is set (step 100IWS141). If the time saving end flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time saving end flag (step 100IWS142). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag C is set (step 100IWS143). If the time saving flag C is set, the CPU 103 sets "800" to the relief time saving frequency counter (step 100IWS144).

In this example, as will be described later, when it becomes relief time saving, it is controlled to the time saving state of 800 times of time saving times (step 100IWS172, S173 reference). By executing the processing of steps 100, IWS143 and S144, in this example, when the time-saving state is controlled with the relief time-saving as a trigger, 800 times of fluctuation display is executed without becoming a big hit or time-saving failure. Triggered by this, "800" is set to the relief time reduction counter. Then, after that, even if the variable display is executed 800 times, if the next big hit or time-saving failure does not occur, the second relief time-saving is performed and the time-saving state is controlled. In this example, the time saving deviation does not occur in the time saving state triggered by the relief time saving, but it may occur and when it occurs, the value of the relief time saving number counter is reset (that is, "800" is set. ).

Next, the CPU 103 resets any of the set time saving flags (one of the time saving flags A to C) and terminates the time saving state (step 100IWS145). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS150.

If the time saving end flag is not set (N of step 100IWS141), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the variable probability counter is 0 (step 100IWS146). If the value of the variable probability counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 100IWS153. If the value of the probability variable number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the probability variable number counter (step 100IWS147), and confirms whether or not the value of the probability variable number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS148). ). If the value of the probability variable number counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 10 resets the probability variable flag and the time saving flag A, and terminates the probability variable state (step 100IWS149). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS150.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to terminate lighting of the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS150). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed notification end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS151). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the normal state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS152). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS153.

In addition, in this example, by executing the processing of steps 100IWS141 to S152, it shows the case where the right-handed notification is terminated while shifting to the normal state at the end of the symbol determination period in the time-saving final variation or the probability variable final variation. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to shift to the normal state at the time of start of fluctuation or at the start of the symbol fixed period in the time saving final fluctuation or the probability variable final fluctuation and end the right hitting notification.

In addition, in this example, although it shows the case where the time saving state ends as well as ending the probability changing state in the probability changing final variation, not only such an aspect, only the probability changing state ends and the time saving state continues may be configured.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is determined to be time saving (step 100IWS153). It should be noted that whether or not it is determined to be time-saving can be determined, for example, by confirming the stop symbols of the special symbols stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 100IWS85.

If it is determined to be out of time saving, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (step 100IWS 154). If neither the time saving flag A nor the time saving flag B is set (that is, if it is in the normal state), the CPU 103 sets "100" to the time saving number counter if the time saving is out of A (step 100 IWS 155 Y) (step 100IWS156). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

If it is not time saving failure A, CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "50" if it is time saving failure B (step 100IWS157) (step 100IWS158). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

If it is not time saving failure B (that is, if it is time saving failure C), the CPU 103 sets the time saving frequency counter to "30" (step 100IWS159). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

If the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (that is, if the time saving state), the CPU 103 resets the value of the time saving number counter to 0 if the time saving deviation A (Y in step 100 IWS 160) ( Step 100 IWS 161). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

If it is not time saving failure A, CPU 103 sets the time saving frequency counter to "200" if it is time saving failure B (step 100IWS162). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

If it is not time saving failure B (that is, if it is time saving failure C), CPU 103 sets "100" to the time saving frequency counter (step 100IWS 164). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS165.

Next, the CPU 103 resets the time saving flag A if it is set (step 100IWS165). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag B to control the time saving state (step 100IWS166).

Next, the CPU 103 sets "800" to the relief time reduction number counter (step 100IWS167). Therefore, in this example, "800" is set to the relief time-saving number counter with the time-saving loss as a trigger, and even if the fluctuation display is performed 800 times after the time-saving loss, neither the next big hit nor the time-saving loss occurs. , it will be a relief time reduction and will be controlled in a time reduction state.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the time saving state B designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS168).

By executing the processing of steps 100IWS166 and S168, in this example, when the time saving lost symbol is derived and displayed, it is controlled to the time saving state at the end of the symbol fixing period, and the time saving state B designation command is issued. By being transmitted, the background image is switched to the background image corresponding to the time saving state via time saving.

If it is not determined to be time saving (N of step 100IWS153), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the relief time saving determination flag is set (step 100IWS170). If the relief time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the relief time reduction determination flag (step 100IWS171), sets the time reduction number counter to "800" (step 100IWS172), and sets the relief time reduction number counter to "800". (step 100IWS172A). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag C to control the time saving state (step 100IWS173). Moreover, CPU103 performs control which transmits the time saving state C designation|designated command to CPU120 for production|presentation control (step 100IWS174).

In this example, it is possible to continuously generate relief time reduction by controlling the time reduction state at the timing of relief time reduction and setting the relief time reduction counter (set "800"). Although it is configured to continue the time saving state until a big hit occurs once the time saving occurs, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, at the timing of the relief time reduction, the relief time reduction number counter is set only by controlling to the time reduction state, and then the relief time reduction number counter is set at the timing of ending the 800-time variable display and controlling to the normal state. (see step 100IWS144).

In addition, in this example, when setting the relief time reduction counter, "800" is set, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is decremented by 1 each time the variable display is performed, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is set to "0". ”, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, when setting the relief time-saving number counter, "0" is set, and the value of the relief time-saving number counter is incremented by 1 each time the variable display is performed, and the value of the relief time-saving number counter becomes "800". It may be constructed so as to generate relief time reduction based on the fact.

In addition, in this example, when the relief time is shortened, a case is shown in which 20 seconds, which is longer than usual, is set as the symbol determination period to secure the effect period such as the mode transition effect, but the image display device is used during the symbol determination period. In 5, the decoration pattern may not be displayed, and only the small pattern may be displayed so that the small pattern is not hidden by the performance accessory or the like.

In addition, in this example, by executing the process of step 100IWS172, it shows the case of setting the same 800 times as the number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction occurs as the time reduction number, but it is limited to such an aspect do not have. For example, at step 100IWS172, a value larger than "800" or a smaller value than "800" may be set to the time saving number counter.

Moreover, in step 100IWS172, the value according to the number of times of a plurality of types of time saving may be set to the time saving number counter. For example, when the first relief time is reduced, the time reduction counter is set to "100", and when the second relief time is reduced, the time reduction counter is set to "800". good too.

Also, for example, it is configured to determine the number of times of working hours reduction by performing a lottery process based on random numbers, and in step 100IWS 172, a value corresponding to the number of times of working hours decided by the lottery process may be set to the number of times of working hours counter. good. In this case, for example, the number of times of time saving may be determined to be 100 times with a probability of 10%, and may be determined to be 800 times with a probability of 90%. In addition, when the number of times of time saving is determined by lottery processing, the number of times of time saving may be determined by using the type determination random number used to determine the jackpot type and time saving type, or the number of times of time saving may be determined using a dedicated random number. You may

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step 100IWS175).

(external output signal)
12-18 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of external output signals output from the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 12-18, in this example, as external output signals, a jackpot 1 signal, a jackpot 2 signal, a jackpot 3 signal, a jackpot 4 signal, and a fluctuation stop signal are output. Among them, the jackpot 1 signal is a signal output to the outside during the jackpot game. Also, the jackpot 2 signal is a signal that is externally output during the jackpot game and during the time saving state. Also, the big hit 3 signal is a signal that is externally output during the time-saving pattern fixing period. In addition, the big hit 4 signal is a signal that is externally output during the pattern confirmation period of the variable display, which is reduced in relief time. Further, the fluctuation stop signal is a signal that is externally output at the start of the symbol fixing period.

In this example, in addition to the case of shifting to the time saving state at the end of the big hit game, there is a case where the time saving loss pattern is derived and displayed, so there is a case where the time saving loss pattern is derived and displayed. 2, external output of two jackpot signals is started at the end of the symbol fixing period. In addition, since it may be shifted to the time saving state even when the relief time is shortened, if the missing symbol of the variable display that will be the relief time shortening is derived and displayed, at the end of the symbol fixing period, the big hit 2 signal External output is started.

It should be noted that the big win 3 signal and the big win 4 signal may be configured to be output not only during the symbol determination period but also during the big win game. In addition, in this example, a case of outputting separate external output signals (3 jackpot signals and 4 jackpot signals) for the case of time saving and the case of relief time saving is shown. may be configured to output

Also, the big win 3 signal and the big win 4 signal may be configured to be output at the timing after the fluctuation stop signal is output during the symbol fixation period.

For example, a variation stop signal may be output at the start of the symbol confirmation period of the lost symbol, and the big hit 3 signals may be output during the symbol confirmation period after outputting the variation stop signal, or a variation display that shortens the relief time. A variation stop signal may be output at the start of the pattern fixing period, and the big win 4 signal may be output during the pattern fixing period after the fluctuation stop signal is output. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the signal from being missed outside when the fluctuation stop signal and the big win 3 signal or the big win 4 signal are output at the same time.

Also, the big hit 3 signal may be configured to be continuously output even during the time saving state via the time saving loss. Also, the jackpot 4 signal may be configured to be continuously output even during the time saving state via the relief time saving. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably determine the type of time saving even during the time saving state.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 12-19 is a flow chart showing the jackpot ending process (step S117) in the special symbol process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step 100IWS531), and when the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step 100IWS535. When the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot flag (step 100IWS532) and performs control to transmit a jackpot end designation command (step 100IWS533). Then, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (jackpot end display time) during which the big win end display is performed on the image display device 5 in the big win end display timer (step 100IWS534), and executes the process. finish.

At step 100IWS535, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the big hit end display timer. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the big win end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the big win end display time has elapsed (step 100IWS536). If it has not passed, the process is terminated.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 100IWS536), the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag A and controls the time saving state (step 100IWS537). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot to be finished this time is a normal jackpot (step 100IWS538). It should be noted that whether or not the game is a normal jackpot can be determined, for example, by confirming the stop symbols of the special symbols stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 100IWS85. If it is a normal jackpot, the CPU 103 sets "100" to the time saving number counter (step 100IWS539). Moreover, CPU103 performs control which transmits the time saving state A specification command to CPU120 for production|presentation control (step 100IWS540).

If it is not a normal jackpot (that is, if it is a variable probability jackpot or a sudden variable probability jackpot), the CPU 103 sets a variable probability flag and controls the variable probability state (step 100IWS541). In addition, the CPU 103 sets "100" to the variable probability counter (step 100IWS542). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit the variable probability state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS543).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step 100IWS544).

(state change)
Next, the state transition in this characterizing portion 108IW will be described. FIG. 12-20 is a state transition diagram for explaining the state transition in this characterizing portion 108IW. As shown in FIG. 12-20, in the normal state, if the probability variation jackpot or the probability variation jackpot suddenly occurs, it is controlled to the probability variation state (step 100 IWS541 ~ S542), and if the normal jackpot hits, the time saving state A ( It is controlled to the time saving state via the jackpot) (see step 100IWS537 to S539). In addition, even if it is lost in the normal state, if the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, it is controlled to the time saving state B (time saving state via time saving loss) (see step 100IWS166). Furthermore, even if it is lost, if the relief time is reduced (after the RAM clear process, after the big hit or time saving loss, the number of fluctuations reaches 800 times without the next big hit or time saving loss) case) is controlled to the time saving state C (time saving state via relief time saving) (see step 100IWS173).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-20, in the variable probability state, if the variable probability big hit or suddenly the variable probability big hit occurs, it is controlled again to the variable probability state (see steps 100IWS541 to S542), and if it becomes a normal jackpot, the time is reduced. It is controlled to state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). On the other hand, in the probability variable state, there is no case where the time saving pattern is derived and displayed (see Y in step 100IWS80), and there is no case of relief time saving. Also, in the variable probability state, when the variable display is completed 100 times without the occurrence of a big hit, the control is made to the normal state (see steps 100IWS146 to S149).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-20, in the time-saving state A, if the probability variable jackpot or suddenly the probability variable jackpot becomes, it is controlled to the probability variable state (see steps 100IWS541 to S542), and when it becomes a normal jackpot again It is controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via the jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). Also, in the time-saving state A, even if it is lost, if the time-saving design is derived and displayed, it is controlled to the time-saving state B (time-saving state via time-saving loss) (see step 100IWS166). Also, in the time-saving state A, when 100 fluctuation displays are completed without the occurrence of a big hit, control is effected to the normal state (see steps 100IWS66-S69, S145). On the other hand, in the time saving state A, there is no case of relief time saving.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-20, in the time saving state B, when the probability variable jackpot or suddenly the probability variable jackpot becomes, it is controlled to the probability variable state (see step 100IWS541 to S542), and when it becomes a normal jackpot, the time saving It is controlled to state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). Also, in the time saving state B, even if it is lost, if the time saving lost symbol is derived and displayed, it is controlled again to the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving loss) (step 100 IWS 166). Also, in the time-saving state A, when 30 times, 50 times, 100 times, or 200 times of variation display is completed without occurrence of a big hit, control is made to the normal state (see steps 100IWS66-S69, S145). However, when the time saving state is shifted to the time saving state B due to the time saving deviation A during the time saving state, the time saving state B is continued until the next big hit occurs (see steps 100IWS160, S161). On the other hand, in the time saving state B, there is no case of relief time saving.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-20, in the time saving state C, if the probability variable jackpot or suddenly the probability variable jackpot becomes, it is controlled to the probability variable state (see steps 100IWS541 to S542), and if it becomes a normal jackpot, the time saving It is controlled to state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). On the other hand, in the time saving state C, there is no case where the time saving symbols are derived and displayed (see Y in step 100IWS79). Also, in the time saving state C, when the variation display of 800 times is completed without the occurrence of a big hit, it is controlled again to the time saving state C (time saving state via relief time saving) (step 100IWS170-S173).

In addition, in this example, when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed in the time saving state A, the case is uniformly shifted to the time saving state B, but it is not limited to such a control mode. For example, the remaining number of times of the current time saving is compared with the number of times of saving time corresponding to the determined type of time saving, and if the remaining number of the current number of times of saving time is larger, the current state of time saving A is continued as it is. may

In addition, in this example, when a normal jackpot occurs in the time saving state B, the case is uniformly shifted to the time saving state A, but it is not limited to such a control mode. For example, compare the remaining number of times of the current time saving and the number of times of saving time corresponding to the normal jackpot (100 times in this example), and if the remaining number of times of the current time saving is larger, continue the current time saving state B as it is It may be configured to

In addition, in this example, there is no case where the time saving pattern is derived and displayed during the time saving state C (see Y in step 100IWS79). , Even in the time saving state C, it may be configured so that it can be determined that the time saving is off.

In addition, in this example, when it is controlled to the variable probability state, the variable probability state is terminated based on the execution of the variable display 100 times, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to determine whether or not to end the variable probability state for each variable display by lottery processing, and to end the variable probability state based on the determination to end the variable probability state.

(Production control main processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 12-21 is a flow chart showing a specific example of the effect control main processing in the characterizing section 108IW. In FIGS. 12-21, the processes of steps S71-S76 are similar to those processes shown in FIG.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes small symbol process processing (step 087IWS701). In this example, by executing the small symbol process processing of step 087IWS701, in the image display device 5, apart from the variable display of the decorative symbols, synchronously with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, In the image display device 5, variable display of small patterns is performed in a form in which the decoration patterns on the left, middle, and right are reduced.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the fourth symbol process (step 100IWS702). In this example, by executing the fourth symbol process in step 100IWS702, the image display device 5 synchronizes with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in addition to the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. In this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the fourth symbol variable display is performed on the fourth symbol display 100IW21a provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Further, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the variable display of the fourth symbol is performed on the fourth symbol display 100IW21b provided on the right side of the image display device 5. FIG.

The processing of step S77 is the same as the processing of step S77 shown in FIG.

When the variable display of the fourth pattern is executed, the two vertically arranged LEDs in the fourth pattern display units 100IW21a and 21b repeat turning on and off alternately, thereby executing the variable display of the fourth pattern. be done.

In addition, when the fluctuation time ends, the stopped design of the fourth design is fixedly displayed at the start of the design fixing period. In this case, when a big win is achieved, the two LEDs arranged above and below as the big win symbols are stopped and displayed in red light. In addition, when the time saving is lost, the two LEDs arranged above and below as the time saving pattern are stopped and displayed in a state of being lit in blue. In addition, when it becomes a loss (no time saving), the two LEDs arranged above and below as a loss symbol (no time saving) are stopped and displayed in an extinguished state.

In addition, the mode of the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is not limited to the mode shown in this example. good too.

In addition, in this example, the case of providing a dedicated pattern as a time-saving loss pattern of the fourth pattern is shown, but not limited to such an aspect, the stop pattern of the fourth pattern in the case of a big hit and in the case of a time-saving loss. may be used as a common pattern.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. 12-22 and 12-23 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S75). The production control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the production control CPU 120 confirms the contents of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first checks whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 100IWS611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter and the read pointer. The case where the two match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the command reception buffer stores the reception command, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 100IWS612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step 100IWS613). The reason for incrementing by 2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read out at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step 100IWS614), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 100IWS615). Then, the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set (step 100IWS616).

If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step 100IWS617), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in the display result designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 100IWS618 ).

The received effect control command is any of the design determination designation commands (first design determination A designation command, first design determination B designation command, first design determination C designation command, second design determination A designation command, second design determination B designation command, second design determination C designation command) (step 100IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 sets a determination command reception flag corresponding to the received design determination designation command (step 100IWS620). For example, when the first symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the first confirmation A command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the first symbol decision B designation command is received, the first decision B command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first symbol confirmation C designation command is received, the first confirmation C command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the second confirmation A command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the second symbol decision B designation command is received, the second decision B command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the second symbol confirmation C designation command is received, the second confirmation C command reception flag is set.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 100IWS621), the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 100IWS622). If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 100IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 100IWS624).

If the received effect control command is a relief time reduction number 1 designation command (step 100IWS625), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command in the relief time reduction number 1 designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 100IWS626).

If the received effect control command is a relief time reduction number 2 designation command (step 100IWS627), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received relief time reduction number 2 designation command in the relief time reduction number 2 designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 100IWS628).

If the received effect control command is a restoration time reduction time number designation command (step 100IWS629), the effect control CPU 120 is based on the received restoration time relief time reduction number designation command, in the image display device 5, until the relief time reduction Control is performed to display the initial outcome according to the number of times (step 100IWS630). For example, if the EXT data of the received restoration time reduction number designation command is "01 (H)" (if the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is 100 times or less), "112" as the initial output is displayed, suggesting that the number of remaining variations until the relief time is shortened is 100 times or less. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received recovery time reduction number designation command is "02 (H)" (if the number of remaining fluctuations until the recovery time reduction is 101 times or more and 200 times or less), the initial "223" is displayed as a result, suggesting that the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened is 101 times or more and 200 times or less. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received restoration time reduction number designation command is "08 (H)" (if the remaining fluctuation number until relief time reduction is 701 times or more and 800 times or less), the initial "889" is displayed as a result, suggesting that the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened is 701 times or more and 800 times or less.

In addition, not only when displaying the initial output that suggests the number of remaining fluctuations at the time of power restoration, for example, in the first fluctuation display after power restoration, the display that suggests the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened , a combination of symbols suggesting the number of remaining fluctuations may be displayed. Also, for example, within 1 to 100 fluctuations after power restoration, display suggesting the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened, or display a combination of symbols suggesting the number of remaining fluctuations. It may be configured such that the suggestive display is performed at a relatively early stage. Also, it may be configured not to suggest the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened by the initial eye (for example, in the configuration of Example 2 described later, until the relief time is shortened by the initial eye) The number of remaining fluctuations may not be suggested).

If the received effect control command is a normal state designation command (step 100IWS631), the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a background image corresponding to the normal state (for example, a blue background image corresponding to the sea mode). (step 100IWS632).

If the received production control command is the time saving state A designation command (step 100IWS633), the production control CPU 120, in the image display device 5, the background image (for example, the sunset A yellow background image corresponding to the mode) is controlled (step 100IWS634).

If the received production control command is the time saving state B designation command (step 100IWS635), the production control CPU 120, in the image display device 5, the background image (for example, A green background image corresponding to the forest mode) is controlled (step 100IWS636).

If the received production control command is a time saving state C designation command (step 100IWS637), the production control CPU 120, in the image display device 5, the background image (for example, Control is performed to switch to an orange background image corresponding to the tangerine field mode (step 100IWS638).

In this example, by executing the processing of steps 100IWS633 to S638, even in the same time-saving state, whether it is the time-saving state via the jackpot, the time-saving state via the time-saving loss, or the time-saving state via the relief time-saving state display different background images depending on the With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the difference in the game state, thereby enhancing the interest of the player.

In addition, not only the aspect shown in this example, regardless of whether the time saving state via the big hit, the time saving state via the time saving loss, or the time saving state via the relief time saving, to display a common background image may be configured. For example, a common background image is displayed in step 100IW634, step 100IWS636, and step 100IWS638, and a common background image is displayed in the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, and the time saving state via the relief time saving. can be configured to

If the received effect control command is a variable probability state designation command (step 100IWS639), the effect control CPU 120, in the image display device 5, the background image corresponding to the variable probability state (for example, the red background image corresponding to the flame mode) (step 100IWS640).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed notification start designation command (step 100IWS641), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to start lighting of the right-handed notification LED 100IW20 (step 100IWS642). In this example, the right-handed notification start designation command is transmitted at the start of the symbol determination period when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed or when the relief time is shortened (see steps 100IWS1126, S1134). , Lighting of the right hitting notification LED 100IW20 is started at the start of the symbol fixing period.

If the received effect control command is a right-handed notification end designation command (step 100IWS643), the effect control CPU 120 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed notification LED 100IW20 (step 100IWS644).

If the received production control command is another command, the production control CPU 120 stores the received production control command and executes processing for setting a flag corresponding to the received production control command (step 100IWS645 ). For example, in the case of receiving a large winning opening winning designation command, a large winning opening winning flag indicating that a large winning opening has been won is set. Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS611.

(Customer waiting demonstration effect control processing)
FIG. 12-24 is a flow chart showing the customer waiting demonstration effect control process. As described above, in this example, at the end of the pattern fixing period and the end of the big hit game, when the pending memory is not stored (that is, when the total pending memory number is 0), the effect control board from the main board 11 12, a customer waiting demonstration specification command is transmitted.

When the customer-waiting demo designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 receives the customer-waiting demo designation command, and when 10 seconds elapse without receiving other commands such as the effect control command at the time of start winning. (Y in step 105IWS250), the telop display execution lottery process is executed (step 105IWS251).

In this example, it is possible to perform a telop display indicating that the relief time saving function is installed during the period in which the variable display is not performed. At step 105 IWS 251, it is determined by lottery whether or not to display a telop.

FIG. 12-25 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of a telop display execution lottery table and a telop mode determination lottery table. 12-25, FIG. 12-25 (A) is a telop display execution lottery table used when the setting value is set to "1", and FIG. This is a telop display execution lottery table used when "6" is set.

As shown in FIGS. 12-25 (A) and (B), in this example, it is configured such that the percentage of telop display during customer waiting differs depending on the remaining number of times until relief time is shortened. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest the remaining number of times until relief time is shortened depending on the presence or absence of a telop display during customer waiting.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 12-25 (A) and (B), in this example, it is configured such that the ratio of telop display during customer waiting differs depending on the set value. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not an advantageous set value is set depending on whether there is a telop display during customer waiting.

12 to 25 show examples of setting value 1 and setting value 6 for simplification of explanation, but a table corresponding to each setting value may be provided, or a plurality of tables may be provided. A table corresponding to the set values (for example, set values 1 to 3) may be provided.

When it is decided to execute the telop display (Y of step 105IWS252), the effect control CPU 120 executes the telop display mode determination lottery process (step 105IWS253). Then, telop display is started (step 105IWS254).

In this example, it is possible to perform telop display with a red rendering mode and a blue rendering mode. At step 105 IWS 253, the effect mode of the telop display is decided by lottery.

FIG. 12-25(C) is a telop mode determination lottery table used when the setting value is set to "1", and FIG. It is a telop mode determination lottery table used when there is.

As shown in FIGS. 12-25 (C) and (D), in this example, the effect mode of the telop display displayed while waiting for customers is configured to differ depending on the remaining number of times until relief time is shortened. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest the remaining number of times until relief time is shortened by the production mode of the telop display during customer waiting.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-25(C) and (D), in this example, the ratio of the effect mode of the telop display displayed while the customer is waiting is configured to differ depending on the set value. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not an advantageous set value is set depending on the effect mode of the telop display during customer waiting.

Then, after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command, when 3 minutes elapse without receiving other commands such as the effect control command at the time of start winning (Y in step 105 IWS 255), the effect control CPU 120 starts the demonstration. The movie is reproduced (step 105IWS256).

It should be noted that the telop display and the reproduction of the demonstration movie while waiting for the customer are terminated when the effect control command or the like at the time of start-up winning is received.

FIG. 12-26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode of telop display. In the example shown in FIG. 12-26, the screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), and (C) or in the order of (A), (D), and (E).

As shown in FIG. 12-26(A), if the reserved memory is not stored when the symbol fixing period has passed, the main board 11 transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation command to the effect control board 12. FIG.

Then, 10 seconds pass without receiving any other command such as the production control command at the time of start winning after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command on the side of the production control board 12, and the telop display of the customer waiting is displayed. When it is decided to carry out, the image display device 5 displays a telop display indicating that the relief time saving function is installed.

At this time, if it is decided to display a telop display in a blue rendering mode, a telop display 108IW001 with a blue border is displayed (in the example of FIG. 12-26(B), the border is white). ). Also, when it is decided to display a telop display in the red effect mode, a telop display 108IW002 with a red border is displayed (in the example of FIG. 12-26(D), a black border is displayed). form).

Then, when 3 minutes have passed without receiving any other command such as the effect control command at the time of start winning after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command on the side of the effect control board 12, the image display device 5 starts the demonstration. A movie is played. Note that, as shown in FIGS. 12-26(C) and (E), the telop display is continuously displayed even during the reproduction of the demonstration movie.

(Prefetching notice setting processing)
FIG. 12-27 is a flow chart showing the advance notice setting process (step S161) in the effect control process shown in FIG.

In this example, in the starting winning determination process (step S101) in the special symbol process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the number of pending memories is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result and a variation pattern is executed. Then, after storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as occurrence of start winning, the number of pending memories, prefetching determination etc. to the effect control board 12 is set. done. The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

In the pre-reading notice setting process (step S161), for example, based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 12-27, the effect control CPU 120 provides a effect control command at the time of starting winning (for example, the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of starting winning, the number of pending memories, and the look-ahead determination ) is received (step 108 IWS 701).

When the effect control command at the time of starting winning is received, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the number of pending memories including the pending memory that newly received the effect control command at the time of starting winning is greater than the remaining number of times until relief time reduction. It is determined whether or not there are many (step 108IWS702). That is, it is determined whether or not the variable display corresponding to the newly stored pending memory due to the occurrence of the start winning is to be executed after the relief time is shortened. And when the number of pending memories is not greater than the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened, that is, when the variable display corresponding to the newly stored pending memory due to the occurrence of the start winning is executed after the relief time is shortened. , the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated.

In this example, by executing the process of step 108IWS702, among the variable display corresponding to the pending memory stored before the relief time reduction, the variable display when the relief time reduction is to be the notice target pre-reading notice effect While it is executable, execution of a look-ahead forewarning effect whose foretelling target is the variable display subsequent to the variable display when the relief time is shortened is restricted. That is, it is configured to limit the execution of the pre-reading announcement effect straddling the relief time reduction in which the game state changes. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complication of the control process, and it is possible to avoid contradiction in the contents of the presentation.

If the number of pending memories is greater than the remaining number of times until the time saving, that is, if the variable display corresponding to the newly stored pending memory due to the occurrence of the start winning is executed before the time saving is achieved, The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect, and determines the effect type and effect mode in the case of execution (step 108IWS703).

FIG. 12-28 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of a pre-reading advance notice effect execution determination table, a pre-reading notice effect type determination table, and a pre-reading notice effect mode determination table. In step 108 IWS 703, each table shown in FIG. 12-28 is used to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect, and the effect type and effect mode in the case of execution.

Specifically, when the game state is a state different from the time saving state C, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect using the pre-reading notice effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 12-28 (A). However, when the game state is the time saving state C, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect using the pre-reading notice effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 12-28(B).

As shown in FIGS. 12-28 (A) and (B), in this example, the prediction effect can be executed in both cases of the display result being a big win and a case of losing the big win. It is configured so that the proportion of execution of the pre-reading notice effect is higher in the case of becoming than in the case of losing. Therefore, it is suggested that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high by executing the look-ahead foretelling effect.

In such a configuration, further, as shown in FIGS. 12-28 (A) and (B), the time saving state C is more likely than the game state other than the time saving state C If the display result is off In addition, it is configured such that the proportion of execution of the look-ahead forewarning effect is low. With such a configuration, in the case of the time-saving state C (that is, when the big win is not generated for a long period of time), it is possible to suppress the deterioration of interest when the big win is not achieved though the look-ahead advance notice performance is executed.

In step 108 IWS703, when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined, if the game state is different from the time saving state C, the pre-reading notice effect type determination table shown in FIG. 12-28 (C) is used to execute If the performance type of the pre-reading notice effect to be executed is determined, and the game state is the time saving state C, the pre-reading notice effect type determination table shown in FIG. 12-28 (D) is used. Determine the type. Specifically, as the type of effect, either the chance effect or the pending change effect is determined.

The chance eye effect is a variable display to be the target of the look-ahead forewarning effect when the display result of the variable display executed before the variable display to be the target of the foreseeing forewarning effect becomes the chance eye ("778" in this example). It is a production that suggests that will be a big hit. In the chance eye effect, for example, an effect is executed to encourage whether or not the display result will be the chance eye (“778” in this example). Further, for example, when the chance game effect is executed in the red color effect mode, the red chance game effect ("778" in this example) is stopped and displayed, and when the blue chance game effect is executed in the blue effect mode. , a blue chance number (“778” in this example) is stopped and displayed.

The pending change effect suggests that the variable display targeted for the pre-reading notice effect will be a big hit by displaying the pending display corresponding to the variable display targeted for the pre-reading notice effect in a display mode different from the normal mode. It is a performance to do. Further, for example, when the pending change effect is executed in the red effect mode, a red pending display is displayed, and when the pending change effect is executed in the blue effect mode, the blue pending display is displayed. be done.

FIG. 12-29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of each effect type of the look-ahead preview effect. 12-29, FIGS. 12-29 (A1) to (E1) show a specific example of the chance eye production, and FIGS. 12-29 (A2) to (B2) show a specific holding change production This is an example.

When the chance eye effect is executed as the look-ahead notice effect, one variable display is started as shown in FIG. 12-29 (A1), and then shown in FIGS. As shown, left and right decorative patterns are stopped and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-29 (D1), the center decorative pattern stops at either "7" which becomes the chance number "778" or "6" which does not become the chance number "778". is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 12-29 (E1), when the center decorative symbol "7" is stopped and the chance number "778" is stopped and displayed, a variable display that becomes a big hit is displayed in the reserved memory. It would suggest that there may be a corresponding reserved memory. It should be noted that there may be a case where a pattern (for example, "768") different from the chance number "778" is stopped and displayed after the stimulating effect is executed.

When the hold change effect is executed as the pre-reading notice effect, as shown in FIGS. 12-29 (A2) and (B2), when the start winning occurs, the new hold display is different from the normal mode. It is displayed in a display mode (for example, red), suggesting the possibility that a variable display that will result in a big win will be executed based on the pending memory corresponding to the pending display. In this example, the display mode of the pending display is taken over as the display mode of the active display. Regarding the pending change effect, it is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. 12-29, and at any timing until the new pending display is displayed in the normal mode and then the corresponding pending display and active display are finished. You may make it change to the display mode different from a normal mode.

FIG. 12-30 is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period and the execution period of the look-ahead notice effect in the time-saving state via the big hit and the time-saving state via the relief. Of FIGS. 12-30, FIG. 12-30 (A) is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period in the time saving state via the big hit and the execution period of the pre-reading notice effect, and FIG. 12-30 (B) is a time chart. , It is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period in the time saving state via relief and the execution period of the pre-reading notice effect. In the examples shown in FIGS. 12-30(A) and (B), it is assumed that the starting winnings occur at the same timing.

As shown in FIG. 12-30(A), when the chance eye effect is executed as the pre-reading notice effect, in the variable display executed from the time when the starting prize is generated until the variable display of the pre-reading target is started , an effect to arouse whether or not the chance symbol is stopped is executed, and then the chance symbol is stopped and displayed. Since such a stimulating effect is included, it is necessary to secure an execution period of a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) during at least one variable display when executing the chance effect.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-30 (A), when executing a pending change effect as a pre-reading notice effect, the variable display of the pre-reading target is displayed from the timing when the starting prize occurs or the time when the starting prize occurs. The display mode of the pending display (or active display) changes at any timing over a plurality of variable displays until the end. The display of the suspended display and active display in the post-change display mode is continued until the variable display of the prefetch target ends. That is, when executing the pending change effect, it can be executed at any timing from the time when the start winning occurs until the variable display of the prefetch target ends, and it continues until the variable display of the prefetch target ends. can do.

In this way, even in the look-ahead advance notice effect, the execution period differs between the chance effect and the pending change effect. That is, the chance eye effect is executed for a predetermined period (for example, two seconds) during one variable display, whereas the pending change effect is executed over a plurality of variable displays.

Also, as described above, in the time-saving state via the jackpot, ultra-super-shortening variation (1.5 seconds) is not performed when the loss is performed, and mainly shortening variation (5 seconds) is performed, but the time-saving state via relief In , ultra-ultrashortening variation (1.5 seconds) is mainly performed at the time of detachment. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12-30, it is difficult to ensure the period for executing the chance effect in the time-saving state via relief.

Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 12-28 (C) and (D), in the time saving state via the big hit, both the chance eye effect and the pending change effect can be executed as the pre-reading notice effect. On the other hand, in the time-saving state via relief, the execution of the chance eye production is restricted as the look-ahead notice production, and only the pending change production can be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably execute the pre-reading announcement effect according to the game state.

Further, in step 108IWS703, when execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined, if the game state is different from the time saving state C, the pre-reading notice effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 12-28 (E) is used. , Determine the effect mode of the pre-reading notice effect to be executed, and when the game state is the time saving state C, use the pre-reading notice effect type determination table shown in FIG. Determines the type of production of . Specifically, either the red rendering mode or the blue rendering mode is determined.

As shown in FIGS. 12-28 (E) and (F), in this example, it is possible to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect with the red effect mode and the blue effect mode, and the big hit is more likely to be lost. It is configured such that the proportion of execution of the pre-reading forewarning effect in the red effect mode is higher than in the case of . Therefore, it is suggested that the expectation of a big hit is high by executing the look-ahead foretelling effect in the red effect mode.

In such a configuration, further, as shown in FIGS. 12-28 (E) and (F), in the time-saving state C, it is configured to execute the look-ahead advance notice effect only in the red effect mode. With such a configuration, in the case of the time-saving state C (that is, when the big win has not occurred for a long time), the deterioration of interest when the look-ahead advance notice performance is executed by the blue performance mode with a low expectation of the big win is suppressed. be able to. In this example, in the time-saving state C, the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed only in the red effect mode, but when it is lost, the pre-reading notice effect is not executed at a rate of 99%. Therefore, it is configured so as not to frequently cause the display result to be incorrect even though the look-ahead foretelling effect is executed in the red effect mode.

In this example, by setting the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 12-28, if it is a time saving state C (that is, if a long-term jackpot does not occur) and if it is not a time saving state C, the pre-reading notice It is possible to vary the execution ratio of effects and the ratio of the type of effects and the mode of effects, thereby improving interest.

In this example, as will be described later, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is 10 times or less, the execution of the notice effect is restricted (even if only the notice effect with high expectation is not executed) good), but the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is also restricted (for example, the execution ratio may be reduced (or not executed). In this case, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the case of loss The ratio may be reduced (or not executed), or the execution ratio of the type of anticipation with high degree of expectation may be reduced (or not executed).

Further, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 12-28, for example, even in the time-saving state C, when a variable display that results in a big hit or a time-saving loss is executed, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is not limited. good too.

When the process of step 108IWS704 is completed, the effect control CPU 120 performs execution setting of the pre-reading notice effect based on the determined contents (step 108IWS704). For example, when it is decided to execute the chance game effect, in step 108 IWS 704, the chance game flag is set as the execution setting of the chance game effect. Then, in steps 108IWS809 to S810 of the variable display start setting process, which will be described later, if the chance flag is set, the chance game effect is executed by selecting the process table including the chance game effect. The chance flag is reset when the variable display immediately before the variable display to be read ahead is executed.

Further, for example, when it is determined to execute the pending change effect, in step 108IWS704, the pending change effect is executed by changing the display mode of the pending display corresponding to the command at the time of starting winning.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 12-31 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step 100IWS801). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display result (stop symbol) is determined (step 100IWS802). That is, the effect control CPU 120 executes the processing of step 100IWS 802, and according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the decoration pattern is stopped) A display result determining means for determining the pattern) is realized. Incidentally, when a pseudo-run is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120, in step 100IWS802, selects a chance symbol (for example, like "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-run. , a combination of a jackpot pattern that does not become a reach and a pattern that is shifted by one pattern) is also determined. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 stores the data indicating the stop symbol of the determined decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In addition, in step 100IWS802, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the decorative symbols to be stopped based only on the variation pattern command. .

In step 100IWS802, when the received display result designation command indicates "normal jackpot", the effect control CPU 120 selects a decoration pattern in which three patterns are the same even number pattern as a stop pattern. A combination (usually a big hit pattern) is determined. In addition, when the received display result designation command indicates "probability variable big hit", the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decoration patterns (probability variable big hit pattern) in which 3 patterns are the same odd number patterns as the stop pattern. do. Further, when the received display result specifying command indicates "suddenly variable probability big hit", the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of "135" decoration symbols (suddenly variable probability big hit symbol) as the stop symbol.

Then, in the case of "missing", a combination of decoration patterns other than the above is determined. However, when the ready-to-win effect is involved, a combination of decorative patterns in which the left and right two patterns are aligned is determined. In addition, even if it is lost, in the case of "time saving lost", a combination of decorative symbols of the lost symbols including special symbols (for example, star symbols) is determined. It should be noted that it may be configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols of missing symbols including different special symbols (for example, heart-shaped symbols and diamond-shaped symbols) according to the time-saving type. Also, when the execution setting of the chance game effect is performed, the combination of decorative symbols of the chance game symbols (“778” in this example) is determined.

The effect control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

As for decorative patterns, a stop pattern (a combination of patterns in which the left, middle, and right are all the same pattern) that reminds us of a big win is called a big hit pattern. In addition, among the jackpot patterns, a stop pattern (combination of patterns in which the left, middle and right are all the same odd-numbered patterns) reminiscent of the probability variation jackpot is called the probability variation jackpot pattern. In addition, among the jackpot patterns, a stop pattern (combination of patterns in which the left, middle and right are all the same even-numbered patterns) reminiscent of a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) is called a non-probability variation jackpot pattern. Also, a stop symbol that reminds us of a loss is called a lost symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs execution setting of the notice effect to be executed during the variable display (step 108IWS802A). As the advance notice effect, for example, a timer effect can be executed in which a countdown is started after the start of fluctuation and a effect image suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit is displayed when the count number becomes "0", and in step 108IWS802A, the timer effect is performed. may be set to execute.

FIG. 12-32 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the advance notice effect execution determination table and the advance notice effect mode determination table. In step 108IWS802A, if the remaining number of times until relief time reduction exceeds 10 times, the presence or absence of execution of the notice performance is determined using the notice performance execution determination table shown in FIG. If the remaining number of times is 10 or less, the presence or absence of the execution of the announcement effect is determined using the announcement effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 12-32(B). Also, when it is decided to execute the notice effect, if the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction exceeds 10, the notice effect effect mode is determined using the notice effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 12-32 (C). However, when the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 10 or less, the mode of the announcement effect is determined using the announcement effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 12-32(D).

As shown in FIGS. 12-32 (A) and (B), in this example, the announcement effect can be executed in both cases of the display result being a big win and a case of losing. It is configured so that the proportion of execution of the advance notice effect is higher in the case of failure than in the case of failure. Therefore, execution of the advance notice effect suggests that the expectation of a big win is high.

In such a configuration, further, as shown in FIGS. 12-32 (A) and (B), a predetermined period before the relief time reduction (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 10 or less) Compared to the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until relief time reduction exceeds 10), the proportion of executing the notice effect when the display result is wrong is lower. is configured as With this configuration, a predetermined period before the relief time is reduced (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is reduced is 10 or less, and the countdown effect and effect effect described later are performed). It is possible to suppress the decline in interest when the game is executed but does not result in a big hit.

In addition, in a predetermined period before the relief time reduction (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 10 or less), the countdown production and effect production described later are executed. By restricting the execution of the effect, it is possible to avoid displaying a plurality of numerical values indicating the counter, and prevent them from interfering with each other.

As shown in FIGS. 12-32 (C) and (D), in this example, a red effect mode (for example, a red effect image is displayed) and a blue effect mode (for example, a blue effect image is displayed). is displayed), and the ratio of executing the advance notice performance by the red performance mode is higher in the case of a big win than in the case of a loss. Therefore, execution of the advance notice effect in the red effect mode suggests that the expectation of a big win is high.

In such a configuration, further, as shown in FIGS. 12-32 (C) and (D), a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less) If the display result is lost more than the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction exceeds 10), the notice effect is executed in the red effect mode. It is configured so that the percentage of With such a configuration, in a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is reduced is 10 or less), although the notice performance is executed in the red performance mode, the interest when it does not become a big hit can suppress the decrease in

In addition, when it is configured to be able to execute a plurality of types of notice effects with different degrees of expectation for big hits, the notice effects for types with high expectations for big hits (for example, when the degrees of expectation for big hits are classified into five levels, Only the announcement performance of the type with the fourth stage or higher of the expected degree of jackpot) is restricted to be executed in a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the period when the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less). good too.

In addition, not limited to the example shown in FIGS. 12-32, for example, even if the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 10 or less, when the variable display that results in a big hit or time reduction is executed, the execution of the notice effect is performed. You may make it not restrict.

Also, as described above, in this example, in the case of the time saving state C, the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is restricted, but the execution of the notice effect is also restricted (for example, the execution ratio is reduced In this case, it may be configured to reduce (or not execute) the execution ratio of the notice effect in the case of failure, or the notice effect of the type with high expectation The execution ratio may be lowered (or not executed).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times. (step 100IWS803). In addition, whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times is, for example, the relief time reduction number 2 It can be determined by confirming whether or not the designated command has been received.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times, the effect control CPU 120 until relief time reduction selects a process table including a fanning effect corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations (step 100IWS804). For example, if the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 2 designation command is "01 (H)" (if the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 100 times), the remaining number of fluctuations "100 times" Select a process table that includes the corresponding teasing effect. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 2 designation command is "08 (H)" (if the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 800 times), the remaining number of fluctuations "800 times selects the process table including the inciting effect corresponding to ". Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction is none of 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, and 800 times, the effect control CPU 120 is the relief time reduction. It is checked whether or not the number of remaining fluctuations until the value reaches 0 (step 108IWS805). Whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 0 is determined, for example, by checking whether the EXT data value of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is 0. I can judge.

When the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is 0, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the display result is a big hit (step 108IWS806A). When the display result is not a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time-saving rush effect that notifies control to a time-saving state by relief time-saving (step 100IWS806B). With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the game is controlled to the time saving state as the relief time saving by the time saving rush performance, and to improve the interest in the time of the relief time saving.

On the other hand, when the display result is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time-saving rush appearance effect for notifying that the big win will be achieved after executing the effect in the same manner as the time-saving rush effect ( Step 100 IWS 806C). Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812. With such a configuration, after the player once recognizes that the number of remaining fluctuations has become 0 until the relief time is shortened, the player is notified of the big win, so that the player can be given unexpectedness. Interest can be improved.

In this example, when the display result becomes a big hit when the number of times of relief time-saving variation is reached, a time-saving rush effect is executed using a dedicated relief time-saving variation big hit variation pattern. For example, even if a full rotation effect (that is, a big hit is confirmed) that fluctuates while the three decorative patterns are aligned, which is not executed except when the number of times of relief time-saving fluctuation is reached, is executed. good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and special feeling, and to improve the interest.

In addition, for example, when the display result becomes a big hit when the number of fluctuations of the relief time reduction is reached, the same fluctuation pattern for the big hit as usual may be used, or a ready-to-win effect with a short fluctuation time may be specified. It may be configured to use a variation pattern.

Further, in this example, when the display result is lost when the number of times of relief time-saving fluctuation is reached, a dedicated relief time-saving fluctuation loss-use variation pattern is used, but not limited to such a mode, for example, A variation pattern for losing the same as usual may be used, or a variation pattern designating a ready-to-win effect with a short variation time may be used. By configuring in this way, it is possible to share the variation pattern before and when reaching the number of times of variation of the relief time reduction, and it is possible to reduce the data capacity. In this case, after the symbol confirmation period has passed, the state is shifted to the time saving state C, and the background image (in this example, orange color (Background image of display color) (see step 078IWS638), it is possible to notify that the change of the background image is controlled to the time saving state by relief time saving.

When the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 10 times or less ( step 108 IWS 807). In addition, whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 10 times or less is determined, for example, by checking whether the value of the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is 10 or less. can be determined by

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 10 times or less, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including countdown effects and effect effects according to the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction. (step 108 IWS 808). For example, if the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is "0A (H)" (if the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is 10 times), the count number until relief time reduction " 10", select the process table including the countdown presentation and effect presentation. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is "01 (H)" (if the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is 1 time), the count until relief time reduction A process table including countdown presentation and effect presentation corresponding to the number "1" is selected. Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812.

In this example, when the remaining number of fluctuations until relief fluctuation is 10 times or less, the countdown presentation and the effect presentation are executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect that the game will be a relief variation, and to improve the interest. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player due to the player ending the game just before the relief fluctuation.

In this example, the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is determined based on the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 1 designation command and the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Although shown, it is not limited to such embodiments. For example, when configuring to transmit a background designation command that designates a background image, configure the EXT data of the background designation command to set a value corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and transmit. may On the side of the effect control CPU 120, the number of remaining fluctuations may be determined based on the EXT data of the received background designation command, and a fanning effect or a countdown effect may be executed.

In addition, in this example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until relief fluctuation is 10 times or less, the countdown presentation and effect presentation are always executed. You may make it determine whether. Also, for example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief fluctuation is not 10 times or less, the so-called false countdown production and effect production (for example, the countdown production and effect production are performed in a common manner) , the countdown presentation and the effect presentation corresponding to the count number "0" are not continuously executed, but interrupted in the middle (see FIG. 12-42). good too. In this case, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief fluctuation is 10 times or less, the countdown production and effect production (genuine and fake) are better than when it is not 10 times or less. ) may be executed at a higher rate. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect that the game will be a relief variation, and to improve the interest. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player due to the player ending the game just before the relief fluctuation.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is not less than 10 times (N in step 108IWS807), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution setting of the chance effect is performed (step 108IWS809). If the setting for execution of the chance game effect is set, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including the chance game effect (including a chance game effect) (step 108 IWS 810). . In addition, if the execution setting of the chance eye effect is not performed, the effect that the chance eye symbol is not displayed stop after executing the effect to instigate whether it will be the chance eye effect (so-called false chance eye effect) is executed by lottery. You may make it decide whether to carry out.

When the execution setting of the chance eye effect is not set, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern (step 108IWS811). Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect devices (parts for effect) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to changing the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. In addition, the process timer set value is set with a variable time in the mode of variation. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table, and performs control to display the decoration pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. Also, the process table is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 12 . Also, the process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

In addition, in the process table used when performing the effect control for the variation pattern involving the ready-to-win effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has passed. Process data indicating to display is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbols, the temporary stop symbols in the simulated run and the sliding effect. may

In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the production component as the Various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts are controlled (step 108IWS813). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 108IW, the effect control CPU 120 controls such that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to .

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 108IWS814).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Effect processing during variable display)
FIGS. 12-33 and 12-34 are flowcharts showing the effect processing during variable display (step S172) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display effect process, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 100IWS841) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step 100IWS842). When the process timer times out (step 100IWS843), the process data is switched. That is, the next process timer set value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 100IWS844). Also, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data which are set next (step 100IWS845).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first symbol determination A designation command or the second symbol determination A designation command is received (step 100IWS846). Specifically, it is checked whether or not the first fixed A command reception flag or the second fixed A command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol confirmation A specified command or the second symbol confirmation A specified command is received, the effect control CPU 120 is a mode transition effect (effect to inform that it shifts to a time saving state (time saving mode)) and right hitting A process table corresponding to the notification is selected (step 100IWS847). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS848). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the production component as the Various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts are controlled (step 100IWS849). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 20 seconds to the fixed effect period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the effect control means side (step 100IWS850). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS862.

In addition, in this example, when the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command is received, there are cases where the time saving is lost in the normal state and the case where the relief time is shortened. However, in step 100IWS847, when the time saving is lost during the normal state, the process table corresponding to the mode transition effect for the time saving and the right-handed notification is selected, and when the relief time is shortened, the relief time saving is selected. A process table is selected according to the mode transition effect and the right hitting notification. Whether or not it is a case where the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received as a relief time reduction, for example, the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is "00 ( H)” can be determined.

If neither the first design determination A designation command nor the second design determination A designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first design determination B designation command or the second design determination B designation command. (step 100IWS851). Specifically, it is checked whether or not the first fixed B command reception flag or the second fixed B command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol determination B designation command or the second symbol determination B designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table corresponding to the continuous effect (effect for notifying that the time saving state continues). (Step 100 IWS 852). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS853). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the production component as the Various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts are controlled (step 100IWS854). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds to the fixed effect period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the effect control means side (step 100IWS855). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS862.

If neither the first symbol confirmation B designation command nor the second symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 receives the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command. (step 100IWS856). Specifically, it is checked whether the first fixed C command reception flag or the second fixed C command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol determination C designation command or the second symbol determination C designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step 100IWS858.

If neither the first symbol determination C designation command nor the second symbol determination C designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the variable time timer has timed out (step 100IWS857). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

When the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command is received (Y of step 100IWS856), or when the variable time timer times out (Y of step 100IWS857), the effect control CPU 120 normally (step 100IWS858). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS859). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the production component as the Various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts are controlled (step 100IWS860). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 0.5 second to a fixed effect period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the effect control means side (step 100IWS861). Then, the process proceeds to step 100IWS862.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the case where the pattern confirmation designation command is received, also when the variable time timer times out (see step 100IWS857), the processing after step 100IWS858 is shifted to the pattern confirmation period. Normally, however, if the design decision designating command is not missed, there is no case where it is judged as Y in step 100IWS857 to shift to the processing after step 100IWS858.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 100IWS862).

(Waiting process per special figure)
FIG. 12-35 is a flow chart showing the special figure per waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the special figure per waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the fixed effect period timer (step 100IWS871), and confirms whether the value of the fixed effect period timer after the subtraction has timed out ( Step 100 IWS 872). If the value of the fixed effect period timer after subtraction has not timed out, the value of the process timer is subtracted by 1 (step 100IWS873), and the contents of process data n (display control execution data n, lamp control execution data n, sound number data n), control of the performance devices (image display device 5 as performance parts, various lamps as performance parts, and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts) is executed (step 100IWS874).

Also, when the process timer times out (step 100IWS875), the effect control CPU 120 switches the process data (step 100IWS876). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets the next process timer set value in the process table to the process timer, and starts the process timer (step 087IWS877).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stationary symbol of the decorative symbol is being displayed (step 100IWS878). If the stop pattern of the decorative pattern is being displayed, the process is terminated. If the stop pattern of the decoration pattern is not being confirmed and displayed, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to stop and display the determined stop pattern (loss pattern (no time reduction), time reduction loss pattern, big hit pattern) (step 100IWS879). ).

When the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed in the process of step 100IWS879 (Y in step 100IWS880), the effect control CPU 120 sets a jackpot stop flag indicating that the jackpot pattern has been confirmed and displayed (step 100IWS881). Then, the process ends.

If the value of the fixed effect period timer after the subtraction has timed out (that is, if the pattern fixed period has passed), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the big hit stop flag is set (step 100IWS882). If the jackpot stop flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not it has received a jackpot start designation command (step 100IWS883). Whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the jackpot start designation command reception flag (see step 100IWS622) is set. If the jackpot start designation command is not received, the process is terminated as it is.

If the jackpot start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the jackpot stop flag (step 100IWS884). Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the effect during the jackpot including the mode transition effect (effect for notifying the transition to the variable probability state (variable probability mode) and the short time state (short time mode)) and the notification of hitting to the right. (step 100IWS885). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 100IWS886), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number In accordance with data 1), control of the performance devices (image display device 5 as performance parts, various lamps as performance parts, and speaker 27 as performance parts) is executed (step 100IWS887).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process during the big hit (step 100IWS888).

If the jackpot stop flag is not set (that is, if the losing pattern (no time saving) or the time saving losing pattern is stopped and displayed), the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the effect control process flag to variable display start waiting processing. (Step S170) is updated (Step 100IWS889).

(Direction execution timing)
Next, the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time will be described. FIG. 12-36 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time. As shown in Figure 12-36, in the variable display (the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 1) immediately before the variable display that will be a relief time reduction, the variable display of the special design and decorative design is finished, and the design is removed (no time reduction) When is stopped and displayed, the lost symbol (no time reduction) is determined and displayed for a symbol determination period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100IWS1137). Next, at the start of the variable display, the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0 and the relief time reduction is performed (see step 100IWS74, S75). (See step 108 IWS 806B). Then, when the variable display of the special symbols is finished and the winning symbols (no time saving) are stopped and displayed, the winning symbols (no time saving) are fixedly displayed for a pattern fixing period of 20 seconds (see step 100IWS1135). Also, during the pattern fixing period, as shown in FIG. 12-36, the mode transition effect is executed in the image display device 5 (see step 100IWS847). Next, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed during the symbol determination period, as shown in FIG. 12-36, the image display device 5 starts hitting to the right (see step 100IWS847). Then, when the pattern confirmation period has passed, the state is shifted to the time saving state C, and as shown in FIG. 12-36, in the image display device 5, the background image (this example Then, the background image is switched to an orange display color (see step 100 IWS 638). With such a configuration, it is possible to secure a period for notifying that the control of the time saving state (relief time saving) is started in the normal state, and the clarification of the production when switching the game state can be achieved. can be improved.

(Production example)
Next, a specific example of the effect mode until transition to the time saving state C, which is a relief time saving, will be described. FIGS. 12-37 to 12-40 are explanatory diagrams for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until transition to the time saving state. In addition, in FIGS. 12-37 to 12-40, the effect screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

As shown in FIG. 12-37(A), the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is displayed every 100 rotations when the symbols are stopped. In this example, in the image display device 5, a decorative pattern 100IW100 is displayed in the center of the screen, and a small pattern 100IW101 is displayed in the upper right. Then, for example, when the remaining 800 rotations are left until the transition to the relief time reduction, the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 are stopped and the missing symbol (in this example, a combination of "134" symbols) is derived and displayed. At this time, a remaining rotation number display 100IW102 saying "Relief time saving starts after 800 rotations!" is displayed on the upper left. In addition, at this time, the explanation about the relief time saving (for example, the explanation of the relief time saving function and the effect of the relief time saving) is displayed at the bottom of the screen by the telop display 100IW103. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of understanding of the player regarding the specifications of the gaming machine with the relief time reduction.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-37 (B), for example, when the remaining 700 rotations until the shift to the relief time reduction, the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are stopped and removed (in this example, "423" ) is derived and displayed. At this time, similarly to FIG. 12-37(A), a remaining rotation number display 100IW102 saying "Relief time saving starts after 700 rotations!" is displayed on the upper left. In addition, at this time, the explanation about the relief time saving (for example, the explanation of the relief time saving function and the effect of the relief time saving) is displayed at the bottom of the screen by the telop display 100IW103.

It should be noted that, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 12-37 (A) and (B), it shows a case where the inciting production that suggests the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction is executed every 100 fluctuations, but that It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 400 times to 800 times does not perform the fanning effect, and the remaining number of times is 300 times or less (therefore, the remaining number of times is 300 times, 200 times, 100 times). can be configured to run.

In addition, instead of always executing the fanning production when the remaining number of fluctuations is reached, for example, when the command for specifying the number of relief time reduction times 2 is received, lottery processing based on random numbers is performed, and when it is decided to execute the fanning production The configuration may be such that the fan effect is executed in the mode shown in FIGS. 12-37(A) and (B). Further, in this case, it is desirable to configure such that as the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened decreases, the execution ratio of the fanning effect increases.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 12-37 (C) to 12-38 (E), after the remaining 10 rotations until the shift to the relief time reduction, a countdown display 100IW104A corresponding to the remaining number of rotations is displayed in the center of the screen. be. For example, in the countdown display 100IW104A, a state of counting down from "10" to "1" is displayed each time the symbol variation display ends and the symbols stop. Each figure shows an example in which the winning symbols (in this example, a combination of symbols "653", "844" and "123") are derived and displayed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-37 (C) to 12-38 (E), after the remaining 10 rotations until the transition to the relief time reduction, the effect display 100IW104B in the range according to the remaining number of rotations is displayed. . In this example, as the number of remaining rotations decreases (that is, as the relief time reduction approaches), the range in which the effect display 100IW104B is displayed becomes wider (the number of displayed effects increases).

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-38 (E), one rotation remains until the transition to the relief time reduction, and the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are displayed variably, and the pattern stops and the design (in this example, It is assumed that a symbol combination of "123") is derived and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-38 (F), the remaining 0 rotations until the shift to the relief time reduction, and the variable display of the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 (that is, the variable display that reduces the relief time) is started. As shown in FIG. 12-38(G), a time-saving rush effect is started to notify that control is to be performed in a time-saving state (relief time-saving), and a time-saving rush effect display 100IW104C is displayed on the image display device 5. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the control is to be in the time saving state (relief time saving), and to improve the interest in the time saving state (relief time saving).

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-38 (G), when the time-saving rush effect is started, the decoration pattern 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-38(H), when the symbols are stopped, the decoration symbol 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small symbol 100IW101 (in this example, a combination of "254" symbols) is derived and displayed.

In addition, in the time-saving rush effect, it is possible to make a notification that is generally performed during the ending period of the first game, such as a warning notification for forgetting to take a prepaid card or a warning notification to prevent addiction, or a game machine manufacturer's logo. may be displayed. In this case, at the time of notification in the time-saving rush effect, the notification may be performed in the same manner as at the time of notification in the ending period of the first win, or in a simplified manner. Further, these notifications may be performed during the ending period of the first big hit after shifting to the time-saving state by relief time-saving rather than in the time-saving rush performance.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-39(I), when the game moves to the symbol fixing period, a mode effect start display 100IW105 saying "Super heat!" is displayed, and the mode change effect is started. After that, the decoration pattern 100IW100 is not displayed even in the mode transition effect, and only the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-39(J), when the mode transition effect is started, an operation suggesting image 100IW 106 suggesting that the push button 31B (see FIG. 12-1) is operated (depressed) is displayed. be. For example, in the operation suggestion image 100IW106, an image prompting the user to press the push button 31B is displayed along with the characters "Press".

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-39(K), when the push button 31B is operated when the operation suggesting image 100IW106 is displayed, or when a predetermined time elapses after the operation suggesting image 100IW106 is displayed, "V A character display 100IW107 reading "STOCK x 1" is displayed to notify that the relief time reduction is started. Also, a right-handed hitting instruction display 100IW108 for instructing right-handed hitting is displayed next to the small symbol 100IW101.

It should be noted that, in this example, even when a big hit is achieved, an effect of displaying the character display of "V STOCK×1" can be executed in the same manner as in FIG. 12-39(K). In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103), in the start-up winning determination process (step S101), performs a prefetch determination process of whether or not it will be a big hit and the variation pattern type, and performs a prefetch determination. Send a prefetch determination result specifying command that can specify the result. Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect (so-called holding continuous effect) similar to that shown in FIG. 12-39(K) based on the received prefetch determination result specifying command. For example, when it is specified that there is one jackpot in the pending memory based on the received look-ahead determination result designation command, the text display of "V STOCK x 1" is displayed to perform the pending continuous effect. to run. Further, for example, when it is specified that there are two big hits in the pending memory based on the received prefetch determination result specifying command, the holding by displaying the characters "V STOCK x 2" is displayed. Execute a series of performances.

On the other hand, when the relief time is shortened, after that, there is a high probability that a variable display with an extremely short variation time of 1.5 seconds will be executed during the time reduction state via the relief time reduction (see Figure 12-8 (E) ), the variable display is digested very quickly, and a big hit is likely to occur at a relatively early timing. Therefore, in the variable display (in this example, the pattern confirmation period) that has become a relief time reduction, the character display "V STOCK × 1" shown in Fig. 12-39 (K) is displayed without confirming the look-ahead determination result. The effect to be displayed is executed. Therefore, the effect of displaying the character display "V STOCK × 1" shown in Fig. 12-39 (K) has the same effect as the pseudo holding continuous effect, and the relief time is shortened. It is a production that informs.

Although the display of the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 is started from the display timing of the character display 100IW107 of "V STOCK×1", the display start timing of the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 is limited to that shown in this example. do not have. For example, the display of the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 may be started at the timing of the confirmation display of the stop symbol shown in FIG. 12-38(H), and various modes are conceivable.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-39 (L), a mode selection screen 100IW109 for selecting a production mode for saving time is displayed. For example, a screen for selecting one of modes AD is displayed. Mode selection is performed by moving the cursor by operating the stick controller 31A, and is confirmed by operating the push button 31B. In addition, when a predetermined time has passed without selecting the presentation mode, the presentation mode in which the cursor is matched is automatically determined. Further, even when the mode selection screen 100IW109 is displayed, the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 remains displayed next to the small symbol 100IW101.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-40 (M), when the selection of the effect mode is completed, a start notification screen 100IW110 for notifying that the relief time reduction is started is displayed. For example, the characters "relief short rush" are displayed. Then, when the next fluctuation is started, it shifts to the time saving state C, and the relief time saving is started.

Next, the production mode of the time-saving rush appearance production will be described. FIG. 12-41 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode of the time-saving rush appearance effect. The example shown in Figure 12-41 follows the example of Figures 12-37(A)-(D).

As shown in FIG. 12-41 (E), one rotation remains until the transition to the relief time reduction, and the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are displayed variably, and the pattern stops and the design (in this example, "123 ) is derived and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-41 (F′), the remaining 0 rotations are left until the transition to the relief time reduction, and the variable display of the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 is started. It should be noted that the display result is a big hit, although this variable display is for saving time. Therefore, after the display result is derived and displayed, there is no transition to the time-saving state due to the relief time-saving, and the game is shifted to the jackpot game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-41 (G′), the time saving rush appearance effect is started, and the time saving rush effect display 100IW104C in the same mode as the time saving rush effect is displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-41 (G′), when the time saving rush effect is started, the decoration pattern 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed in the same way as when the time saving rush effect is started. Is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-41 (H), when the display of the time saving rush effect display 100IW104C ends, the decorative pattern 100IW100 is not displayed when the pattern is stopped, and the small pattern 100IW101 (in this example, the “254” pattern ) are derived and displayed. The variable display of the decoration symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 is stopped, and the big hit symbol (in this example, a combination of "777" symbols) is derived and displayed. After that, it shifts to a big hit game. With such a configuration, after the player once recognizes the establishment of the relief time saving, the player is notified of the big win, so that the player can be given unexpectedness and the interest can be improved.

In addition, the structure of this characterizing part 108IW is also executed to control a jackpot game based on the game ball winning (V winning) in a specific area (V winning area) in the jackpot during the small winning game. In the case of applying to a game machine configured to be able to do so, when the display result of the variable display for saving time is a small hit, the time-saving rush appearance performance is executed to notify the small win. good too.

Next, a description will be given of the so-called fake countdown presentation and effect presentation. FIG. 12-42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode of the so-called false countdown presentation and effect presentation.

As shown in Figure 12-42 (A) ~ (C), at the time of remaining 49 rotations until the transition to the relief time reduction, the so-called fake countdown effect is executed, so that the remaining number of rotations is 10 times. A countdown display 100IW104A corresponding to the case is displayed in the center of the screen. A countdown from "10" is displayed each time the symbols are stopped after the variable display of the symbols is completed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-42 (A) ~ (C), at the time of remaining 49 rotations until the transition to the relief time reduction, the so-called fake effect production is executed, so that the remaining number of rotations is 10. An effect display 100IW 104B having a range corresponding to the number of times is displayed. Then, each time the symbol variation display ends and the symbols stop, the effect display 100IW 104B is displayed so as to widen the display range (the number of displayed symbols increases).

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-42 (E), the countdown display 100IW 104A and the effect display 100IW 104B are displayed before the display is performed in a manner corresponding to the case where the remaining number of rotations is one until the shift to the relief time reduction. is terminated. At this time, since the number of rotations remaining until the shift to the relief time reduction is not 0, the time reduction rush effect is not executed.

As shown in Figure 12-42, when the so-called Gusset countdown production and effect production are configured to be executable, as shown in Figures 12-37 (A) and (B), the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time reduction It is also possible not to execute the inciting effect suggesting that. With such a configuration, when the countdown display 100IW 104A and the effect display 100IW 104B are displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to easily distinguish between the genuine article and the counterfeit article.

In this example, when the symbols are stopped, the number of rotations remaining until the relief time is shortened, the effect of the relief time shortening is explained, and the countdown is displayed.

In addition, in this example, the pattern confirmation period is secured for 20 seconds in the variable display that shortens the relief time, and the mode transition effect and right-handed notification are executed, but the pattern confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. It may be configured to shift to the time saving state via the relief time saving as it is without performing the mode transition effect etc.

In addition, in this example, when the RAM clearing process is executed, when the time saving is lost, the relief time saving counter is initially set to "800". or high-speed variation), the selection buffer and story counter of the story may be cleared. In addition, it may be possible to configure a story to be set when the relief time saving is activated, or to configure a different story to be set depending on the game state.

(Modification 1)
In the characteristic portion 108IW described above, in the variable display that shortens the relief time, 20 seconds, which is longer than the usual 0.5 seconds, is set as the symbol determination period, and the mode transition effect and right-handed notification are performed during the symbol determination period. Although shown, such processing is not limited. For example, the pattern determination period is set to 0.5 seconds as usual, and then a postponement period is provided until the next fluctuation is started, and the mode transition effect and right-handed notification are executed during the postponement period. You may Modification 1 will be described below, in which mode transition effect and right-handed notification are performed by providing a postponement period until the start of the next variation.

FIG. 12-43 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol process processing in Modification 1. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 12-43, in the modified example 1, the special symbol process includes, in addition to the processing shown in FIG. It should be noted that in Modification 1, the starting winning determination process (step 100IWS101) is executed in the same manner as the starting winning determination process (step 101) shown in FIG.

In modification 1, the special symbol normal process (step 100IWS110) is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0". Also, the variation pattern setting process (step 100IWS111) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". Also, the special symbol variation process (step 100IWS112) is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". Also, the special symbol stop processing (step 100IWS113) is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3".

Also, the next fluctuation postponement process (step 100IWS114) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4".

Also, the jackpot opening preprocessing (step 100IWS115) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". Also, the process during jackpot opening (step 100IWS116) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". Also, the jackpot opening post-processing (step 100IWS117) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". Also, the jackpot end process (step 100IWS118) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8".

Also, the small hit opening preprocessing (step 100IWS119) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In addition, the small hit during opening process (step 100IWS120) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". Also, the small hit end process (step 100IWS121) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "11".

In modification 1, the special symbol normal process (step 100IWS110) and the variation pattern setting process (step 100IWS111) are the same as the special symbol normal process (step S110) and the variation pattern setting process (step S111) shown in FIG. is. In addition, in the modification 1, in the special symbol variation process (step 100IWS112) and the special symbol stop process (step 100IWS113), even if the relief time is shortened, the symbol determination period is set to 0.5 seconds, which is the same as usual. , differs from the special symbol variation process (step S112) and the special symbol stop process (step S113) shown in FIG.

It should be noted that, in the modification 1, the big hit opening pre-processing (step 100IWS115) to the small hitting end processing (step 100IWS121) are the processing of the big hit opening pre-processing (step S114) to the small hitting end processing (step S120) shown in FIG. is similar to

FIG. 12-44 is a flow chart showing the special symbol stop processing (step 100IWS113) in Modification 1. FIG. In Modification 1, the processing of steps 100IWS131 to S171 of the special symbol stop processing is the same as those processing shown in FIGS. 12-16 and 12-17. In modification 1, when the relief time reduction determination flag is reset in step 100IWS171, the CPU 103 sets the postponement period measurement timer for measuring the postponement period until the next fluctuation starts (20 seconds in this example). is set (step 100IWS171A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the next fluctuation postponement process (step 100IWS114) (step 100IWS171B). The processing of step 100IWS175 is the same as the processing shown in FIGS. 12-17.

FIG. 12-45 is a flow chart showing the next change postponement process (step 100IWS114) in Modification 1. FIG. In the next fluctuation postponement process, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the postponement period measurement timer (step 100IWS191), and confirms whether or not the value of the postponement period measurement timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS192). . If the value of the postponement period measurement timer after the subtraction is not 0, the process is terminated.

If the value of the postponement period measurement timer after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "800" (step 100IWS193) and sets the relief time saving number counter to "800" (step 100IWS193A). ). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag C to control the time saving state (step 100IWS194). Moreover, CPU103 performs control which transmits the time saving state C designation|designated command to CPU120 for production|presentation control (step 100IWS195).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step 100IWS110) (step 100IWS196).

It should be noted that, in the modification 1, in the next fluctuation postponement process, the postponement period until the start of the next fluctuation (in this example, 20 seconds) shows the case of transitioning to the time saving state at the timing that has passed, such It is not limited to modes. For example, it may be configured to perform right-handed notification in the next fluctuation postponement process, and to shift to the time saving state at the start of the postponement period until the next fluctuation starts or in the middle of the postponement period. That is, in the next fluctuation postponement process, it may be configured to perform right-handed notification while controlling to the time-saving state, or may be configured to perform only right-handed notification without controlling to the time-saving state. can be considered.

Further, in Modification 1, the case of uniformly measuring 20 seconds as the postponement period in the next fluctuation postponement process has been described, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the relief time reduction counter is set (set "800") at the time of the relief time reduction, and the relief time reduction is configured to occur continuously, when the relief time reduction occurs during the normal state and the time reduction A different postponement period may be set for the case where the relief time is shortened during the state. For example, if the relief time is shortened during the time saving state, a shorter postponement period is set compared to the case of the relief time shortening during the normal state, and it is measured in the next variable postponement process, and the relief time is shortened from the second time onwards. In some cases, the postponement period may be shortened.

Also, during the execution of the next fluctuation postponement process, the image display device 5 does not display the decoration pattern, but displays only the small pattern so that the small pattern is not hidden by the performance accessory or the like. good too.

In addition, in the modified example 1, the case of extending the period until the next fluctuation is started by executing the next fluctuation postponement process when the relief time is shortened is shown, but not only such an aspect, the fluctuation display of the time saving is out may also be applied, and the next fluctuation postponement process similar to that of Modification 1 may be executed to extend the period until the next fluctuation is started.

In addition, as described above, when the present invention is applied to the time-saving variation display, the processing of steps 100IWS154 to S168 shown in FIG. 12-17 may be configured to be executed in the next variation postponement processing. With such a configuration, the pattern fixing period of the variable display in the case of time saving loss can be made common to 0.5 seconds, which is the same as the normal variable display, and the processing related to right-handed notification etc. can be executed in the same process as

FIG. 12-46 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time in Modification 1. FIG. As shown in FIG. 12-46, in the modification 1, in the variable display immediately before the variable display of the relief time reduction (the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1), the variable display of the special design and the decorative design is ended, and the When the symbol (no time saving) is stopped and displayed, the lost symbol (no time saving) is fixedly displayed for a pattern fixing period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100IWS1137). Next, at the start of the variable display, the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0 and the relief time reduction is performed (see step 100IWS74, S75). (See step 108 IWS 806B). Then, when the variable display of the special symbols is finished and the lost symbols (no time saving) are stopped and displayed, the missing symbols (no time saving) are fixedly displayed for the same 0.5 second pattern fixing period as usual (step 078IWS1135). reference). Next, when the 0.5 second pattern fixing period ends, as shown in FIG. 12-46, the game shifts to the next fluctuation postponement period of 20 seconds (see step 100IWS114). Then, during the next fluctuation postponement period, the mode transition effect is executed in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 12-46. Next, after a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has passed during the next fluctuation postponement period, as shown in FIG. 12-46, the image display device 5 starts hitting to the right. Then, when the next fluctuation postponement period has passed, the state is shifted to the time saving state C, and as shown in FIG. 12-46, in the image display device 5, the background image (this In the example, the background image is switched to an orange display color).

In the case of configuring as in Modification 1, a fluctuation stop signal is output at the start of the design confirmation period of the lost pattern, and after the symbol confirmation period has passed, at the start of the next fluctuation postponement process (that is, the next fluctuation postponement period At the start of the game, four jackpot signals may be output. The 4 jackpot signals here are signals to be externally output during the next fluctuation postponement period after the fluctuation display pattern confirmation period, which is a relief time reduction. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the signal from being missed outside when the fluctuation stop signal and the four jackpot signals are output at the same time.

In addition, in the case of the configuration as in Modification 1, when the next fluctuation postponement process starts (that is, when the next fluctuation postponement period starts), the player is in a game state in which it is assumed that he will hit to the right. You may make it output the test signal and external output signal which show, and you may make it start right-handed alerting|reporting. With such a configuration, it is possible to output a signal related to hitting to the right and to report hitting to the right at appropriate timing.

(Modifications 2 to 4)
In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW, during the time saving state controlled based on the relief time saving, the fluctuation pattern table E (see FIG. 12-8 (E)) is uniformly selected to change the high speed fluctuation of 1.5 seconds. Although the case of displaying is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. Hereinafter, modifications 2 to 4 in which the selection method of the variation pattern during the time saving state based on the relief time saving is different will be described. FIG. 12-47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining Modifications 2 to 4 of the variation pattern selection method during the time saving state based on the relief time saving, as the modification 8-37.

First, with reference to FIG. 12-47(A), a method of selecting a variation pattern during the time saving state based on the relief time saving in Modification 2 will be described. In the above characteristic portion 108IW, after the RAM clearing process (without being a big hit or time saving), 800 times of fluctuation display is executed, or after a big hit or time saving is lost (with the next big hit or time saving) Without distinguishing whether it is a case of executing 800 times of fluctuation display, fluctuation pattern tables F, G (Fig. ) is selected, and the variable display of 5 seconds or 12 seconds is executed at a high rate to execute the countdown production and effect production, and after being controlled to the time saving state as a relief time saving, the fluctuation pattern table E (Fig. 12-8 (E)) is selected to execute a high-speed fluctuation display of 1.5 seconds, but it is not limited to such a mode.

For example, as shown in the modification 2 of FIG. 12-47, when the relief time is shortened by performing 800 times of variation display after the RAM clearing process, the relief time is shortened from 10 variations to 1 variation before Also select the variation pattern table B (see FIG. 12-7 (B)) to perform the same variation display as usual, and after being controlled to the time saving state based on the relief time saving, the variation pattern table C (see FIG. 12-7 (C)) may be selected to select a variation pattern similar to the time-saving state at the time of passing the big hit, and to perform the variation display of 5 seconds at a high rate.

Further, for example, as shown in the modification 3 of FIG. 12-47, when the 800th variation display is executed after the big hit and the relief time is shortened, the variation is displayed when the 800th variation display is executed. From the pattern table I (see FIG. 12-8 (I)), a variation pattern (for example, variation pattern PA3-1) for relief short-time variation failure is selected, and a variation display with a variation time of 25 seconds is executed. It should be noted that the characteristic portion 108IW described above is configured to execute the time-saving entry effect during the variable display, and to execute the mode transition effect and the right-handed notification during the pattern fixing period, but for example, during the variable display for 25 seconds (In this case, therefore, 0.5 seconds may be ensured for the pattern fixing period as usual).

In addition, in the modification 2 and modification 3 of FIG. 12-47, if the relief time is shortened after the RAM clearing process and if the relief time is shortened after the big hit, the selection ratio of the variation pattern in the variation display that will be the relief time is different. In addition, it is possible to make the selection ratio of the variation pattern in the variation display after shifting to the time saving state through the relief time saving state different, thereby making the performance different.

Also, for example, as shown in the modification 4 of FIG. 12-47, select the variation pattern table B (see FIG. 12-7 (B)) even before 10 variations to 1 variation before the relief time is shortened Execute the same fluctuation display as usual, select the fluctuation pattern table C (see FIG. 12-7 (C)) during the time saving state based on the first relief time saving, and select the same fluctuation pattern as the time saving state when going through the big hit Select to perform a 5-second variable display at a high rate, select the variation pattern table E (see FIG. 12-8 (E)) in the time-saving state based on the second relief time-saving, and 1.5 seconds high speed It may be configured to perform a variable display of variations.
(Example 2)

Next, a gaming machine according to Example 2 of the characterizing portion 108IW of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-48 to 12-54. In addition, about Example 2, a part different from Example 1 is mainly demonstrated.

In Example 2, in principle, it is not suggested that the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction or the relief time reduction is near. Therefore, in the second embodiment, like the variation pattern table F as shown in FIG. 12-8 (F) of the first embodiment and the variation pattern table G as shown in FIG. There is no variation pattern table for That is, if the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 12-8 (F) and (G) only immediately before the relief time reduction, the tendency of the variation pattern will make the player notice that it is immediately before the relief time reduction. However, by not using such a variation pattern table, it is possible to prevent it from being noticed.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the variable display that reduces the relief time is not a dedicated variation pattern for the reduced relief time, but a variation pattern that is also used for the variable display that does not reduce the relief time (for example, variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)). is used. Therefore, in the second embodiment, like the fluctuation pattern table I as shown in FIG. 12-8 (I) of the first embodiment, and the fluctuation pattern table J as shown in FIG. There is no variation pattern table for variation when it becomes. With such a configuration, the fluctuation pattern can be made common between when the repair time is shortened and before the repair time is shortened, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Variation pattern setting process in the second embodiment)
Next, variation pattern setting processing in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 12-48 is a flow chart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S111) in the second embodiment. In the variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step 100IWS1701). If the big hit flag is set, the CPU 103 selects the big hit variation pattern table A shown in FIG. 12-7(A) as the table for determining the variation pattern (step 100IWS1702).

If the jackpot flag is not set (that is, if the win is lost), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 100IWS1707). If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if the probability variation state), the CPU 103, as a table for determining the variation pattern, the variation pattern table for deviation during the probability variation state shown in FIG. 12-8 (H) Select H (step 100IWS 1708). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number counter, selects the fluctuation pattern table H on the condition that the value of the total pending storage number counter is 1 or more, and is 0 (that is, if there is no pending storage), the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7(B) is selected.

If the variable probability flag is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag A indicating the time saving state controlled via the big hit is set (step 100IWS1709). If the time saving flag A is set (that is, if the time saving state controlled via the jackpot), the CPU 103 is a table for determining the variation pattern, via the jackpot shown in FIG. 12-7 (C) Select the fluctuation pattern table C for deviation during the controlled time saving state (step 100IWS1710). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number counter, selects the variation pattern table C on the condition that the value of the total pending storage number counter is 1 or more, and selects the value of the total pending storage number counter is 0 (that is, if there is no pending storage), the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7(B) is selected.

If the time saving flag A is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag B indicating the time saving state controlled via the time saving failure is set (step 100IWS1711). If the time saving flag B is set (that is, if it is a time saving state controlled via time saving off), the CPU 103, as a table for determining the variation pattern, the time saving off shown in FIG. 12-7 (D) Select the fluctuation pattern table D for deviation during the time saving state controlled via (step 100IWS1712). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number counter, selects the variation pattern table D on the condition that the value of the total pending storage number counter is 1 or more, and determines the value of the total pending storage number counter. is 0 (that is, if there is no pending storage), the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7(B) is selected.

If the time saving flag B is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag C indicating the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving is set (step 100IWS1713). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving), the CPU 103 uses the relief time saving shown in FIG. 12-8 (E) as a table for determining the variation pattern Select the fluctuation pattern table E for deviation during the time saving state controlled via (step 100IWS1714).

If the time saving flag C is not set (that is, if the normal state), the CPU 103, as a table for determining the variation pattern, the variation pattern for the deviation during the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7 (B) Select table B (step 100IWS 1715).

Next, the CPU 103 uses the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 100IWS1702, S1708, S1710, S1712, S1714, S1715 and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. 12-7 and 12-8 is determined (step 100IWS 1716).

When the variation pattern is determined, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1717).

Further, when the variation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined in step 100IWS1716, the CPU 103 sets the variation time data indicating the determined variation time to the variation time timer to measure the variation time. (step 100IWS1718), and start the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 100IWS1719). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 100IWS1720).

(Customer Waiting Demonstration Effect Control Process in Second Embodiment)
As described above, in the second embodiment, in principle, it is not suggested that the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened or that the relief time is close. Therefore, a telop display indicating that the relief time saving function is provided is performed based on the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command (see FIG. 12-26), but the relief depends on whether or not this telop display is executed and the presentation mode. There is no indication that the number of fluctuations remaining until the time saving or the relief time saving is near. That is, in the second embodiment, based on the reception of the customer-waiting demonstration specification command, a telop display for explaining the relief time reduction is always performed in a common manner.

In addition, even in the second embodiment, it may be possible to suggest that the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is short or that the relief time is near, depending on whether or not the telop display is executed or the mode of presentation. However, in a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (for example, the period in which the number of remaining fluctuations is 10 times or less), the execution of the telop display is restricted than in the period before that (for example, the execution ratio decreases, or not). By configuring in this way, the change of the background image when it becomes a relief time reduction (that is, the notification that the time reduction control by the relief time reduction is started) is suddenly executed, so that the player is surprised You can give it and improve your interest.

(Variable display start setting process in the second embodiment)
Next, variable display start setting processing in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 12-49 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the second embodiment. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step 100IWS801). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display result (stop symbol) is determined (step 100IWS802).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs execution setting of the notice effect to be executed during the variable display (step 108IWS802A). As the advance notice effect, for example, a timer effect can be executed in which a countdown is started after the start of fluctuation and a effect image suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit is displayed when the count number becomes "0", and in step 108IWS802A, the timer effect is performed. may be set to execute.

FIG. 12-50 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the advance notice effect execution determination table and the advance notice effect mode determination table in the second embodiment. In step 108IWS802A of the second embodiment, regardless of the remaining number of times until relief time reduction, the presence or absence of execution of the notice effect is determined using the notice effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 12-50(A). Further, when it is decided to execute the notice effect, the effect mode of the notice effect is determined using the notice effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 12-50(B).

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 12-50 (A) and (B), in any case of the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction, the presence or absence of the execution of the notice effect and the effect mode in the case of execution, configured to be determined by a common proportion. In addition, in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when it becomes a relief time reduction and shifts to the time reduction state C, in the image display device 5, the background image corresponding to the time reduction state C (relief time reduction via time reduction state) (In this example, the background image is displayed in orange) (see step 078IWS638). With such a configuration, the change in the background image (that is, the notification that the time saving control by the relief time saving is started) is suddenly executed, so that the player is given unexpectedness and the interest can be improved. can.

As described above, in the second embodiment, in principle, it is not suggested that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened or that the relief time is near, so the stimulation production according to the remaining variation number until the relief time is shortened, The processing for executing the countdown effect and the effect effect, and the processing for displaying the initial number corresponding to the number of times until the relief time is shortened are omitted.

In addition, in the second embodiment as well, it may be possible to execute a stimulating effect, a countdown effect, or an effect effect according to the number of remaining fluctuations until relief time is shortened. However, in a predetermined period (for example, a period in which the number of remaining fluctuations is 10 times or less) before the relief time is shortened, the execution of the fanning production, the countdown production, and the effect production is restricted (for example, , lower execution rate, or no execution). By configuring in this way, the change of the background image (that is, the notification that the time saving control by the relief time saving is started) is suddenly executed, so that the player is given unexpectedness and the interest is improved. be able to.

In addition, as described above, in the second embodiment, the variation display that reduces the relief time is not the dedicated variation pattern for the relief time reduction, but the variation pattern that is also used for the variation display that does not reduce the relief time (for example, the variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)) is used. Therefore, in Example 2, the processing for executing the time-saving rush effect and the time-saving rush appearance effect is omitted. With such a configuration, for example, after the variation display of the variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation) is performed, the change in the background image (that is, notification that the time saving control by the relief time saving is started) is suddenly performed Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve his or her interest.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the variation pattern (step 108IWS811). Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 108IWS814).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Production execution timing in the second embodiment)
Next, the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 12-51 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time in the second embodiment.

As shown in Figure 12-51, in the variable display (the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 1) immediately before the variable display that is a relief time reduction, the special design and the decoration design are displayed. For example, when 12 seconds have elapsed, the game ends, and when the lost pattern (no time saving) is stopped and displayed, the lost pattern (no time saving) is confirmed and displayed for a pattern fixing period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100IWS1137). Then, at the start of the variable display, the value of the relief time reduction number counter becomes 0 and the relief time reduction is performed (see steps 100IWS74 and S75). After the special figure fluctuation time (for example, 12 seconds) has passed, it ends, and when the missing pattern (no time saving) is stopped and displayed, the missing pattern (no time saving) is confirmed and displayed over the design confirmation period of 0.5 seconds. (See step 100 IWS 1137). Then, when the pattern confirmation period has passed, the state is shifted to the time saving state C, and as shown in FIG. 12-51, in the image display device 5, the background image (this example Then, the background image is switched to an orange display color (see step 100 IWS 638). With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and prevent the production from becoming complicated. In addition, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the change in the game state, and to improve the amusement when the relief time is shortened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-51, in the period in which the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) after shifting to the time saving state C, the right-handed notification is performed (FIG. 12-52 (C1 )reference). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is a game state of hitting to the right while suppressing the complexity of the performance relating to the transition to the time saving state C, thereby causing a disadvantage to the player. can be suppressed.

(Production example in Example 2)
Next, a specific example of the effect mode until transition to the time saving state C which is the relief time saving in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 12-52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until transition to the time saving state. In addition, in FIG. 12-52, the effect screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-52 (A), when the fluctuation display to be relief time reduction is started and the special figure fluctuation time (for example, 12 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. 12-52 (B) 2, the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are derived and displayed in combination with the missing patterns.

Then, when the symbol determination period has elapsed and the next variable display is started, as shown in FIG. 12-52 (C1), in the image display device 5, the time saving state C The background image (in this example, the background image of the orange display color) is switched to, and the right-handed notification is executed.

It should be noted that, when the reserved storage is not stored when the pattern fixing period has passed, as shown in FIG. 12-52 (C2), the image display device 5 In, while switching to the background image (in this example, the background image of the orange display color) according to the time saving state C (time saving state via relief time saving), the right hitting notification may be performed.

Also, at the timings shown in FIGS. 12-52 (C1) and (C2), explanations regarding the relief time reduction by the telop display 100IW103 as shown in FIGS. ) may be performed. In addition, although the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time reduction or the effect suggesting that the relief time reduction is near is not executed, at an arbitrary timing, a telop display 100IW103 as shown in FIGS. 12-37 (A) and (B) may be displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

With the configuration as shown in FIG. 12-52, the change in the background image (that is, the notification that the time saving control by the relief time saving is started) is suddenly executed, so that the player is given unexpectedness and interest. can be improved.

In addition, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the change in the game state, and to improve the interest when the relief time reduction is established. In addition, the variation pattern can be made common between when the relief time reduction is established and before it is established, and the data capacity can be reduced.

In addition, the effect mode until the transition to the time saving state C which is the relief time saving in the second embodiment is not limited to that shown in FIG. 12-52. For example, it may be modified example 1 shown in FIG. 12-53 or modified example 2 shown in FIG. 12-53.

(Production example [Modification 1] in Embodiment 2)
FIG. 12-53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of an effect mode until transition to relief time reduction in Modification 1 of Example 2. FIG.

In the modification 1 shown in FIG. 12-53, as shown in FIG. 12-53 (A), after the variable display immediately before the variable display to shorten the relief time is stopped, the variable display to shorten the relief time is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-53 (B), a time-saving rush effect (blackout effect) is executed to make the effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100, etc.) displayed immediately before on the image display device 5 difficult to see. be done.

Then, when the special figure fluctuation time (for example, 12 seconds) elapses, the blackout state is eliminated as shown in FIG. Is displayed.

Then, when the pattern determination period has elapsed and the next variable display is started, as shown in FIG. 12-53 (D), in the image display device 5, the time saving state C The background image (in this example, the background image of the orange display color) is switched to, and the right-handed notification is executed. In addition, at the timing of FIG. 12-53 (C) when the blackout state is eliminated, the image display and the output of the effect sound that notify that the control of the time saving state (relief time saving) is started are performed. good too.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve the interest. 12-53, for example, in the variable display start setting process, by selecting a process table including a time-saving rush effect (blackout effect) when it is a variable display that saves time. can be realized.

(Production example [Modification 2] in Embodiment 2)
FIG. 12-54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of an effect mode until transition to relief time reduction in Modification 2 of Example 2. FIG.

In the modification 2 shown in FIG. 12-54, as shown in FIG. 12-54 (A), the variable display that becomes a relief time reduction is started, and a predetermined period (for example, 12 seconds) of the special figure variable time ( For example, when 8 seconds have elapsed, as shown in FIG. 12-54(B), the decorative symbols 100IW100 are temporarily stopped and displayed in combination with the missing symbols on the image display device 5. FIG. However, at the timing shown in FIG. 12-54 (B), since the special figure fluctuation time has not passed, the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed in fluctuation.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-54 (C), in the image display device 5, a time-saving rush effect (blackout effect) that makes the previously displayed effect display (for example, decorative symbols 100IW100, etc.) difficult to see. executed. In addition, the special figure variation time elapses while the time saving rush performance (blackout performance) is being executed, and the small symbols 100IW101 are derived and displayed in combination with the missing symbols. The time-saving rush effect (blackout effect) is continuously executed during the symbol fixing period.

Then, when the symbol determination period has passed and the next variable display is started, as shown in FIG. It is switched to the background image (in this example, the background image of the orange display color) according to the time saving state via the relief time saving). In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-54(D), the notification of hitting to the right is executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve the interest. 12-53, for example, in the variable display start setting process, by selecting a process table including a time-saving rush effect (blackout effect) when it is a variable display that saves time. can be realized.

12-53 (C), (D), FIGS. 12-54 (C), (D), etc., relief by telop display 100IW103 as shown in FIGS. 12-37 (A), (B) You may be made to perform the explanation (for example, explanation of the production|presentation in relief time reduction function or relief time reduction) regarding time saving. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

In the first embodiment of the characteristic portion 108IW shown above, in the period before the relief time is shortened (for example, the period in which the number of remaining variations until the relief variation is 10 or less), the variation pattern to be super reach is determined. , While it is configured to be restricted to decide to execute the notice effect, in the second embodiment, neither is configured to be restricted, but by combining these, for example, before the relief time is shortened (for example, a period in which the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief fluctuation is 10 or less), for example, the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) is determined, and a notice of a type whose expectation is not very high among the notice effects The production may be made executable. In other words, it may be possible to limit the determination of the variation pattern for super reach, and to limit the execution of a type of advance notice effect with a high degree of expectation among the advance notice effects.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modification shown above, the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and the effect (also referred to as a relief suggestion effect) that suggests that the relief time is near are produced. Effect production is executed, initial results according to the number of times until relief time reduction and telop display during customer waiting (for example, telop display 108IW101 shown in FIG. 12-26) are displayed. I can't limit it. For example, at an arbitrary timing during the variable display or during the stoppage of the variable display, an action effect to operate the movable body 32, a light emission effect to make the light emitter such as a decorative LED emit light in a specific mode (for example, to emit rainbow light), and the movable body 32 , stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc., and the execution frequency and execution mode of vibration effects such as vibrating may suggest that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is near or the relief time is near.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modification shown above, the effect control command transmitted when the power is turned on (for example, the effect control command to instruct restoration from power failure, the effect control command to instruct initialization) , If the performance control board 12 side could not receive normally (for example, if the command was missed or the command was garbled), based on the command specifying the game state, the command specifying the variation pattern, etc. Although the production of can be executed, it may not be possible to execute the relief suggestion production that suggests the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened or that the relief time is near. be possible). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having expectations due to an erroneous remedy suggestive effect.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modification shown above, a relief time reduction number 1 designation command and a relief time reduction number 2 designation command that specify the number of times of variation until relief time reduction (in this example, sent each time a variable display is performed ) can not be received normally, the remedy suggesting effect may not be executed. In this case, the relief suggestive performance may not be executed only during the variable display in which the command for specifying the number of times of relief time 1 or the command for the number of times of relief time 2 can not be normally received, or the relief suggestion performance may not be executed until the next big hit occurs. You may make it not perform suggestion production. Also, for example, if it is not possible to receive normally, the relief suggestion performance is executed in a production mode or execution ratio that suggests that the number of remaining fluctuations that will result in relief time reduction is large (that is, it is not close to relief time reduction). may With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having expectations due to an erroneous remedy suggestive presentation.

Moreover, although the characteristic part 108IW and each modified example shown above show the case of application to a gaming machine that controls a big hit game based on the variation display result, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a game machine configured to be able to execute a role game that controls a big win game based on the fact that a game ball wins a prize (V win) in a specific area (V prize area) in the accessory during a small win game, You may apply the structure controlled to the time-saving state via the relief time-saving shown by characteristic part 108IW and each modification shown above.

Further, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example shown above, the case where the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is fixed at 800 is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, switch the value to be set in the relief time reduction counter to "800" or "900" depending on whether it is during RAM clear processing execution or when the big hit occurs, or randomly set the value to be set in the relief time reduction counter You may switch to "800" or "900."

In addition, although the characteristic part 108IW and each modification shown above showed the case where the time saving flag C was set each time the relief time saving occurred, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the time saving flag (fourth numerical value) set in the second relief time saving that has moved again may differ from the time saving flag (third value) set in the first relief time saving.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example shown above, the case of making different effects (variation patterns) between the time saving state after the big hit and the relief time saving state is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the same effect (fluctuation pattern) may be provided in the time saving state after the big hit and in the relief time saving state. Specifically, even if the same notification is made just before the end of the time saving state after the big hit and just before the start of the relief time saving (notification of Figure 12-39 (K), notification suggesting future big hit acquisition, etc.) good.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modification shown above, the case where different productions (variation patterns) are made in the time saving state and the relief time saving state are shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it is good also as the same production (variation pattern) in the time saving state out of time saving and relief time saving. Specifically, even if the same notification (notification of Figure 12-39 (K), notification suggesting future jackpot acquisition, etc.) is performed just before the end of the time saving state and just before the start of the relief time saving good.

As described above, the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example disclose the configuration of the game machine shown in (means 1A) to (means 8A) shown below.

(Means 1A) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot game) state), and a state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17, a game Part for executing step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in control microcomputer 100, part for executing step 100IWS537 in game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state control means is updated by the update means. Numerical information can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established by becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times of execution of variable display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, game control Part for executing steps 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the microcomputer 100, step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. The numerical information is updated when the variable display of the second identification information is performed and when the variable display of the second identification information is performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 part to be executed), predetermined suggestive effect executing means (for example, as shown in FIG. 108IWS811) and a special notification effect that notifies that the special state control is started based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-52 (C1) and (C2) background image changes, blackout at the start of fluctuation as shown in FIG. 12-53 (B), blackout at the end of fluctuation as shown in FIG. 12-54 (C), etc.) Effect execution means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-23, A portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS 638), and the predetermined suggestive effect executing means has a common ratio of executing the predetermined suggestive effect in the period before the special condition is established (for example, FIG. 12 - As shown in 44, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A. 12-50). According to such a configuration, the sudden execution of the special notification effect can provide the player with a sense of surprise, thereby enhancing the interest of the player.

(Means 2A) In means 1A, the special notification effect executing means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display that satisfies the special condition is started. This is a mode in which the effect display displayed before the start is made difficult to see (for example, it is blacked out at the start of fluctuation as shown in FIG. 12-53(B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of surprise and improve the interest.

(Means 3A) In the means 1A, an effect variable display executing means capable of executing variable display of the effect identification information (for example, decoration pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. In addition, the special notification effect execution means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display that satisfies the special condition ends. , blacked out at the end of fluctuation as shown in FIG. 12-54(C)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of surprise and improve the interest.

(Means 4A) In means 1A, the special notification effect execution means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display after the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is being executed, and the special notification effect is displayed. It is an aspect of changing the background display in the means to the background display corresponding to the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-52 (C1), the background image (orange) is displayed when the next variable display is performed. ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of surprise and improve the interest. Moreover, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated.

(Means 5A) Any one of the means 1A to 4A is provided with an explanation effect execution means capable of executing an explanation effect regarding a special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, FIGS. 12-52 (C1), (C2 ), at the timings shown in FIGS. 12-53(D) and 12-54(D), explanations are given using telop display 100IW103 as shown in FIGS. 12-37(A) and (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 6A) In any of means 1A to 5A, variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the variable pattern shown in FIGS. 12-48). The variable display pattern determination means includes a variable display pattern that can be determined even before the special condition is satisfied (for example, a variable display pattern PA1-1 (normal variation )), and the special notification effect executing means can execute the special notification effect after the non-specific display result (for example, the missing pattern) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display that satisfies the special condition. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the special condition is being controlled by the establishment of the special condition, and to clearly notify the player of the change in the game state, thereby enabling the special condition. It is possible to improve the interest when is established.

(Means 7A) In any of means 1A to 6A, variable display execution means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 step a portion for executing S112), and a pending storage means (for example, a first pending storage number buffer and a second pending storage number buffer) capable of storing information on variable display as pending information when the starting condition is met but the start condition is not met. a buffer), backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information updated by the updating means even if the power supply is stopped and pending information stored by the pending storage means, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, Initialization means (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8) to initialize the storage contents of the backup storage means, and when the power supply is started, the backup storage Restoration means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S6 part) and According to such a configuration, while optimizing the control through the initialization process, a power failure occurs in a situation in which the pending memory corresponding to the special number of times of variable display is stored before the power supply is stopped. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player when the game is played.

(Means 8A) In any of means 1A to 6A, a state storage means capable of storing special state information (for example, the state of time saving flags A to C) that can be specified to be controlled in a special state; Execution count storage means capable of storing execution count information (for example, the value of a time-saving counter) that can specify the number of times the variable display is executed in the state, and special state information and execution count information even if power supply is stopped Backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information and initialization means (for example, game control and a portion where the microcomputer 100 executes step S8), and the initialization means holds the special status information, the number of times of execution information, and the numerical information by the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. , in the initialization process, while initializing the special state information and the execution count information, the numerical information is not initialized (for example, the state of the time saving flags A to C and the value of the time saving counter are initialized On the other hand, the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not initialized (that is, the value before the power failure is set)). According to such a configuration, intentional initialization of the numerical information can be prevented, and the degree of relief for the player can be enhanced.

Further, the characterizing portion 108IW and each modified example disclose the configuration of the gaming machine shown in the following (means 1B) to (means 5B).

(Means 1B) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot game) state), and a state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17, a game Part for executing step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in control microcomputer 100, part for executing step 100IWS537 in game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. Numerical information can be updated by updating means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), a predetermined variable display pattern and a variable than the predetermined variable display pattern Variable display that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern with a long display period (for example, variable pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and variable pattern PA2-3 (super reach β)) Pattern determination means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100, a portion for executing the variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 12-14), and the state control means, the numerical information updated by the update means is variably displayed When the special condition is established by becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times of execution, it is possible to control the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the step in the game control microcomputer 100 100IWS74, the part that executes step 100IWS75, the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. When the variable display of the second identification information is executed and the numerical information is updated (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), variable The display pattern determination means can determine the specific variable display pattern in both cases of the display result of the variable display being the specific display result and the case of not being the specific display result (for example, FIG. 12-7 ( A) , (B), the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) can be determined in both the case of a big hit and the case of loss) , when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is higher than the predetermined variable display pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-7(A), the variation pattern PA2- 2 (super reach α) and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) are higher than the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation), the percentage determined in the case of a big hit), before the special condition is established In the predetermined period, when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower than the period before the predetermined period (for example, FIG. 12-8 (F)). , (G), just before the relief time is reduced, the rate of determining the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is low). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest when the specific display result is not derived and displayed although the variable display by the specific variable display pattern is executed in the predetermined period before the special condition is established.

(Means 2B) In the means 1B, the suggesting effect executing means is provided which can execute a suggesting effect related to the establishment of the special condition (for example, countdown effect, effect effect, telop display while waiting for customers), and the suggesting effect executing means During the predetermined period before the special condition is established, the rate of execution of the suggested effect is higher than during the period before the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-31, the effect control CPU 120 ∼ S809, and the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes 105IWS251). According to such a configuration, the player can expect the establishment of the special condition, and the interest can be improved. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player due to the player ending the game just before the special condition is established.

(Means 3B) In means 1B or 2B, an explanation effect regarding the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, as shown in Figs. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-31, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 108IWS803 to S804) is provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 4B) In any one of means 1B to 3B, execution of notice effect capable of executing notice effect (for example, timer effect) for notifying that a specific display result will be derived and displayed while variable display is being executed. means, wherein the advance notice effect execution means can execute the notice effect in both cases where the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and when the display result of the variable display is not the specific display result, and the display result of the variable display can be executed When is a specific display result, the ratio of executing the notice effect is higher than when it is not a specific display result, and the predetermined period before the special condition is established (for example, the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 10 or less period) is lower than the period before the predetermined period, the rate at which the announcement effect is executed when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-31 , the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A (see FIGS. 12-32 (A) and (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the specific display result is not derived and displayed although the advance notice effect is executed in the predetermined period before the special condition is established.

(Means 5B) In any one of means 1B to 4B, execution of notice effect capable of executing notice effect (for example, timer effect) for notifying that a specific display result will be derived and displayed while variable display is being executed. means, the advance notice effect executing means performs a specific mode (for example, the effect mode "red") and a predetermined the advance notice effect can be executed depending on the mode (for example, the effect mode "blue"), and when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the proportion of executing the notice effect in the specific mode is higher than in the predetermined mode, If the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result in the predetermined period before the special condition is established (for example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time reduction is 10 or less) than the period before the predetermined period (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-31, the part where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A. See FIGS. 12-32 (C) and (D)) . According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest when the specific display result is not derived and displayed although the advance notice effect is executed in the specific mode during the predetermined period before the special condition is established.

In addition, the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example disclose the configuration of the game machine shown in the following (means 1C) to (means 8C).

(Means 1C) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot game) state), and a state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17, a game Part for executing step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in control microcomputer 100, part for executing step 100IWS537 in game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. Numerical information can be updated by updating means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) and a special variable display pattern (for example, variation pattern PA3-1 ( A variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 12-14) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including rushing and losing)) and the state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times of execution of the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, steps 100IWS170 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. 12-17 ), and the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is performed and when the variable display of the second identification information is performed (for example, in FIG. 12-13 As shown, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), the variable display pattern determining means can determine the special variable display pattern when the special condition is satisfied, and can determine the special variable display pattern before the special condition is satisfied. In (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-14, step 108IWS1701A, S1701B in the game control microcomputer 100), a special variable When the variable display by the display pattern is being executed, a specific notification effect executing means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-31, for game control The portion of microcomputer 100 that executes step 108IWS806B. 12-38 (G), (H)) is further provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the special condition is controlled to the special state by the establishment of the special condition, and to improve the interest when the special condition is established.

(Means 2C) In means 1C, the specific notification effect execution means executes a specific notification effect when a variable display satisfying a special condition is executed and a non-specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. When the variable display satisfying the special condition is executed, and the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the specific display result is executed after the production in the same mode as the specific notification production is executed. Special notification effect execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-31, a part that executes step 108IWS806C in the game control microcomputer 100. FIG. 12- 41 (G'), see (H')). According to such a configuration, after the player once recognizes that the special condition has been established, it is notified that the control is in an advantageous state. can be done.

(Means 3C) In means 1C or 2C, when a variable display that satisfies a special condition is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, it is not executed before the special condition is established. A predetermined notification effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined notification effect (for example, a full rotation effect) for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed according to a mode is provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and special feeling, and improve the interest.

(Means 4C) In means 1C or 2C, when the variable display that satisfies the special condition is executed and the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the mode is the same as before the special condition is met. Notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect that notifies that the specific display result is derived and displayed by pattern PB2-2 (super reach α) and variation pattern PB2-3 (super reach β)). According to such a configuration, the variable display pattern can be shared between when the special condition is established and before the special condition is established, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 5C) In any one of means 1C to 4C, the display period (for example, 20 seconds) of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied is the display result of the variable display before the special condition is satisfied. Display period (for example, 0.5 seconds) longer than (for example, as shown in Figure 12-15, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS1135. See Figure 12-36), the special condition is established In the display period of the display result of the variable display when the As shown, the effect control CPU 120 has a portion for executing step 100IWS847). According to such a configuration, it is possible to secure the period for executing the notification effect in the normal state, clarify the effect when switching the game state, and improve the interest.

(Means 6C) In any one of means 1C to 5C, at the start of the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied, a specific signal (for example, a fluctuation stop signal) corresponding to the start of the display period , and after outputting the specific signal, a signal output means for outputting a special signal (for example, 4 jackpot signals) corresponding to the control of the special state (see, for example, FIGS. 12-18). According to such a configuration, when the specific signal and the special signal are output at the same time, it is possible to prevent the signal from being missed outside.

(Means 7C) In means 6C, the signal output means performs special processing (for example, next fluctuation postponement processing shown in FIG. ), output a special signal. According to such a configuration, when the specific signal and the special signal are output at the same time, it is possible to prevent the signal from being missed outside.

(Means 8C) In any one of means 1C to 6C, a first passage area (for example, a first starting prize opening) provided at a position through which a game medium passing through a specific path (for example, a left-handed path) can pass ), a second passage area (for example, a second starting prize opening) provided at a position where a game medium passing through a special path (for example, a right-handed path) can pass, and a variable display of identification information, the second Variable display execution means (e.g., game control (the part where the microcomputer 100 executes step S112) and a special output that can specify that the game medium should be shot toward the special path (for example, in a game state where the player is assumed to hit right a special output means capable of outputting a test signal or an external output signal indicating that the game medium The second start condition is established when the game medium passes through the second passage area, and the special output means provides a display result of the variable display when the special condition is established. A special output can be executed at the start of a special process (for example, the next fluctuation postponement process shown in FIG. 12-45) that is executed after the display period of . According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a special output that can specify that the game media should be shot toward the special path at an appropriate timing.

Further, the characterizing portion 108IW and each modified example disclose the configuration of the game machine shown in the following (means 1D) to (means 5D).

(Means 1D) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot game) state), and a state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17, a game Part for executing step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in control microcomputer 100, part for executing step 100IWS537 in game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. Numerical information can be updated by updating means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a variable display pattern that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns Display pattern determination means (for example, game control microcomputer 100, a portion for executing the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 12-48), and the state control means, the numerical information updated by the update means is variable When the special condition is established by becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the execution number of displays, it is possible to control the special state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, in the game control microcomputer 100 The part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75, the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. When the variable display of the second identification information is executed and when the numerical information is updated (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), When the special condition is established, the variable display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern that can be determined even before the special condition is established (for example, variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)), and the special condition is established. After the non-specific display result (e.g., lost pattern) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, a special notification effect (e.g., a background image corresponding to the relief time reduction ( orange)) can be executed Special information effect execution means (for example, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS638) is further provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the change in the game state, and to improve the interest when the special condition is established. Also, the variable display pattern can be shared between when the special condition is established and before the special condition is established, and the data volume can be reduced.

(Means 2D) In means 1D, variable display execution means capable of executing variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112) a reserve storage means (for example, a first reserve memory number buffer or a second reserve memory number buffer) capable of storing information on variable display as reserve information when the start condition is met but the start condition is not met; a pre-reading notice execution means capable of executing a pre-reading notice effect (for example, a chance eye effect or a pending change effect) whose notice target is a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the means, wherein the pre-reading notice execution means is Of the variable displays corresponding to the hold information stored before the special condition is established, the variable display when the special condition is established can be executed as an announcement target, while the variable that the special condition is established can be executed. Execution of the pre-reading forewarning effect with the variable display after the display as the forewarning target is restricted (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-27, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS702). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complication of the control process, and it is possible to avoid contradiction in the presentation contents.

(Means 3D) In means 1D or 2D, the special notification effect execution means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display after the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is being executed. is a mode for changing the background display on the display means to the background display corresponding to the special state (see, for example, FIG. 12-52 (C1)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with unexpectedness and improve interest, and prevent the production from becoming complicated.

(Means 4D) In any one of means 1D to 3D, there is provided suggestive effect execution means capable of executing suggestive effects related to establishment of special conditions (for example, countdown effects, effect effects, telop display during customer waiting, etc.). The suggestive effect executing means restricts the execution of the suggestive effect for a predetermined period before the special condition is established. According to such a configuration, since the special notification effect is suddenly executed, it is possible to provide the player with unexpectedness and improve interest.

(Means 5D) In any of means 1D to 4D, explanation effect executing means (for example, FIGS. 12-52 (C1), (C2), At the timings shown in FIGS. 12-53(D) and 12-54(D), a telop display 100IW103 as shown in FIGS. 12-37(A) and (B) is provided). According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

Further, the characterizing portion 108IW and each modified example disclose the configuration of the game machine shown in the following (means 1E) to (means 4E).

(Means 1E-1) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17 , a part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. Updating means capable of updating numerical information based on (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, a portion that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), a predetermined variable display pattern and from the predetermined variable display pattern Variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including shortened variable display patterns (for example, variation patterns PA1-4 (extremely shortened variation)) whose variable display periods are shortened (for example, The game control microcomputer 100 is provided with a part that executes the variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-19, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS537), and the numerical information updated by the updating means is , It is possible to control to a special state when the special condition is established by becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times of execution of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the game control microcomputer Step 100IWS74, step 100IWS75 in 100, step 100IWS170, step 100IWS173 in game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. is executed and the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed ), the variable display pattern determining means determines that the display result of the variable display is less in the special state controlled when the special condition is established than in the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. A high rate of determining the shortened variable display pattern in the case of a specific display result (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-14, the part that executes step 108IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100. Figure 12-7 (C), Figure 12-8 (E)). According to such a configuration, when the number of executions of variable display reaches a specific number, the rate of execution of variable display by the shortened variable display pattern increases, and the period until the next advantageous state is controlled. is shortened, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

(Means 1E-2) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17 , a part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. Numerical information can be updated based on updating means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a specific variable display pattern corresponding to the execution of reach production (For example, variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β)) (for example, for game control A portion where the microcomputer 100 executes the variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-19, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS537), and the numerical information updated by the updating means is variably displayed. When the special condition is established by becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times of execution, it is possible to control the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the step in the game control microcomputer 100 100IWS74, the part that executes step 100IWS75, the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. When the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the numerical information is updated (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed part), the variable display pattern determining means determines that the display result of the variable display is unspecified in the special state controlled when the special condition is established, rather than in the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. The ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern in the case of the display result is low (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-14, the part that executes step 108IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100. Figure 12-7 (C), Figure 12-8 (E)). According to such a configuration, when the number of executions of the variable display reaches the specific number of times, the ratio of the display result of the variable display according to the specific variable display pattern to the non-specific display result is low, thereby reducing interest. can be suppressed.

(Means 2E) In means 1E, background display means capable of displaying different background displays on the display means for the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state and the special state controlled when the special condition is established. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-23, step 100IWS634, S638 in the effect control CPU120 portion) is provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the difference in the game state, thereby enhancing the interest of the player.

(Means 3E) In means 1E or 2E, variable display execution means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112 and a pending memory means (for example, a first pending memory number buffer or a second pending memory number buffer) capable of storing information on variable display as pending information when the starting condition is met but the start condition is not met. and a pre-reading notice execution means capable of executing a pre-reading notice effect (for example, a chance eye effect or a hold change effect) whose notice target is a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means, and a pre-reading notice execution means. The means is a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state and a special state that is controlled when the special condition is established, and the ratio of execution of the pre-reading notice effect and any of a plurality of types of pre-reading notice The ratio of whether to execute the production is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-27, the part where the production control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS703. See FIGS. 12-28 (A) and (B)). According to such a configuration, the execution frequency and execution type of the foreseeing advance notice effect are determined in the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state and the special state controlled when the special condition is established. It can be different, and the interest can be improved.

(Means 4E) In any of means 1E to 3E, variable display executing means (for example, game control microcomputer 100 step part for executing S112), and a pending storage means (for example, a first pending storage number buffer or a second pending storage number buffer) capable of storing information on variable display as pending information when the start condition is met but the start condition is not met. buffer), and a pre-reading notice execution means capable of executing a pre-reading notice effect (for example, a chance eye effect or a hold change effect) whose notice target is variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means, The pre-reading notice execution means is capable of executing a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the variable display when the special condition is established among the variable displays corresponding to the hold information stored before the special condition is established, Execution of the pre-reading forewarning effect for the variable display after the variable display for which the special condition is established is restricted (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-27, the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS702). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complication of the control process, and it is possible to avoid contradiction in the contents of the presentation.

Further, the characterizing portion 108IW and each modified example disclose the configuration of the game machine shown in the following (means 1a) to (means 10a).

(Means 1a) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot game) state), and a state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17, a game Part for executing step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in control microcomputer 100, part for executing step 100IWS537 in game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state control means is updated by the update means. Numerical information can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established by becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, step 100IWS74 in the game control microcomputer 100, The part that executes step 100IWS75, the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. And update the numerical information in the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed part) characterized by do. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably realize the relief of the player. Specifically, even if the game state changes and any of the identification information is displayed variably, the update of the numerical information continues, so that the player can be easily rescued and the motivation for playing the game can be enhanced. can be done.

In this example, the initial value is set to the relief time-saving number counter when a big hit occurs, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, multiple types of jackpots (jackpots with no time reduction, jackpots with a small number of game balls acquired, jackpots with second special symbols, etc.) are provided, and for some jackpots, the initial value of the relief time reduction counter is not set. It may be configured as

In addition, in this example, although the case where the 1st special design mainly fluctuates is shown in a normal state, it is not restricted to such a mode. For example, the number of reserved memories may be increased to vary both the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the normal state.

(Means 2a) In means 1a, the special condition is established on the basis that a predetermined display result (for example, a lost pattern) different from the specific display result as the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed a special number of times in succession ( For example, for example, as shown in Figure 12-13, step 100IWS63, step 100IWS71, step 100IWS74, step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in Figure 12-17, the game control microcomputer Step 100IWS172 and Step 100IWS173 in 100). According to such a configuration, since display results disadvantageous to the player are relieved when they are successively derived and displayed, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game.

(Means 3a) In means 1a or 2a, the updating means updates the numerical information when variable display is executed even in a state different from the normal state (for example, probability variable state, time saving state) (for example, FIG. 12 As shown in -17, the part that executes step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100) may be configured. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably realize the relief of the player. Specifically, numerical information is updated fairly, and even after being controlled to a special state once, it can be controlled to a special state again, so it is possible to control to a special state until it is controlled to a substantially advantageous state. Thus, the player's investment can be suppressed, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.

It should be noted that, in this example, low probability low base (normal state), high probability high base (probability variable state), low probability high base (time saving state) shows the case of updating the relief time reduction number counter, such It is not limited to modes. For example, low probability low base (normal state), high probability high base (probability variable state), low probability high base (time saving state), high probability low base (latency probability change) update the relief time reduction counter in all four states It may be configured as In this case, it can also be applied to a game machine that executes a drop lottery to the normal state in the variable probability state.

In addition, in this example, the case of preferentially digesting the second special symbol is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, a variable winning ball device 6B is provided in the first start winning hole, a high probability low base (small hit RUSH) is provided for frequent small hits, the game balls are digested in order of winning, the first special symbol and the second special It may be configured such that the symbols are changed simultaneously.

In addition, in this example, although the case where the 1st special design and the 2nd special design are provided is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to provide only the first special symbol.

(Means 4a) In any one of means 1a to 3a, the update means sets numerical information to an initial value when a predetermined condition is established (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-16, a game control microcomputer 100, a portion for executing step 100IWS135, a portion for executing step 100IWS144, and a portion for executing step 100IWS167 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. 12-17). According to such a configuration, when the game is controlled in an advantageous state, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player.

(Means 5a) In means 4a, the predetermined condition is to be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-16, the part that executes step 100IWS135 in the game control microcomputer 100) may have been According to such a configuration, when the game is controlled in an advantageous state, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player.

(Means 6a) In means 4a, the state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, time saving) is derived and displayed in the normal state (for example, FIG. 12 -17, the part that executes step 100 IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100), the predetermined condition is that the special display result is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17, the game (the part that executes step 100 IWS 167 in the control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming higher than necessary.

(Means 7a) In means 4a, the predetermined condition is that the variable display is executed a special number of times (for example, as shown in FIGS. may be configured to According to such a configuration, it is possible to substantially control the special state until the next advantageous state, so that the degree of relief for the player can be increased.

(Means 8a) In means 4a, backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information updated by the updating means even if the power supply is stopped when the power supply is stopped, and the updating means , When a specific condition is satisfied (for example, execution of initialization processing), the numerical information held by the backup storage means is set to the initial value (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-11, the game control microcomputer 100), the predetermined condition is that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. ) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, if the numerical information up to the special number of times is held when initialization is performed in the game hall, it may be too disadvantageous for the game hall. can be made easier.

(Means 9a) In any one of means 1a to 8a, an effect control means corresponding to variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, a portion that executes steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120), and the state The control means can be controlled to a special state for a specific period of a special number of times or more based on the execution of the variable display of the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, in the game control microcomputer 100 Part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75, part that executes step 100IWS172 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIGS. It is possible to control the special state of a specific period again (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part that executes step 100IWS172 in the control microcomputer 100), the effect control means executes different effects in the first specific period and the second specific period (for example, the modification of FIG. 12-47 The part shown in Example 4) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the second specific period, it is a situation in which the advantageous state is not controlled for a long period of time. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the game by adding a change to the effect mode.

(Means 10a) In any one of means 1a to 8a, an effect control means corresponding to variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, a portion that executes steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120), and the state The control means can be controlled to a special state for a specific period of a special number of times or more based on the execution of the variable display of the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, in the game control microcomputer 100 Part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75, part that executes step 100IWS172 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIGS. It is possible to control the special state of a specific period again (for example, as shown in FIGS. The part that executes step 100IWS172 in the control microcomputer 100), the effect control means executes a common effect in the first specific period and the second specific period (for example, FIG. 12-47 The parts shown in modified examples 2 and 3) may be configured as described above. According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the second specific period, the state is not controlled to the advantageous state for a long period of time. It is possible to prevent the player from being unnecessarily conscious of the fact that the situation is not under control, and to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example disclose the configuration of the game machine shown in the following (means 1b-1), (means 1b-2) to (means 5b).

(Means 1b-1) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and an advantageous advantageous state (eg, a gaming machine controllable to a jackpot game state), in which a game area in which game media can be divided into a first path (for example, a left-handed path) and a second path (for example, a right-handed path); Controllable state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17, step 100IWS166, step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 Part to be executed, as shown in FIG. 12-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and updating means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display (for example, As shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the game necessary for executing multiple types of processing including control of variable display and control of advantageous state A process execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a part that executes step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100) for updating the data value indicating the progress state and executing the process corresponding to the data value. In addition, the state control means can control to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13 2, a portion that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, a portion that executes steps 100IWS172 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. Numerical information is updated when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the game control microcomputer 100 The part that executes step 100 IWS71 in), the processing execution means executes the first processing related to the variable display when the data value is the first numerical value (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the step in the game control microcomputer 100 part for executing S110 to S113), the data value is the first When the second numerical value is different from the numerical value, the second processing regarding the advantageous state is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the part that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the data value is the first When the third numerical value is different from the numerical value and the second numerical value, the state control means executes the third processing for controlling the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-43, the game control part of the microcomputer 100 for execution of step 100 and IWS 114), the game is played by shooting the game medium along the first path in the normal state, and the game is played by shooting the game medium along the second path in the special state. and a launch promotion notification means (see FIG. 12-46) for executing launch promotion notification to the effect that the game medium should be launched to the second path during execution of the third process. According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by performing the launch promotion notification to the second path before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to perform an effect related to the launch promotion notification early when the special state is controlled.

(Means 1b-2) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17 , a part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. Update means that can update numerical information based on (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), variable display control and advantageous state control A data value indicating a game progress state required for executing a plurality of types of processing including processing execution means for executing processing corresponding to the data value (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, game control and a part for executing step S25 in the microcomputer 100), and the state control means enters the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. Controllable (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 12-17, the step in the game control microcomputer 100 100IWS 172 and step 100IWS 173), the updating means updates the numerical information between when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS67 in the game control microcomputer 100), the process execution means executes the first process related to the variable display when the data value is the first numerical value (for example, 5, the part that executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100), and executes the second processing related to the advantageous state when the data value is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value (for example, FIG. 5, a game control microcomputer 100 for executing steps S114 to S117), when the data value is a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the state control means controls to a special state based on the establishment of the special condition. 3 to execute the process (for example, as shown in Figure 12-43, the part that executes the step 100IWS114 in the game control microcomputer 100), notification to notify that it is controlled to a special state during the execution of the third process It is characterized by having a performance execution means (see FIG. 12-46) for executing performance. According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by performing the launch promotion notification to the second path before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to perform an effect related to the launch promotion notification early when the special state is controlled.

In addition, in this example, the case of giving priority to the processing related to the big hit is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, priority may be given to processing related to variable display or processing related to saving time.

In this example, a case is shown in which the right stroke is notified in the next fluctuation postponing process, which is the third process, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured such that only the mode transition effect suggesting transition to the time-saving state is executed without performing the right-handed notification.

(Means 2b) In the means 1b-1 and 1b-2, the process execution means executes the second process after the first process when the specific display result is derived and displayed in the variable display satisfying the special condition ( For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-16, when step 100IWS133 in the game control microcomputer 100 is Y, step 100IWS140 is executed and step 100IWS114 is not executed. According to such a configuration, priority is given to the control of the advantageous state, so that the player is not disadvantaged, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

(Means 3b) In means 1b-1, 1b-2 or 2b, the updating means updates numerical information when variable display is started (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, game control The part that executes step 100 IWS71 in the microcomputer 100), the processing executing means changes the special information from the first information to the second information when the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value (for example, FIG. 12 -17, the part that executes step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), and changes the special information from the second information to the first information when the state control means controls the special state (for example, 12-16, the part that executes step 100IWS145 in the game control microcomputer 100), special information performs different processing when it is the first information and when it is the second information (for example, FIG. As shown in 12-14, it may be configured as a portion for executing step 100IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, by managing the special information, it is possible to suitably execute the process of transitioning to the special state.

(Means 4b) In the means 3b, variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a portion for executing step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided. The display pattern determining means determines different variable display patterns depending on whether the special information is the first information or the second information (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-14, step 100IWS1714 (the part that executes According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably perform the effect when the variable display is performed the special number of times.

(Means 5b) In the means 3b, variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a portion for executing step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided. The display pattern determination means determines a variable display pattern in which the determination time of the display result differs depending on whether the special information is the first information or the second information (for example, as shown in FIGS. 100IWS1128 and 100IWS1130 in the microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably perform the effect when the variable display is performed the special number of times.

Further, the characterizing portion 108IW and each modified example disclose the configuration of the gaming machine shown in the following (means 1c) to (means 6c).

(Means 1c) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot game) state), a game control means capable of controlling a game (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a portion that executes step S25 in the effect control CPU 120), and a variable display (For example, as shown in FIG. 7, a portion that executes steps S170 to S172 in the production control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 12-31, Step 108 IWS 811 in the production control CPU 120 , and the game control means is a controllable state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17 12-19, a portion that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, and a portion that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and variable display are executed. Update means (for example, as shown in Figure 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the state controlled by the state control means and a state information control means for controlling identifiable state information, wherein the state control means is controlled to an advantageous state based on the derived display of the specific display result as the display result of the variable display, and then to the special state. Controllable (for example, the part that executes step 100IWS64 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-12), and the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times It is possible to control to a special state when a special condition is established (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 12-17 2, the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the update means, when variable display of the first identification information is executed and when variable display of the second identification information is executed Numerical information (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), the state information control means sets the state information to the first numerical value in the normal state ( For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-16, the part that executes step 100IWS145 and step 100IWS149 in the game control microcomputer 100, that is, neither the time saving flag A nor C is set, and the data corresponding to each is "0" ), the state information is set to the second numerical value (for example, in FIG. As shown, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100, that is, the time saving flag A is set, and the data corresponding to the time saving flag A is "1"), based on the establishment of the special condition When it is controlled to a special state, the state information is set to a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value (for example, as shown in FIGS. That is, the time saving flag C is set, the data corresponding to the time saving flag C is "1"), the game control means can transmit specific information to the effect control means, and when it is in a special state, the state information It is possible to transmit specific information according to the case of the second numerical value and the case of the third numerical value (for example, the part shown in FIG. 12-10, as shown in FIG. 12-19, the game control microcomputer 100, the part that executes step 100IWS540, and the part that executes step 100IWS174 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIGS. 12-17). According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, since different game states can be preferably identified, control is facilitated, and if the specific information is also changed at that time, the effect can be preferably executed when the effect control means executes different effects.

In addition, although the case where the time saving state A designation|designated command and the time saving state C designation|designated command were transmitted was shown in this example as specific information, it is not restricted to such an aspect. For example, the background designation command and the variation pattern command are configured to be transmitted in a manner that can identify the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, and the time saving state via the relief time saving. good too. In addition, for example, when a big win is achieved, a jackpot start designation command (fanfare designation command) or a jackpot end designation command (ending designation command) is transmitted in different modes according to the game state, and depending on which command is received. The fanfare period and the ending period may be changed.

(Means 2c) In means 1c, the state information control means changes the state information to the first numerical value, the second numerical value and the second numerical value when the special condition is established again after being controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition. It may be configured to have a fourth numerical value different from the three numerical values (for example, a portion that executes step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, since different game states can be preferably identified, control is facilitated, and if the specific information is also changed at that time, the effect can be preferably executed when the effect control means executes different effects.

(Means 3c) In the means 1c or 2c, the effect control means controls the state control means to a special state based on the derivation display of the specific display result, and when the state control means satisfies the special condition. It may be configured such that it is possible to execute a different effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 100IWS634 and S638). According to such a configuration, since the variable display in the special state controlled by the establishment of the special condition can be efficiently digested, it is possible to execute the performance according to the situation, and the interest of the game is improved. be able to.

(Means 4c) In any one of means 1c to 3c, the effect control means controls the state control means to a special state based on the derivation display of the specific display result, and when the state control means When the special state is controlled based on the establishment of the condition, it is possible to execute a common effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a common background image in steps 100IWS634 and 100IWS638). may be configured to According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the performance in the special state controlled by the establishment of the special condition the same every time, and thereby prevent an increase in development costs because a new performance is not required. At the same time, since the player is not confused, the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Means 5c) In any one of means 1c to 4c, the state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, time saving) is derived and displayed in the normal state. Yes (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100), the effect control means, the state control means, based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed When the special state is controlled and when the state control means controls the special state based on the establishment of the special condition, different effects can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can perform steps 100IWS 636, (the part that executes S638). According to such a configuration, since the variable display in the special state controlled by the establishment of the special condition can be efficiently digested, it is possible to execute the performance according to the situation, and the interest of the game is improved. be able to.

(Means 6c) In any one of means 1c to 4c, the state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special display result different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state, and the effect control means Common when the state control means controls to the special state based on the derivation display of the special display result and when the state control means controls to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition It may be configured to be able to execute effects (for example, effect control CPU 120 displays a common background image in steps 100IWS636 and 100IWS638). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the performance in the special state controlled by the establishment of the special condition the same every time, and thereby prevent an increase in development costs because a new performance is not required. At the same time, since the player is not confused, the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, the characterizing portion 108IW and each modified example disclose the configuration of the gaming machine shown in (means 1d) to (means 4d) shown below.

(Means 1d) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot pattern), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, jackpot game) state), a game control means capable of controlling a game (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a portion that executes step S25 in the effect control CPU 120), and a variable display (For example, as shown in FIG. 7, a portion that executes steps S170 to S172 in the production control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 12-31, Step 108 IWS 811 in the production control CPU 120 , and the game control means is a controllable state control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17 12-19, a portion that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, and a portion that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and variable display are executed. Update means that can update numerical information based on that (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the power supply When it is stopped, backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information relating to the number of executions of the variable display; It is possible to control to a special state when the condition is established (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 12-17 , the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100). Numerical information is updated (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the game control means controls predetermined information when power supply is started. means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-11, the part that executes step 100IWS11 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the effect control means receives the predetermined information, power supply (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-22, a part that executes step 100IWS630 in the production control CPU 120). do. According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, the player is motivated to play a game from the opening of the game arcade, and the operating rate of the game machine can be increased.

In this example, the initial number is shown as a suggestive effect regarding the number of executions of the variable display, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the configuration may be such that a change in background, an effect during fluctuation up to 100 rotations, and an suggestive effect by display on a demo screen or menu screen are executed.

It should be noted that when a command (S9 in FIG. 12-12) specifying initialization is transmitted, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to recognize the number of times until relief time reduction as an initial value and execute the effect. .

(Means 2d) In means 1d, the game control means can transmit specific information that can specify the numerical information held by the backup storage means to the effect control means when power supply is started (for example, As shown in 12-11, it may be configured as a part for executing step 100IWS11 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, a player is motivated to play a game from the opening of the game arcade, which increases the operation rate of the game machine and suppresses an increase in the processing load.

In addition, although the case where the command which can specify the value of a relief time reduction counter is shown at the time of restoration is shown in this example, it is not restricted to such an aspect. For example, 1 to 99 rotations can be specified in units of 100 rotations, 100 to 199 rotations can be specified, . . . 500 to 599 rotations can be specified. Although the value of the time saving number counter is 128 or more, it cannot be specified, but 127 or less may be configured to transmit an identifiable command.

(Means 3d) In means 1d or 2d, the game control means can transmit specific information to the effect control means in relation to the execution of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-14, The part that executes step 100IWS1717 in the game control microcomputer 100), the effect control means can execute a special effect related to being controlled to a special state based on the establishment of the special condition based on the specific information ( For example, as shown in FIG. 12-31, the part that executes step 100IWS804 in the effect control CPU 120), as the specific information, it is possible to specify that the difference between the number of times of variable display execution and the special number of times is less than or equal to a predetermined value. 1st specific information (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-9, relief time reduction number 1 designation command), the difference between the number of execution times of variable display and the special number of times is greater than a predetermined value second specific information that can be specified And, (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-9, a relief time reduction number 2 designation command) may be configured. According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by regularly suggesting a function to a player, it is possible to reduce the risk of inadvertently inflicting a loss on the player and to suitably implement the processing relating to the specific information.

In addition, in this example, the difference between the number of execution times of the variable display and the special number of times is greater than a predetermined value shows the case of transmitting the relief time reduction number of times 2 designation command which is the second specific information, such a mode not limited to For example, when the difference between the number of execution times of the variable display and the special number of times is larger than a predetermined value, it may be configured not to transmit the relief time reduction number of times 2 designation command, which is the second specific information.

(Means 4d) In any one of means 1d to 3d, the effect control means is controlled to a special state when a special condition is established based on the execution of the variable display for a first predetermined number of times less than the special number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-33, the part that executes step 100IWS847 in the effect control CPU 120, FIG. 12-39 (I) to FIG. 12-40 (M )), and every time the variable display is executed a second predetermined number of times, which is less than the first predetermined number of times, before the special number of variable displays are executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-31). As shown, the part that executes step 100IWS804 in the effect control CPU 120 may be configured as shown in FIGS. 12-37(A) to 12-38(F)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by regularly suggesting features to the player, the risk of unknowingly incurring losses can be reduced.

In addition, in this example, although the case where production|presentation is performed based on the count value of a relief time reduction counter is shown, it is not restricted to such an aspect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to count the number of fluctuations and execute the effect after resetting the relief time reduction counter.

In addition, the characterizing portion 108IW and each modified example disclose the configuration of the game machine shown in the following (means 1e-1) and (means 1e-2).

(Means 1e-1) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, A game control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120), Effect control means for controlling the effect corresponding to the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 12-31, the effect control CPU 120 A part that executes step 108IWS811), and the game control means is a controllable state control means (for example, in FIGS. 12-17 As shown, a part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and variable display are executed Update means (for example, as shown in Figure 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and when the power supply is stopped backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information relating to the number of executions of variable display; (For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-14, a portion that executes step S8 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state control means is an update means can be controlled to a special state when the special condition is established by the numerical information updated becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, in the game control microcomputer 100 Step 100IWS74, step 100IWS75, step 100IWS172, step 100IWS173 in game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. The numerical information is updated in the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed and when it is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) when the effect control means is controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of the special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized; When the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized and then controlled to the special state by the state control means based on the establishment of the special condition; It is characterized by executing different effects (for example, portions shown in Modification 2 and Modification 3 of FIG. 12-47). According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, since it is possible to grasp that the stored contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, factors such as guessing of setting values are increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(Means 1e-2) Execute variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derived display of the specific display result (eg, jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (eg, A game control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120), Effect control means for controlling the effect corresponding to the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 12-31, the effect control CPU 120 A part that executes step 108IWS811), and the game control means is a controllable state control means (for example, in FIGS. 12-17 As shown, a part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and variable display are executed Update means (for example, as shown in Figure 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and when the power supply is stopped backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information relating to the number of executions of variable display; (For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-14, a portion that executes step S8 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state control means is an update means can be controlled to a special state when the special condition is established by the numerical information updated becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, in the game control microcomputer 100 Step 100IWS74, step 100IWS75, step 100IWS172, step 100IWS173 in game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. The numerical information is updated in the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed and when it is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) when the effect control means is controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of the special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized; When the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized and then controlled to the special state by the state control means based on the establishment of the special condition, and after being controlled to the special state are different. It is characterized by executing effects (for example, portions shown in modified examples 2 and 3 of FIG. 12-47). According to such a configuration, it is possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, since it is possible to grasp that the stored contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, factors such as guessing of setting values are increased, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Although this example shows the case where only the variation pattern table B is used after the RAM is cleared, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to use a plurality of variation pattern tables as in the case after the big hit.

It should be noted that, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the configuration of the gaming machine shown in the following (means 1f) to (means 15h) may be applied.

(Means 1f) A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and controllable to an advantageous advantageous state based on the derivation and display of a specific display result, State control means capable of controlling a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the state, and update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of variable display, wherein the state control means is a variable display. can be controlled to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the above, and the numerical information updated by the updating means is the special number of times as the number of times variable display is executed. When the special condition is satisfied by the corresponding specific value, the update means can be controlled to the special state when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed. Numerical information is updated in each case, and there are multiple types of advantageous states, including a specific advantageous state and a special advantageous state. The advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled is different, and the advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to the special advantageous state is higher than the advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to the specific advantageous state , the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the specific advantageous state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 1f, for example, the special advantageous state is a definite variable jackpot, the specific advantageous state is a normal jackpot, and the time saving state after the definite variable time reduction is a normal jackpot The advantage of the saving time state is higher than that of the time saving state, and the advantage of the saving time saving state is higher than that of the time saving state after the normal jackpot.

(Means 2f) In the means 1f, when the control is made to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when the control is made to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information, the control is made to the advantageous state. After being controlled, the ratio of being controlled to the special state of special advantage is different, and when controlled to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, and to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information The number of executions of variable display for satisfying the special condition is the special number of times in common between when the control is performed and when the control is performed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the first identification information while increasing interest by exhibiting different game characteristics when the first identification information is variably displayed and when the second identification information is variably displayed. It is possible to suppress an excessive increase in the gambling property by having the special number of times common to the case of display and the case of variable display of the second identification information.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 2f, for example, the ratio of the special advantage in the time saving state after the big hit (time saving continues until the next big hit) is the first special symbol and the second special pattern, and 800 times, which is a condition to be controlled to reduce the relief time when controlled to a big hit based on the first special pattern and when controlled to a big hit based on the second special pattern. may be configured so that the number of fluctuations of is common.

(Means 3f) In means 1f or 2f, the disadvantageous setting value is the first probability of being controlled to the advantageous state, and the advantageous setting is the second probability that the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the first probability. A setting means for setting one of a plurality of set values including a value and a set value is provided, and a special condition set to a disadvantageous set value is more difficult than a set value set to an advantageous set value. The advantage of the special state that is easily established and controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. According to such a configuration, even when the disadvantage set value is set, the advantage of the special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied is the special state that is controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. By being higher than the state advantage, the player can be rescued more effectively.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 3f, for example, one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) , and when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are executed, and the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six steps from "1" to "6". And, if it is set to a disadvantageous setting (e.g. "1"), the number of fluctuations that is the condition for reducing the relief time is less than if it is set to an advantageous setting value (e.g. "6"). Then, the advantage in the saving working hours is set higher than the advantage in the saving working hours after the big hit. In addition, those who are set to a disadvantageous setting (for example, "1") have a higher relief time-saving arrival rate than those set to an advantageous setting value (e.g., "6"), and the relief time-saving is always time-saving Since the number of times is 800 times (substantially until the next big hit), the advantage may be higher than the time saving state via the big win (for example, the number of times of time saving is 100 times after the normal big win).

(Means 4f) Any one of means 1f to 3f includes setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and is controlled to an advantageous state. Which of the plurality of types of special conditions to be controlled later is the same regardless of which set value is set, and the advantage of the special condition to be controlled when the special condition is established. is common when any set value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improvement of the gambling property due to the set value, and to realize a healthy game property.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 4f, for example, one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) , and when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are executed, and the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six steps from "1" to "6". Then, after the big hit, which of the multiple types of time-saving states is controlled is made common when any set value is set, and the advantage in the relief time-saving is set when any set value is set. can be configured to be common.

(Means 5f) In any one of means 1f to 4f, when controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, and when controlled to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information , the ratio of which of the plurality of types is controlled to an advantageous state is different, and when the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and corresponds to the variable display of the second identification information The advantage of the special state controlled after the special condition is established is common between when the special condition is established and when the special condition is established. According to such a configuration, it is controlled when the special condition is established while exhibiting different game characteristics depending on whether the first identification information is variably displayed or the second identification information is variably displayed. Since the advantage of the special state is common to any set value, it is possible to suppress the improvement of the gambling property and provide an appropriate degree of relief.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 5f, for example, when a big hit occurs due to the first special symbol and when a big win occurs due to the second special symbol, The proportions controlled for each of the normal jackpot and the probability variable jackpot are made different, and the relief time is shortened when the relief time is shortened based on the first special symbol and when the relief time is shortened based on the second special symbol. may be configured so that the advantages of are common.

(Means 6f) In any one of means 1f to 5f, the variable display pattern is selected from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern having a variable display period shorter than the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determining means for determining the variable display pattern is provided, and the variable display pattern determining means determines a variable display in a special state controlled when a special condition is established, rather than in a special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. is a non-specific display result, the shortened variable display pattern is likely to be selected. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the game machine of the means 6f is based on the configuration using the variation pattern table E of FIG. 12-8(E), for example.

(Means 7f) In any one of means 1f to 6f, the variable display pattern is provided with variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern corresponding to execution of the ready-to-win effect. If the special state controlled when the special condition is established is more favorable than the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state, the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result. The rate of deciding on a specific variable display pattern is low. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the game machine of means 7f is based on the configuration using the variation pattern table E of FIG. 12-8(E), for example.

(Means 8f) In any one of means 1f to 7f, the update means can update the specific numerical information different from the numerical information based on the execution of the variable display in the special state, and the state control means By setting the special information, the special state can be controlled, and by canceling the setting of the special information, the special state can be terminated. a backup storage means capable of holding numerical information and specific numerical information updated by the updating means even if the power supply is stopped, and setting information of the special information; and a predetermined condition is satisfied. an initialization means capable of initializing the stored contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the initialization means initializing the setting information of the special information and the specific numerical information, and Do not initialize numeric information. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player even when the predetermined condition is satisfied.

It should be noted that in the present characteristic portion 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of means 8f, for example, in the initialization process shown in FIG. The value of the relief time reduction number counter may be configured not to be initialized.

(Means 1g) A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and controllable to an advantageous advantageous state based on the derivation and display of a specific display result, A state control means capable of controlling a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a state; an update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of variable display; a variable display executing means capable of executing variable display based on the following; a holding storage means capable of storing information relating to the variable display as holding information when the starting condition is met but the starting condition is not met; and power supply is stopped. backup storage means capable of holding numerical information and pending information when the power supply is started; recovery means capable of executing recovery control for recovering the numerical information updated by the update means based on the contents stored in the backup storage means and the hold information stored by the hold storage means when the state control means , the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times of execution of the variable display, so that when the special condition is established, the special state can be controlled, and after the restoration control is executed , when the special condition is established based on the execution of the variable display corresponding to the restored pending information, the updating means can control to the special state when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the second identification information is displayed. Numerical information is updated when variable display of identification information is performed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player while optimizing the control by the initialization.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the game machine of means 1g, for example, when executing the initialization process, the relief time saving counter and the pending memory are reset, while when the power is restored The relief time-saving counter and the pending memory are restored, and when the variable display corresponding to the pending memory at the time of restoration becomes the 800th variation and the condition for the relief time-saving control is established, the relief time-saving control is enabled. Just do it.

(Means 2g) In the means 1g, when the control is made to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when the control is made to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information, the control is made to the advantageous state. After being controlled, the ratio of being controlled to the special state of special advantage is different, and when controlled to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, and to the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information The number of executions of variable display for satisfying the special condition is the special number of times, which is common between the time of control and the time of control. According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the first identification information while increasing interest by exhibiting different game characteristics when the first identification information is variably displayed and when the second identification information is variably displayed. It is possible to suppress an excessive increase in the gambling property by having the special number of times common to the case of display and the case of variable display of the second identification information.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 2g, for example, the ratio of the special advantage in the time saving state after the big hit (time saving continues until the next big hit) is the first special symbol and the second special pattern, and the variation that becomes the condition for the relief time reduction control when the big win is controlled based on the first special pattern and when the big win is controlled based on the second special pattern. It may be configured so that the number of times is common.

(Means 3g) In means 1g or 2g, the disadvantageous setting value is the first probability of being controlled to the advantageous state, and the advantageous setting is the second probability that the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the first probability. and a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values including a value, and a special condition set to an unfavorable set value is more difficult than set to an advantageous set value. The advantage of the special state which is easily established and controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the advantage of the special state which is controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. According to such a configuration, even when the disadvantage setting value is set, the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is controlled after the special state is controlled to the advantageous state. By being higher than the state advantage, the player can be rescued more effectively.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 3g, for example, one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) , and when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are executed, and the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six steps from "1" to "6". And, if it is set to a disadvantageous setting (e.g. "1"), it will reduce the number of fluctuations until the relief time is reduced than if it is set to an advantageous setting value (e.g. "6"). is higher than the advantage of the time-saving state after the big hit. It should be noted that the disadvantageous setting (eg "1") is more likely to be lost than the advantageous setting (eg "6"), so it is easier to save time. Since the relief time reduction is always 800 times of time reduction (substantially until the next big hit), it is more advantageous than the time reduction state via the big win (for example, the number of time reductions is usually 100 times after the big win). good too.

(Means 4b) In any one of means 1g to 3g, provided with setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and controlled to an advantageous state Which of the plurality of types of special conditions to be controlled later is the same regardless of which set value is set, and the advantage of the special condition to be controlled when the special condition is established. is common when any set value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improvement of the gambling property due to the set value, and to realize a healthy game property.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 4g, for example, one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) , and when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are executed, and the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six steps from "1" to "6". Then, after the big hit, which of the multiple types of time-saving states is controlled is made common when any set value is set, and the advantage in the relief time-saving is set when any set value is set. can be configured to be common.

(Means 5g) In any one of means 1g to 4g, when the variable display of the first identification information triggers control to an advantageous state, and when the variable display of the second identification information triggers control to an advantageous state , the ratio of which of the plurality of types is controlled to an advantageous state is different, and when the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and corresponds to the variable display of the second identification information The advantage of the special state controlled after the special condition is established is common between when the special condition is established and when the special condition is established. According to such a configuration, it is controlled when the special condition is satisfied while exhibiting different game characteristics depending on whether the first identification information is variably displayed or the second identification information is variably displayed. Since the advantage of the special state is common regardless of the setting value, it is possible to suppress the improvement of the gambling property and provide an appropriate degree of relief.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 5g, for example, when a big win occurs due to the first special symbol and when a big win occurs due to the second special symbol, The proportions controlled for the normal jackpot and the probability variable jackpot are made different, and the relief time is shortened when the relief time is shortened based on the first special symbol and when the relief time is shortened based on the second special symbol. may be configured so that the advantages of are common.

(Means 6g) In any one of means 1g to 5g, the variable display pattern is selected from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern having a variable display period shorter than the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determining means is provided for determining the variable display pattern determining means, and the variable display pattern determining means has a higher variable display in a special state controlled when a special condition is established than in a special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. is a non-specific display result, the shortened variable display pattern is likely to be selected. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the gaming machine of the means 6g is based on the configuration using the fluctuation pattern table E of FIG. 12-8(E), for example.

(Means 7g) In any one of means 1g to 6g, the variable display pattern comprises variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern corresponding to execution of the ready-to-win effect. If the special state controlled when the special condition is established is more favorable than the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state, the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result. The rate of deciding on a specific variable display pattern is low. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the game machine of means 7g is based on the configuration using the variation pattern table E of FIG. 12-8(E), for example.

(Means 8g) In any one of means 1g to 7g, the updating means can update the specific numerical information different from the numerical information based on the execution of the variable display in the special state, and the state control means By setting the special information, the special state can be controlled, and by canceling the setting of the special information, the special state can be terminated. a backup storage means capable of holding numerical information and specific numerical information updated by the updating means even if the power supply is stopped, and setting information of the special information; and a predetermined condition is satisfied. an initialization means capable of initializing the stored contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the initialization means initializing the setting information of the special information and the specific numerical information, and Do not initialize numeric information. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player even when the predetermined condition is satisfied.

It should be noted that in the present characteristic portion 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of means 8g, for example, in the initialization process shown in FIG. The value of the relief time reduction number counter may be configured not to be initialized.

(Means 1h) A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and controllable to an advantageous advantageous state based on the derivation display of the specific display result, State control means capable of controlling a special state in which variable display is more likely to be executed than state, and update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of variable display, wherein the state control means is update means can be controlled to a special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times of execution of the variable display, and the updating means is a variable of the first identification information Further comprising a suggestive effect executing means capable of updating the numerical information when the display is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and executing a suggestive effect related to establishment of the special condition, wherein the suggestive effect is provided. The execution means has a different ratio of which of the plurality of presentation modes to execute the suggestive presentation in accordance with the number of execution times of the variable display, and the presentation mode of the suggestive presentation suggests a period until the special condition is established. It is an aspect to do. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect mode of the suggestive effect, thereby improving interest and promoting the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 1h, for example, whether or not to execute a countdown production in a mode that suggests the number of fluctuations that is the condition to be controlled to save time The ratio may be changed according to the count value of the relief time saving counter. Also, the gaming machine of means 1h can be realized by, for example, using a table shown in FIG. 12-25 to determine whether or not to display a telop while waiting for a customer and the mode of presentation.

(Means 2h) In the means 1h, the effect mode of the suggestive effect is a mode that can specify the number of execution times of the variable display until the special condition is satisfied. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player of the number of times the variable display is performed until the special condition is satisfied.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the gaming machine of the means 2h is based on, for example, executing a countdown effect in a mode suggesting the number of fluctuations as a condition for the relief time saving control.

(Means 3h) In means 1h or 2h, the suggestive effect is a effect of displaying the specific image, and the specific image is displayed in a plurality of modes in which at least one of color and size is different, and displayed in any mode. The period until the implied special condition is established differs depending on whether the According to such a configuration, interest can be improved by drawing attention to the mode of the specific image.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, the gaming machine of the means 3h is configured to determine whether or not to display a telop while waiting for customers and the mode of presentation using, for example, a table shown in FIG. 12-25. Based on. Further, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 3h, for example, the color and size of the numbers counted down in the image of the countdown effect may be configured to differ according to the count value of the relief time saving counter.

(Means 4h) In any one of means 1h to 3h, variable display execution means capable of executing variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition; Reservation storage means capable of storing information on variable display as reservation information when not established, and a predetermined image capable of displaying a predetermined image when variable display is not executed and no reservation storage is stored in the reservation storage means. and display means, wherein the suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect when the predetermined image is displayed, and the predetermined image is displayed according to the number of times variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied. When displayed, the rate at which the suggestion effect is executed is different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the presence or absence of execution of the suggestive effect, thereby improving interest and promoting the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the gaming machine of the means 4h is based on a configuration that determines whether or not to display a telop while waiting for customers, using a table shown in FIG. 12-25, for example.

(Means 5h) In any one of means 1h to 4h, variable display execution means capable of executing variable display based on the satisfaction of the start condition and the start condition; Reservation storage means capable of storing information on variable display as reservation information when not established, and a predetermined image capable of displaying a predetermined image when variable display is not executed and no reservation storage is stored in the reservation storage means. and display means, wherein the suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect when the predetermined image is displayed, and the predetermined image is displayed according to the number of times variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied. When displayed, the rate at which the suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the predetermined mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the presence or absence of the mode of the suggestive effect, thereby improving interest and promoting the operation of the gaming machine.

In the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the game machine of means 5h is based on a configuration that determines the effect mode of telop display during customer waiting, for example, using a table shown in FIG. 12-25.

(Means 6h) In any one of means 1h to 5h, a variable display executing means capable of executing a variable display based on the start condition being satisfied and the starting condition being satisfied; Reservation storage means capable of storing information on variable display as reservation information when not established, and a predetermined image capable of displaying a predetermined image when variable display is not executed and no reservation storage is stored in the reservation storage means. and display means, wherein the suggestive effect execution means detects at least one of the operation of the operating means and the passage of a game medium through a predetermined area while the predetermined image is displayed. Based on what has been done, a suggestive effect can be executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a suggestive effect to the player actually playing the game, and to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the game machine of means 6h, for example, when the game machine is shifted to the demonstration state, the game ball is operated by operating the ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 or by the start port. If detected, it may be configured to display a telop indicating the remaining number of times until relief time is shortened.

(Means 7h) In any one of means 1h to 6h, setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state is provided, and the suggestive effect execution means Depending on which setting value is set, the ratio of executing the suggestive effect differs. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance interest by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestive effect is executed, and to promote the operation of the gaming machine by suggesting the set value.

Note that, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the means 7h is based on a configuration for determining whether or not to display a telop while waiting for customers, using the table shown in FIG. 12-25.

(Means 8h) In any one of means 1h to 7h, setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state is provided, and the suggestive effect execution means Depending on which set value is set, the ratio of execution of the suggestive effect differs depending on the specific mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance interest by drawing attention to the aspect of the suggestive effect, and to promote the operation of the gaming machine by suggesting the set value.

In this characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the means 8h is based on a configuration for determining whether or not to execute a telop display during customer waiting and the mode of presentation using the table shown in FIG. 12-25.

(Means 9h) In any one of means 1h to 6h, a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state; A setting suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect to suggest is provided, and the setting suggestion effect execution means has a different ratio of executing the setting suggestion effect depending on which set value is set. The effect executing means has a common ratio of executing the suggestive effect regardless of the set value. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by making the player pay attention to whether or not the suggestive effect is executed, and it is possible to suppress complication of the control.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 9h, for example, one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) , and when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are executed, and the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six steps from "1" to "6". Then, while making it possible to execute an effect that suggests a set value (for example, an effect with a different execution ratio depending on the set value), the telop display during customer waiting is executed regardless of which set value is set. It may be configured so that the ratio is common.

(means 10h) in any one of means 1h to 6h and means 9h, setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of set values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state; and a setting suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect suggesting a set value, wherein the setting suggestion effect execution means performs a setting suggestion effect in a specific manner according to which setting value is set. The execution ratio differs, and the suggestive effect executing means has a common ratio of executing the suggestive effect according to the specific mode regardless of the set value. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by making the player pay attention to the aspect of the suggestive effect, and to suppress complication of the control.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modified example, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 10h, for example, one of a plurality of set values with different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) , and when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are executed, and the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six steps from "1" to "6". Then, while making it possible to execute an effect suggesting the set value (for example, an effect with a different execution ratio depending on the set value), even if any set value is set, the customer is waiting in a red effect mode. may be configured so that the execution ratio of the telop display is the same.

(Means 11h) In any one of means 1h to 10h, the suggestive effect execution means is configured so that when the power supply is started and the initialization process is executed and when the recovery process is executed, the power supply is stopped. The rate at which the suggestion effect is executed in a specific period after the start is different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestive effect is executed, and to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the game machine of the means 11c, for example, the execution ratio of the telop display during customer waiting and the countdown effect is different after the initialization process and after the power is restored. It should be configured as follows.

(Means 12h) Any one of means 1h to 11h includes variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a special variable display pattern, wherein the variable display pattern determination means When the condition is established, the special variable display pattern can be determined, and before the special condition is established, the special state is entered when the special variable display pattern is not determined and the variable display is executed by the special variable display pattern. Further provided is a specific notification effect executing means capable of executing a specific notification effect for notifying that the game is to be controlled. According to such a configuration, the player can be notified that the special condition is controlled to the special state by the establishment of the special condition, and the change in the game state can be clearly notified to the player, so that the player can enjoy the interest when the special condition is established. can be improved.

In addition, in the present characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the game machine of means 12h is based on a configuration using, for example, a relief time-saving variation deviation pattern table shown in FIG. 12-8(I).

(Means 13h) In any one of means 1h to 12h, a variable display pattern is determined from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determination means is provided, and the variable display pattern determination means can determine the specific variable display pattern in both cases of the display result of the variable display being the specific display result and the case of not being the specific display result. When the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is higher than the predetermined variable display pattern, and the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied is higher than the predetermined period. When the display result of the variable display is not the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower than in the previous period. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the game machine of the means 13h is based on the configuration using the variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 12-8(F) and (G), for example.

(Means 14h) In any one of means 1h to 13h, there is provided a notice effect execution means capable of executing a notice effect for notifying that the specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, The executing means can execute the advance notice effect in both cases where the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result and when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result, and the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. In the case, the ratio of executing the notice effect is higher than in the case where the specific display result is not obtained, and the predetermined period before the special condition is established is more variable display than the period before the predetermined period. When the result does not result in a specific display result, the proportion of execution of the advance notice effect is low. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the gaming machine of the means 14h is based on a configuration that determines whether or not to execute the advance notice effect, for example, using a table shown in FIG. 12-32.

(Means 15h) In any one of means 1h to 14h, there is provided a notice effect executing means capable of executing a notice effect for notifying that the specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, The executing means is capable of executing the advance notice effect in the specific mode and the predetermined mode in both cases where the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and when the specific display result is not the specific display result, and the display of the variable display. When the result is the specific display result, the ratio of executing the notice effect in the specific mode is higher than in the predetermined mode, and the predetermined period before the special condition is established is more variable than the period before the predetermined period. When the display result of the display does not become the specific display result, the ratio of executing the advance notice effect in the specific mode is low. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modified example, the gaming machine of the means 15h is based on a configuration that determines whether or not to execute the advance notice effect and the effect mode by using the table shown in FIG. 12-32, for example.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of performing variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and being controllable to an advantageous state when a specific display result is derived and displayed,
a light emitting means capable of emitting light;
display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
an effect executing means capable of executing a specific display effect of displaying the specific display and a specific light emitting effect of causing the light emitting means to emit light based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
sound output means capable of outputting a variable display corresponding sound corresponding to the variable display and a specific light emitting effect corresponding sound corresponding to the specific light emitting effect;
a state control means capable of controlling a specific state;
updating means capable of updating numerical information based on execution of variable display ;
The effect execution means executes the specific light emission effect so that the player can recognize the light emission of the light emitting means before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect,
A rate of control to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed,
The display mode of the specific display includes a normal mode, a special mode and a special mode,
The special aspect includes a first special aspect and a second special aspect different from the first special aspect,
When the specific display is displayed in the first special mode, the ratio of control to an advantageous state is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the second special mode,
The specific display of the special mode can be changed to either the first special mode or the second special mode,
When the specific display is displayed in the special mode, the ratio of execution of the specific light emission effect is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the special mode,
The sound output means outputs the sound corresponding to the specific light-emitting effect with priority over the sound corresponding to the variable display being output when the specific light-emitting effect is executed while the sound corresponding to the variable display is being output. is possible and
The state control means is capable of controlling to the specific state when a specific condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times,
The updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is performed and when the variable display of the second identification information is performed .
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images